HomeMy WebLinkAbout12-1985
t:
.1
J11
CITY OF DENTON, TEXAS
PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE
WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE
t
PHASE, 1
SID NO. 9550
DECEMBER 1985
UTILITY BOARD MAYOR
ROLAND LANEY, CHAIRMAN RICHAPD 0. STEWART
EDWARD COOMES
KENNETH FRADY CITY COUNCIL
+ NANCY BOYD LINNIE MoADAMS.
JOHN THOMPSON MARK CHEW
JIM RIDDLESPERGER
CHARLES HOPKINS
RAY STEPHENS
JOE ALFORD
\ j
ACTING CITY MANAGER
RICK SVEHLA, P.F.
DIRECTOR OF UTILITIES
R.E. NELSON, P.E.
ASSISTANT DIRECTOR OF UTILITIES
0. DAVID HAM, P.E.
FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC.
CONSULTING ENGINEERS
FORT WORTH, TEXAS
e,
to
SS H
Il
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
Invitation for Bids A-1
Instruction to Bidders B-1
Bid Proposal C-1
CONTRACT AGREEMENTS AND FORMS
Contract Agreement 1
Performance Bond 3
Payment Bond 5
Table of Contents - General Conditions TC-1
General Conditions GC-I
Supplementary Conditions SC-1
Certificate of Insurance CI-1
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1 GENERAL RE UIREMENTS
01001 General Construction Requirements
DIVISION 2 SITE WORK
02201 Earthwork
02445 Remove and Relocate Fence
02614 Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe
DIVISION 3 CONCRETE
03100 Concrete Formwork
03200 Concrete Reinforcement
03300 Cast- in-place Concrete
DIVISION 5 _METALS
05120 Structural Steel
05710 Miscellaneous Metals
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
09905 Plant Painting
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
11000 General Equipment Stipulations
11247 Potassium Permanganate Feed System
i
fi I
S~
f~
I
DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13125 Fiberglass Building !
13522 Filter Media Replacement (Dual Media)
13550 Weir Pans
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14375Y Platrorm-Lift Hand Truck
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL
15064 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
15078 Miscellaneous Piping and Fittings
15079 Disinfection
15136 Miscellaneous Valves
15834 Air Handling Unit
` DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL
16000 General Electrical Requirements
16100 Wire and Conduit System
16150 Electrical Equipment
16181 Low Voltage Motor Starter Centers
16500 Lighting System
16980 Instrumentaton and Supervisory Control
V
I
s
i
d
j I
CITY OF DENTON, TEXAS
WATER 'TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE-PHASE I
(810 NO. 9550)
ADDENDUM NO. 1
January 6, 1986
Bids to be Received: 2:00 P.M., Tuesday, January 14, 1985
The following modifications, clarifications, additions, or deletions shall
be made to the appropriate sections of the plans and specifications and
shall become part of the Contract Documents.
Receipt of this Addendum shall be acknowledged in the appropriate space of
the Proposal,
SPECIFICATJONS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Section 01001 - General Cons trtic tIorr Requirements
Page 01001-1, Paragraph 1.01, Scope of Work, to the numbered list of
items to be included as work under this contract, add the following
i tems,
116. Replacement of the existing access ladders in Filters 1-8 with
aluminum access ladders.
7. Extension of the existing chlorine solution line in the filter
pipe gallery,".
2. Section 01001, General Construction Requirements
Page 01001-9, Paragraph1 1,27, Water For Construction, change the
phrase, "..,install at nis expense, a slow closing valve on the outlet
and a suitable meter." to read "...install at his expense, a slow
closing valve on the outlet.", and add the sentences, "A fire hydrant
meter may be obtained Orom the Owner upon an established deposit. The
deposit is refundable provided the meter Is returned in its original
condition.".
3. Section 01001 - General Construction Requirements
Page 01001-10, Paragraph 1.29, Measurement and Payment, Subparagraph
A., Construction of the 36" Finished Water Line, add the following
sentence, "This bid item is to include the extension of the existing
chlorine solution line in the filter pipe gallery as shown on the
Plans and specified hercin.
I
h. Section 01001- General Construction Requirements t
Page 01001-10, Paragraph 1,28, Measurement and Pa,lnent, Subparagraph
B., Replacement of Filter Media and Inspection and Repair of Filter ;
Bottoms, add the following sentence, "This bid item is to include the
replacement of the existing access ladders in Filters 1-8 with alumi-
num ladders as shown on the Plans and specified herein.".
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
5. Section 02201 - Earthwork
Page 02201-6, add paragraph 3.04, as shown below:
113.04 FILL MATERIAL FOR TdE POTASSIUM PERMANGANATE FEED BUILDING
The Contractor shall construct the fiberglass potassium perman-
ganate feed building to the grades and elevations shown on the
Plans,
Fill material used to build the grade to the desired levels
shall be a non-expansive soil A t'h a plasticity index less than
10.
Fill material shall be placed in lifts of not greeter than six
inches (611) and shall be compacted to 95% of the Proctor den-
sity."
t "
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
6. Section 11247 - Potassium-Permanganate Feed Sastem
Page 11247-2, Paragraph 2.03, Dust Collector, add the following sen-
tence to the first paragraph, "Cloth filters shall be madQ of woven
polyester.".
PLANS
j 1. Sheet 4 of 9, the dimension from the south fence line to the proposed
concrete slab for the fiberglass chemical feed building is 81011, as ;
shown on the attached drawing, Sheet 4, i
2. Sheet 4 of 9, the distance from the gate on the proposed fence to the
south fence line shall be 4214", as shown on the attached drawing,
Sheet 4.
3. Sheut 4 of 9, revise the site grading plan as shown on the attached
drawing, Sheet 4,
4. Sheet 5 of 9, Section I and Details 1 and 2, change the finished floor
elevation of the proposed chemical feed building from 536.0 to 637.25.
I
a
5. Sheet 8 of 9, detail titled INSTALLATION OF NEW I4CIR PANS, change the r( i
following details and elevation. The new top of weir elevation shall r
be 645.25. The new dimension from the top of the weir pan to the
bottom of the trough shall be 2' 9". The new dimension showing the
amount of existing concrete to be removed shall be 6". The new dimen-
sion from the top of the remaining concrete to the bottom of the
trough shall be 1' 8-1/2"
i
1
i
a
i
i
i
Sheet a of 9, detail titled INSTALLATION OF NEW WEIR PANS, change the 1
following details and elevation, The new top of weir elevation shall r
be 645.25. The new dimension from the top of the weir pan to the
bottom of the trough shall be 2' 911, The new dimension showing the
amount of existing concrete to be removed shall be 611. The new dimen-
sion from the top of the remaining concrete to the bottom of the
trough shall be 1' 9-1/211.
I
i
I
' i
1
CITY OF DENTON, TEXAS
WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE-PHASE I /
(BID NO. 9550) /
ADDENDUM NO. 2
January 6, 1986
Bids to be Received; 2:00 P.M., Tuesday, January 14, 1985
The following modifications, clarifications, additions, or deletions shall
be made to the appropriate sections of the plans and specifications and
shall become part of the Contract Documents.
Receipt of this Addendum shall be acknowledged in the appropriate space of
the Proposal.
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 2_- SITE WORK _
1. Section 02275 Riprap
Add the following section to the specifications;
1002275 RIPRAP
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish and place riprap of stone or
concrete around the potassium permanganate feed building as
shown on the Plans and specified herein.
i
2.00 MATERIALS
Stone for riprap sl 1l consist of field stone or rough unhewn
quarry stone as nearly uniform in section as is practicable. The tand suitable be in dense, all resistant
puaction of air rpose Intended,and
for to the the
water,
Mortar and grout required for the riprap shall consist of one
part of Portland cement and threb parts of sand, thoroughly
mixed with water. MortaN shall have a consistency such that it
can be easily handled and spread by trowel. Grout shall have a
consistency such that it will flow into and completely fill all
joints.
The stones for the riprap shall conform to the following
graauation:
1
k
Size Passi m
12" 100
Q" 60 - 90
6" 10 - 30
3" 0 - 5
3.00 ROCK RIPRAP (COMMON MORTAR RIPRAP)
Prior to placing the stones, a suitable bed shall be excavated
for the base course or layer, The material secured by
excavation shall be used in dikes or dams around the end of the
walls or uniformly spread on embankment slopes. The base course
or layer of stone shall be bedded well into the ground with
their edges in contact. Each succeeding course or layer shall
be well bedded into and placed on even contact with its
preceding course or layer. The finished surface shall present
an even, tight surface true to line and grades of typical
sections,
Sufficient mortar shall be used in Common Mortar Riprap to fill
completely all voids in the 1:.yers of stone, and surface shall
be swept with a stiff' broom. Grout may be used in lieu of
idortar.
K
END Of SECTION"
PLANS
1. Sheet 4 of 9, add riprap around the proposed potassium permanganate
feed building as shown on the attached drawing.
i
END OF ADDENDUM NO, 2
{
Attachment
~~J
CITY OF DENTON, TEXAS
WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE-PHASE I
(DID NO. 9550)
ADDENDUM NO. 3
January 9, 1986
Bids to be Received: 2:00 P.M., Tuesday, January 14, 1985
The following modifications, clarifications, additions, or deletions shalt
be made to the appropriate sections of the plans and specifications and
shall become part of the Contract Documents.
Receipt of this Addendum shall be acknowledged in the appropriate space of
the Proposal.
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 11 ` EQUIPMENT
1. Section 11247 Potassium Permanganate Feed System
Page 112473, paragraph 2,05, Scale and Loss-of-Weight Recorder,
change the sentence "The Contractor shall supply a 3000-1b. portable
beam scale...", to read "The Contractor shall supply a 1000-1b,
portable beam scale...".
DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
2. gectionn135 - Weir Pans
,
Page 13550-1, paragraph 1.01, Scope; change the sentence "Weir pans
shall be as manufactured by Leopold, or approved equal.", to read
"Weir pans shall be as manufactured by Luopold, Warminster
Fiberglass, or approved equal."
END OF 'CENDUM 60, 3
.
1
r> .
ti
1
INVITATION FOR BIDS
Sealed proposals addressed to Mr. John J. Marshall, Purchasing Agent of the
City of Denton, Texas, will be received at the office of the Purchasing
Agent at the City of Denton Service Center/Warehouse at 901-B Texas Street,
until 2:00 P.M., January 14, 1986, for the construction of the following j
item:
DENTON WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE - PHASE I
DID NUMBER 9550
At this time and place the proposals will be publicly opened and real
aloud. Any bid received after closing time will be returned unopened.
i
Contract Documents, including Plans and Specifications, are on file and may
be examined without charge in the office of the Purchasing Agent, 901-8
Texas Street, the office of the Director of Utilities, Muncipal Building,
Denton, Texas and the offices of Freese and Nichols, Inc., Consulting Engi-
neers, 811 Lamar Street, Fort Worth, Texas 76102, Telephone (817) 336-7161.
Contract documents, including plans and specifications may be procured from
Freese and Nichols, Inc., at the above address as follows:
Cost: $25.00 per set Non-Refundable
A cashier's check, certified check or acceptable bidder's bond, payable to
the City of Denton, Texas in an amount not less than five (5%) percent of
the bid submitted, must accompany each bid as a guarantee that, if awarded
the contract, the Bidder will, within fifteen (15) days after receipt of
Notice of Award, enter into a contract and execute bonds on the forms pro-
v1ded in the Contract Documents.
i
Attention is called to the fact that not less than the prevailing wage
rates, as established by the (Owner) and as hereinafter set forth in the
Contract Documents hereinbefore described and which are made a part hereof,
must be paid on this project,
Performance and Payment Bonds will be required.
j In case of ambiguity or lack of clearness in stating proposal prices, the
City of Denton, Texas reserves the right to adopt the most advantageous
construction thereof, or to reject any or all bids, and waive formalities.
No bid may be withdrawn within thirty (30) days after date on which bids
are opened.
CITY OF DENTON, TEXAS
.
TOn`Jm-arsa 4.
Purchasing Agent
A-1
i
1
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. Defined Terms. Terms used its these Instructions to Bidders which are
define~d-in JF6 General Conditions of the Agreement have the meanings
assigned to them in the General Conditions.
2. Qualification of Bidders. To demonstrate his qualifications for the
Proj-4Rt, eac~iTifTder mus~lie prepared to submit within five (5) days of
t owner's request written data as to the Bidder's Qualifications such as
financial data, previous experience, list of available equipment, and
evidence of authority to conduct business in the jurisdiction whFre the
project is located.
3. Examination of Contrart Documents and Site.
3.1 Before submitting his Bid, each Bidder must (a) examine the
Contract Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to familiaM ze
himself with local conditions that may in any manner affert
performance of the work, (c) familiarize himself with federal,
state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations affecting
performance of the work, and (d) carefully correlate his
observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
3.2 Before submitting his Bid each Bidder will, at his own expense,
retake such surveys and investigations of subsurface or latent
physical conditions as he may deem necessary to determine his bid
M price for performance of the work within the terms of the
Contract Documents.
, I
3.3 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible
representation by the Bidder that he has complied with every
requirement of this Article 3.
4. Inter stations. All questions about the meaning or intent of the
Contract Documents shall be submitted to Engineer in writing. Replies will
be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by Engi-
neer as having received the bidding documents. Questions received less
than two days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered.
Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding, Oral
and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.
5. Bid Security. Each bid must be accompanied by a certified or
cashi" cTiecerr an approved bidder's Bond underwritten by a surety named
in the current list of 'Surety Companies Acceptable on Federal Bonds4 as
published in the Federal Register by the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts,
U.S. Treasury Department, for the sum of five (5%) percent of the amount
of the maximum total bid as a guarantee that, if awarded the contract, the
D-1
I
1
i
I
I
Bidder will prom^tly enter into a Contract and execute a Performance and
Payment Bond on the forms included in the Contract Documents. Certified or
cashier's check shall be made payable to the City of Denton.
6. Contract Time. The number of days for the completion of work (the
Contr- aTT me -shall be inserted by the Bidder in the space provided in the i
did (Proposal) and will be included in the executed Agreement. Provisions
for liquidated damages are set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. The
parallel 36" finished water line must be completed and in service by April
30, 1986 and prior to any work on the filters.
Time of completion will be evaluated for each bid in determining the award
of contract.
7. Bid Form (Proposal),
7.1 Bidders shall use the Sid (Proposal) forms included in the docu-
ments for each contract Bid. Bid (Proposal) forms are to be left
attached to documents in same manner as received by Bidders.
' Supplemental data to be furnished shall be included in same
sealed envelope with Proposal,
7.2 Bid (Proposal) Forms must be completed in ink. The Bid price of
each item on the form roust be stated in words, if specifically
requested, and/or numerals; in case of a conflict, words will
take precedence.
7,3 Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by
the president or a vice-president (or other corporate officer
accomparied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate-
, I seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assis-
tanf. secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation
shall be shown below the signature.
7.4 Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and
signed by a partner, his title must appear under his signature
and the official address of the partnership must be shown below
the signature,
1 7.5 All names must be printed below the signature,
7.6 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda
(the numbers o~ which shall be filled in on the Bid Form).
8, Submission of Bida. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place
ind1 aFRFTn -tTVTnvi"iation for Bids and shall be included in an opaque
sealed envelope, marked with the Project title and name and address of the
Bidder and accompanied by the Bid Security and other reg0eed documents.
9. Modification and Withdrawal of 11ids. Bids may be modified or
withcfr^awn by an appropr3aEe -Jocumenf-Tu-Ty executed (in the manner that a
Bid must be exec{Led) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be
B-2
submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids. Bids may not be
withdrawn after opening of Bids for the period set forth in the invitation
for Bids.
10. Opening of Bids. Bids will be opened as indicated in the invitation
for Bi s. s received after such time will not bF: considered, and will
be returned unopened.
11. Bids to Remain Open. All Bids shall remain open for the period of
J
time se or n Tie rhn`vitat ion for Bids, but Owner may,n his that date.
discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Security prior 12. Award of Contract.
12.1 Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids and waive any
and all formalities, and the right to disregard all nonconforming
conditional Bids o counter 12.2 In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider the qualifications of the
Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed re-
quirements, and alternates and unit prices if requested in the
BiJ forms. He may consider the qualifications and experience of
Subcontractors and other persons and organizations (including
those who are to furnish the principal items of material or
equipment proposed for those portions of the work as to which
the ident ty of Subcontractors and other persons and ornCondi-
tions must be submitted as specified in the Supplementary
or Specifications. He may conduct such investigations as
he deems necessary to establish the responsibillty,qualifi-
Subcon-
tions and financial ability of the Bidders, proposed
tractors and other persons and organizations to do the work in
{ accordance with the Contract Documents to Owner's satisfaction
f within the prescribed time. Owner reserves the right to reject i
the Bid of any Bidder who does not meet any such evaluation to
Owner's satisfaction,
it will be awarded to the lowest
12.3 if a contract is to be awarded,
responsible Bidder whose evaluation by Owner indicates to the
Owner that the award will be in the best interests of the
Project,
12.4 It Is tpwilldbehmadehasOs'etrforthainathenInof bids vitationnforwBids,f
co ontrac
The successful bidder will be notified by a Notice of Award which
may be a letter or telegram. Time oficompletio eis vlrsubject
important and failure to meet comple
the Contractor t liquidated ;,y Conditions section aofsthas provided e Contract,in the
SupplementaY
I
f
B-3
13, Execution of Contract.
13.1 The accepted Bidder, within fifteen (15) days after formal notice /
of award, shall execute the formal contract Agreement and
required Bonds on the forms prepared and submitted by the Owner. ;
13.2 The Owner will issue a Notice to Proceed authorizing the
Contractor to commence work.
14. Wa ec Rates, There shall be paid on the project not less than the
genera'T prevailing rates of wages in the locality of the project, which
prevailing wage rates have been determined by the Owner in accordance with
statutory requirements. There is included in the Supplementary Conditions i
a schedule giving for various classifications the minimum rates as have
been established by the City of Denton.
15. Sales Taxes, The Owner qualifies as an exempt agency pursuant to the
provis-ons`oT-A-rticle 20,04 (F) of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use
Tax Act, and is not subject to any State or City sales taxes.
i
The Contractor performing this contract may purchase, rent or lease all 1
materials, supplies, equipment used or consumed in the performance of this
contract by issuing to his supplier an exemption certificate in lieu of the
tax, said exemption certificate complying with the State Comptroller's
ruling 895-0.07. Any such exemption certificate issued by the Contractor
in lieu of the tax shall be subject to the provisions of' the State
Comptroller's ruling 895-0.09 as amended to be effective October 2, 1968.
16. Performance and Payment Bonds. Performance and Payment Bonds are re-
quire or s pro3ec`t and-sTiaTT-be provided in accordance with Article 5
of the General Conditions,
END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
f
B-4
i
- 4 T
i
BID
(PROPOSAL) 1
Texas
danuay 14 . 19.u
PROPOSAL OF The Boswell Company
A Corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas ,
a partnership consisting of ,
the business name of an individual.
TO: CITY Of DENTON, TEXAS
t PROPOSAL FOR: WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE - PHASE I
The undersigned Bidder, pursuant to the foregoing Invitation for Bids, has
carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, this Proposal the Supple-
mental Conditions, the form of Contract Agreement and Bonds, the General
Conditions of the Agreement, the Specifications, the Plans, and also the
site of the work, and will provide all necessary labor, superintendence,
machinery, equipment, tools, materials, services and other facilities to
complete fully all the work as provided in the Contract Documents; and
binds himself upon formal acceptance of his Proposal to execute a contract
and bonds, according to the prescribed forms, for the following prices
to-wit:
Item Estimated Description Unit Extended
N,o, Quantity (Price to be Written in Words) Price Amount
1. Construction of the parallel
I
I 1 L.S. 36" filtered water tine
connecting the filters and the
clearwells, complete in place 1
as shown on the Plans and 1
specified herein, the lump sum
of:
Forty Thousand, Three Hundred and
Fifty-Four Dollars L.S. S 40,354.00
C-1
;s
Item Estimated Description Unit Extended
No. uantit Price to be Written in Words Price Amount
f 2. 1 L.S. Replacement of the existing
filter media with dual filter
media in filters 1 through 8,
removal and replacement of
defective grout, cleaning the
underdrain system, complete as
shown on the Plans and speci-
fied herein, the lump sum of:
4na Hundred Savonty-Nina Thnucand
ta~en Hundred FnrtV_ThraeDO11ar5 L.S. $179,743.00
~ I
3. 1 L.S. Replacement of the existing +
weir plates with serpentine
weir pans in sedimentation
basins 1 through 8, complete
in place as shown on the plans
and specified herein, the lump
sum of :
One Hundred Forty-Two Thousand,
Nine Hundred Thirteen Dollars L. S. $142,913.00
4. 1 L.S. Construction of the potassium
permanganate feed system at
t the Raw Water Pump Station,
including the building and all
required piping, appurte-
nances, and electrical, etc.,
complete in place as shown on
the Plans and specified
herein, the lump sum of,
Seventy-One Thousand, One
Hundred and Forty Dollars L.S.
$31,140. 0
5. 1 L.S. For construction of the air
handling system at the Raw
Water Pump Station, including
all piping, ductwork, struc-
tural electrical, etc.,
complete in place as shown on
the Plans and specified
herein, the lump sum of:
Twenty-Six Tho,sand L.Four Hundrgd
.and Twenty-Seven Dollars L.S. $ 26.427_00
C-2
i
Item Estimated Description Unit Extended
No. uantItL (Price to be Written in Words Price Amount
ADD OR DEDUCT ITEMS FOR REPAIR OF THE FILTER BOTTOMS
6 10 EA. For supplying and installing
Leopold filter underdrain
blocks, including grout, etc.,
complete in place, the
price per unit block:
One Hundred and r
Fifty Dollars $150.00 $ 15500,00
(Time extension required per
filter block: 1 _ days)
7, 10 EA. For supplying and installing
Wheeler filter underdrain
blocks and porcelain balls, '
Including grout, etc,,
complete in place, the
price per unit block.
One Hundred
Dollars $100.00 $ 1,000.00
(Time extension required per
filter block: 1 days)
11 TOTAL AMOUNT OF BID ITEMS 1-7 S 463:077
i
Within fifteen (15) days after formal acceptance of this Proposal by a
Notice of Award of contract, the undersigned will execute the Contract
Agreement and will furnish approved surety bonds and such other bonds as
required by the Contract Documents for the faithful performance of the
Contract. In the event the Contract Agreement and bonds are not executed
within the time above set forth, the attached bid security in the amount of
6% of Greatest Amount Bid
is to become the property of the Owner as liquidated damages for the delay
and additional work caused thereby, ;
The undersigned agrees to substantially complete all work covered by these
Contract Documents within 210 consecutive calendar days from the day
established for the start F-The work as set forth in a written Notice to
Proceed to be issued by the Owner or by the Engineer for the Owner. Except
by mutual agreement of the Owner and the Contractor the date established
for the start of work will be not less than ten (10f days or not more than
thirty (30) days after the date of the Contract Agreement,
C-3
Receipt is acknowledged of the following addenda:
Addendum No. 1 Dated,Janutry_6, 1986
Addendum No, 2 Dated January 6, 1986
Addendum No. 3 Dated January 9, 1986
Addendum No. 4
Respectfullljsuhu tted,
Attested By: C-
m yv Boswell, President
(Print Nam and Title)
P. 0. Box 4047
ecre a
Bryan, Texas 77805 i
Address
(SEAL) If Bidder is a Corporation
NOTE: Do not detach bid forms from other papers, Fill in with ink and
submit complete with attached papers.
f
I
• C-4
I
a
r
i
l~
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF Denton
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 4th day of_Februar.v
A.D., 19 8b, by and between the City of Denton
Denton and State of Texas, acting through its
of the County of
City Manager thereunto duly authorized so to do,
Party of the First Part, hereinafter termed the OWNER, and_ the
Boswell Company
of the City of Bryan County of Brazos
and State of Texas Party of the Second Part, hereinafter
E termed CONTRACTOR.
r WITNESSETH; That for and in consideration of the payments and
agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the Party of
the First Part (OWNER), and under the conditions expressed in the bonds
bearing even date herewith, the said Party of the Second Part (CONTRACTOR)
hereby agrees with the said Party of the First Part (OWNER) to commence
and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows;
City of Denton
U Water Treatment Plant Upgrade
Phase I - (Bid Number 9550)
and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in
the General Conditions of the Agreement; and at his (or their) own proper
cost and expense to furnish all the materials, supplies, machinery, equip-
ment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and other accessories and
services necessary to complete the said construction, in accordance with
the conditions and prices stated in the Proposal attached hereto, and in
accordance with all the General Conditions of the Agreement, the Special
Conditions, the Notice to Bidders (Advertisement for Bids), Instructions
1
10-15-71
'78
.j
I
to Bidders, and the Performance and Payment Bonds, all attached hereto, +
and in accordance with the plans, which includes all maps, plats, blue-
prints, and other drawings and printed or written explanatory matter
thereof, and the Specifications therefor, as prepared by FREESE AND
NICHOLS: INC., herein entitled the ENGINEER, each of which has been Identi-
all of which are
fid CONTRACTO
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work on or after the
date established for the start of work as set forth in a written notice
to commence work and to substantially complete all work within the time
Conditions. of time as are pro-
stated neProposal
and subject Special to such
vided by the The General
OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds the
price or prices shown in the Proposal, which forms a part of this Con-
tract, such payments to be subject to the General and Special Conditions
of the. Contract.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed
this Agreement in the year and day first above written.
ATTEST: {
a
City of Den on, TX
(arty o~ e st ar , ME~--
i ,
By -
Rick Svehla, P.E.
Acting City Manager
(SEAL)
ATTEST;
Cf~ The Boswell Company
Ll...+.' 1.
Party o the Second a~ rt, CONTRA57~OR
(SEAL)
2
10/22/73
'7Q
I
I
r
I ~
I
PERFORMANCE BOND
STATE OF TEXAS ¢ 1
• 1
COUNTY OF Denton ¢
KNOW ALI. MEN BY THESE PRESENTS; That The Boswell
Company _ of the City of _ Bryan ,
County of Brazos and State of Texas
as PRINCIPAL, and Fidelity and Deposit of
4a•l~#rftj Maryland as SURETY,
authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds
for principals, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Denton,
Texas as OWNER, in the penal sum of Four Hundred'
and Sixty-Three Thousand and Seventy-Seven Dollars 4639077.00
for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and
their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly
` and severally, by these presents;
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract
f with the OWNER, dated the 4th day of February ly 86 , for the con-
struction of
City of Denton, Texas
Water Treatment Plant Upgrade-Phase I (Bid Number 9550)
which contract is hereby referred to and mado a part hereof as fully and to
I
the same extent as if copied at length herein,
NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such, that if
the said Principal shall faithfully perform said Contract and shall in all
respects duly and faithfully observe and perform all and singular the cove-
nants, conditions and agreements in and by said contract agreed and cove-
nanted by the Principal to be observed and performed, and according to the
true intent and meaning of said Contract and the Plans and Specifications
hereto annexed, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain
in full force and effect;
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the
provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as amended
3
10-15-71
'78
i
a
by acts of the 56th Legislature, Regular Session, 1959, and all liabilities
on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said
Article to the same extent as if It were copied at length herein.
PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed upon this
bond, venue shall lie in _DentoA__ _ County, State of Texas.
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change,
extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or
I,I to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings
accompanying the same, shall in anywise affect its oblign.tion on this bond,
and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alter-
ation or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be per-
formed thereunder.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and
sealed this instrument this day of Febr, ry , 19 86
0.4
De osit of imare Maryland
The Boswell Co_mpan~Fidelit n
r nc pal K By By (}yrne
E Title President _ Title T
1r'~_-
( Address P. 0. Box 4047 Address
Bryan, Texas 77805 _e /'lieu SbV, 1
(SEAL) (SEAL)
f
The name and address of the Resident Agent of Surety is: _
J INS. AGENCY
Harm ,ome
#rb dox 66304
2""*03' Texas 77005+
NOTE; Date of Bond must'not a prior to date of Contract.
4
10-15-71
I;
J
f
PAYMENT BOND
STATE OF TEXAS d ~
COUNTY OF Denton `
Ei:OW ALL MEN BY THESE; PRESENTS; That The Boswell Company
of the City of Bryan
County of Brazos -
and State of Texas
as PRINCIEAL, and _ Fidelity and Deposit of-8ai~3~i r" Maryland
riarland
zed to act as suretyaansbcnds,fortprincipals~eare
unto the City of Denton, Texas hheldwandffirn~lytbo ndf
as OWNER, in the penal sum of four Hundred and Sixty-Three Thousand and
Sevonty-Seven 00114Drs 463,077.00
t sa rinc pa an Surety bind ties es anditheirehei t administrators,
executors, successors and assigns, Jointly and severally, by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has erl!t red into a9o taro written contract
with the Owner, dated the da
4th y Reed r 1 ofy~ , for tha, construction
of City of I_ )Anton, Texas,_ Water Treatment Plant Upgrade Phase I -
(Bid Number 9550)
which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to,
the same extent as if copied at length herein,
i
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION 15 SUCH, that
if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and materal
to him or a subcontractor to tha prosecution of the work provided for in,
said contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise
full force and effect; to remain in
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the
provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as amended
by acts of the 56th Legislature, Regular Session, 1959, and all liabilities
on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said
Article to the same extent as if it, were copied ~t 'length herein,
PROVIDED FURTHER, that IF any legal action be filed upon this
bond, venue shall lie in _Denton
County, State of Texas.
5
10-15-71
178
i
I
1
i,
ISv!6c
r;
li
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change,
extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or
to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications or drawings
accompanying the same, shall in anywise affect its obligation on this bond,
and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time,
alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be
performed thereunder.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and
sealed this instrument this ----day of 19 86
PM
The Boswell Company Fidelity and Deposit of-Ba✓44RwL,~ Maryland
?tincipa~._-.. Suret
• 1
By 4 By -
Title President Title
_~f
Address P. 0, Box 4047 Address
Brvan, Texas 77805^~_-- P 7 7 22-14
(SEAL.) (SEAL)
The name and address of the Resident Agent of Surety is:
kM 10 MM INS. AGENCY
Note, Date of fond must not be prior to date of Contract.
~f
5
10-15-71
t J~
I
<l.=131.;'1 '
Yj
1f
el
! /I
5NSURA lilis is to Certify VwL the poflcy of pollc1115 lislud bclmN have INfen ow(.4 to pu nulnnd in nsled and nla It, fora as of the dnte of this certificate.
Tim
b C(loificaln Shall remain in elluct unlll the Ilslell uxplralloo dlnu, it ally, or until 10 days efler IvrlthNI 1101 I• II'oilud to the uerWicate 11041131, W11VChevor
u
data Shull lirsl Deco r.
X This fxv tificole is nut an insu lance pulVey dnd does not amond, ullm ur rxinnd e0voruye allonied by Ih1s pollcias listed. NOlwithslonl loll any rnq I
o
moo[, torn) or condition of any contract or other docuulent wish Inspect to whwrff tlyif ecrtilicd to way I>c issuctl or may partuin, the insulancD albrded by
u the policies listed Is subject to ell d1e terms of such policles.
~ ~~~•~IiFCC 11VF PATE OF 11P; CENiIFIC AIE
rlnAlE nrau nople[55 of cornrlenl[ llatot!l February 11R 1956
E ISSUEIIAT 1
City of Denton lWs_tin_,T_e„xas
Denton, Texas TEXAS EMPLOYERS'
F INSURANCE ASSOCIATION
TEXAS EMPLOYERS
y INDEMNITY COMPANY
TY EMPLOYERS CASUALTY
COMPANY
`AMEldJb MIOf.rS Uf IrviUREU
EMPLOYERS NATIONAL
INSURANCE COMPANY
EMPLOYERS CASUALTY
The Boswell Company CORPORATION
Box 4047 EMPLOYERS NATIONAL
Bryan, Texas 77801 INSURANCE CORPORATION
EMPLOYERS OF TEXAS
LLOYD'S
i HY 1AuI nerA Re- enrnbce) l
T,4ediL/Aubrey onnall Di ~~r,
,ild l'.° Iln Pgll k0111 c. ryrA'a
` INSURANCE IN FORCE pirenan loth Auldol P" Pollry SiAtl
'MI` D°Ie [ rh for Ou nnta) 0, A r to 10CATION Or OpiRAT"NS
Perron y° Palu Prov blo nlf B9 0°
t inb PohrY Number AHD
i heal 1 ~Larl re a - FPflY C: mplut Wllh Rv tlvlremnN. of flAfl 01 TEXAS
R _ ham Worlrn Lompenwllon low
oll.etn Y
A 55066
Cnveregn I
" L P ° And Aenrwal ll Rlnnf• X X X sILo,000 4100,000
w 3 Ih.relar Se. Nrodln0
Mtlu ire m,nr
i i - Fully tomgll.l Will,
~~emZ Ce. rro R• of lrou_low
o A
D Cnr. rogo 0.1^nk• 1
a And n.n.wm 11 See N^Jd,nO X x X =100,000 SI00r00
} ~ Ilvr.oi
Q 3 Aedlll, 1 - 15 Q,000. sincludod U. S.A.. ITf TiRAItlvRlit OR
Hen, J
X y aS
POSSESSIONS AND CANADA
r0 8 .4 Inlery 11,3350 X X X L P,advtN only
a qp Pra O.'tY Ind Rvnew°I IF A.flk.
X X Ix 1 Inc) Uded s Incl uded
ierPet _ fr. HeOdr JfnO
U,y. Du mope _
lit. n
.m t RadnY 1 1 5(y~(f~~L fv00. APY NebI° U.f. A.. NS t(RRROR{If OA
P lmty y 590568 Included SvJI POSSISSIONf AND CANADA
4,
d n 4 Pr And of f If Nnnk • Pint
X X X t Included APPIIt°bte _
Omani [hnei Sa. N10dIOR ! N
s 1
Item S
And Aennwol It Monk.
There ol. I Sve Noe dlnq
I Ipm b I+ r, j
I` And Renewal 11 EIunY. ---1-v--.•~_-
Sher-gel •-1_ so.",adino ~l 1 L
PIMA;F` Jobt Denton Suter Treatment Plant Upgrade - Phase I
Policies vill not be cancelled or materially altered until aft<~r 30 days prior written notice;
has been given to the City of Denton, Owner, and Engineer. City of Denton is named additions'
insured under Policy OIL3350 and 590568. All policies are endorsed to show waiver of subrogation i
in favor of The CiLy of Deepnton. Policy 01L3350 provides Premises coverage, Products/computed
Operatiofsa~OllVeo~ciPsanwillnbBnfurniehedton requester Umbrella excesu coveraKatcerCifledua A
Cop1emo Qnso r {tz~aat separately and is attached.
(3v* 4u
Tu/ r 0' - a AiA .
ISSUE DATE ilihVDUlY"
nvrwi 2/11/86
PrlooucT.R -
THiS CE,RTIEfCATF. 1S ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS
t
ClRTIFICATE HOI DFR THIS CER11FICKI E DOEN NOT AMEND,
Natic.rEal General f\gency Inc. ORIGHTS UP0117HE OVERAGE AFFONOEO OY THE POLICIES HELOW.
1301 Young Street LxFr.ND oR - f
Dallas, Texas 75202 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE 1
one 214 760.6540 cohu~ANV
IFTltn A Employers National Insurance Company ;
COA'WANI
INSURED - I.ETTF:R
The RGRW811 CO. C°JMPANY
P. 0, Box 4047 dTTER C
Bryan, Texas 77801 cDh+Pnlrv - - -
LC Tfrn ID
COh1PANY
LINTER ABOVE NOIT W7 9TANOINLCERTIFY i ANY REOUIRFMFNT, TERM OR COND TIONLOr ANY CO4fMCT ONO HER DO ;UMENT WITH RESPECTT 0 WHICFILTNI9 CERTIFICATE MAY
B
BE E ISSUED UCH MAY POLICIES. PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY 7315 POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS suaAer TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS, AND CONDI.
S OF OUCH
TYPE Of INSURANCE
L7Fl PUI It Y NUMBER
Flttir DFeC1Nr MIGI IxFVMrl1N IfAOILITY LIMTFS R1 THOU6AN_D9
- Mtt V. Y,YQ 11A1F
RENL TAI. l.IAD1LITY CCCUkRfN AOOR E
f OMPrk HENSW FRAM M31 FY $ $
N11)RY
PAfMISFS~UPEILl110N5
FXP( RCIiIH1NU P/'~'Eprv
EXPL
OSION h LfJLLAPSE UAWit) OAJ.. IRE $ $
PROVUCT JC0A1PLElt0 Of'1. rVJ10N5
CONTRACTUAL.
- HI d PI".
_ INUEPPOPIT CONTRACTORS CGMOrnED $
! 0110AD 10Rh1 PIWPcAIY IlA1r1ACiF
! P1 RSOWJ1 I!I II IB f
I PFINONAL INJURY Q,
A_UTA VTOE LIAB!LIfY
AIIY AUTO Ei kr ?\q C'.:r,
ALL OWWL) AiI?DS(PIIIV. PAS„)
AL, OWNEO AUTOS (RTUNI T10h1 ~xtr
R) PA!:S ! ,ICY
HAW AUT09 1,~)/Ixt 1Tl $
NON-ONN1 U AU I OS PrIUl'e11 rv
GAMCE ILALifIIIY OAMAGF, $
-
{
B dPD
COI,IgiNID $ ~I
EKCESS LIABILITY
X WORELLA IORh1 III 652316 a a pa v
WWII IRAN UMaR_L(A FLmA1 4/1/$5 4/1/86 oMOHED $ 8,000 $
3,000
WORKEnS' COMPENSATION STATUWRY
AND
$
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY {EACHACC;OENT)
(DISEASFPOLICY L1FAlTj
OTHER $ IUISEASSCACIIEbIALOY'Ef) (
UEScn!PTION OF OPElYITIONSII.OCA'fIONSNEFIICLESlSPECIAL RUMS
Jobs Denton Water Treatment Plant Upgrade - Phase i
nton
City of Denton to named additional lnauzeci - olio has waiver in favor ofDeCitv of,
MUM
The City of Denton & Engineer SHOULD ANY OF THE ASOVE LESCRIBED POLICIES a E CANCEL LED BEFORE / HE
Denton, Texas PIRATIOj PATE T67REOF, CAI NQ ES CAY
MAIL..._ (t, DAYS WRITTE TM TO T E
ATI ID PANE PN OER
LEFT,
11-0160-JA AUTNONIZE0 R[PR1 SF-NrA' VIF
Donald R. Los
T
,i
FIDELITY ANT) DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND
FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY
Boma Oaetcils: BALTIMORE, MD. 21203
POWER OF ATFOIiNF.1'
KNo%v Aid. Will BY 'f'FiliSli PRI?SiiN"I'S: That the FIDELITY ANt1 DEVOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND. and the
FIDETArY AND DI POSIT C031VANY, corporations of the State of Maryland, by C. M. PECOTs JR. ,
Vice-President, and C, W, RJBBINS , Assistant Secretary, in pursuance of authority granted ~y
Article VIA Section 2 of the respective By•Law9 of said Companies, which are set forth on the reverse side
hereof and are hereby certified to be in full force a I A effect on the date hereof, do hereby nominate, co:-sti-
tuteandappoint R. F. Bonewitz, Harold Bautsch and Barbara J. Watson, all of Houston,
Texas, EACH
t e true and lawful agent and Attorney-in-Fact of each, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for, and on its
behalf as surety, and as its act and decd: any and all bonds and undertakings EXCEPT bonds
on behalf of Independent Executors, Community Slirvivors and Community Guardians
1
nd the execution of such bonds or undertakings In pursuance of these (resents, shall be as binding upon said
Companies, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if they had been duly executed and acknowl.
edged by the regularly elected officers of the respective Companies at their offices in Baltimore, Md., in their
own proper persons. This powbr of attorney revokes that issued on behalf of R. F.
Bonewitz, otal, by they Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland, dated, March 170
1978.
IN 1VITNr,ss WHEREOF, the said Vice-Presidents and Assistant Secretaries have hereunto subscribed
their names and affixed the Corporate Seals of the said FIDELITY AND DuVOS[T COMPANY OF MARYLAND and
the hIDHLITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY this .....1,1t4- .................(lay of.................. ...ADru.... I...........
AA). to.79...
A'rrasr: FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY F MARYLAND
L r~ h ~j n ~
of tsis'ant Secretary Virc Pr; tideM
FIDELI'T'Y AN)b OF IT COIVIPANY
r
% C. c~~.,..- <-b........... Icy
ridan1 5rrrelary 3'iraPretlden!
STATE or iMAHVI.A#U I .
CITY OF II.1t, 119!1III jr 1.
l On this 11 th day it April AD, 19 79g , before the subscriber, a Notaryy Public of the State of
Maryland, In ;old im the Gilt of H,dtfnior, duly commissioned and qualified camp the Above-named Vice-I'resldente and Assistant
Seceetarimof tic Irll l iTTY AND DEPOSI'T' COMPANY OF MANYLA0and the VI DELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY,
to me personally kunwo to be the Individuals and officers described herein mid who executed the ppreceding instrument, and they each
acknowledged the execution of the same nud being by me duly sworn, severally and each for bimsell depoxlh and sailh, that they
Are the said officers of the Companlea aforesaid, and that the seals altixed to the pneceding Instrutuent are the Cur ate Seals of
said Coinpanles, and that the said Cog orate Seals and their signatures as such officers were duly alfised and subscrl ell to the said
I~ Instrument by the authority and direction or the said Corporations,
I N TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal at the City of Baltimore the day and
I year first above written,
rare • , a.,...
lary uY"
s
f My comtufadon expires....d'si,ly...1.r,.,1.9.1w2.,....... I.......... l
CER11FICATE
I, tit undersigned Assistaot;SccretaryoftheF1Dlil,l'FYAN17DEP051'CC011141N1'OFMAI(YLANDnndtheFlnE
t
AND DIiPO51'I' C011PANV do hereby cutify that the original Power of Attorney Af which the foregoin11 s n hill, true and correct
copy, le In full force anti n:'ect ou the dalcol this certificnfe: and I do further certifyy' that the Via.l'rc An A who executed the said
of Attorue were Vlcc-Presfdcnta a idlyy audlarizcd by the Hoards of Dlrtthns us ap aigqt an~yy uonre rl And
Power
vided In Artlele VI Section Z of the rapeclivr. flyd.nws uE the PIDEL!'I'Y AND DEPOSIT ~OAIPANY Of.' MARYLAND D an
the FIDELITV AVU S7IsPOSIT C0611'ANY,
V Thin tt'erdficale ma>• 6e signed by facsimile under and h authurit)' al resolutlone of the leaned of Directors of the FIDELI'I Y
AND DFa'051'P COMPANY OF M11A1(YLANp nt a nlcetin~ duly called anti held on the Ihth day of !Illy, t969 and of the Board
of Dlreclano! the FIDELITY AND UEh051'1' COM1IPANl at o roceting duly called and held an the Intl dny of Novemlkr, 1978.
RESOI,ViCD; "'l'ist the facsimile or nlcchmiically reproduced sigu;nure of nay Assistant tot, of the Company, whvth-r ;
made heretafore or hereafter. whenever appearing upon It certified copy of any sae er of atturno)S" ass, ells by the Comnany, shall he ,
valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manuallf uffived."
IN TESTIMONY WHERPOF, I have hereunto subscriber) my name and atf xrd fir cortarutc 16114 Of the said Cmnpanfes.
this ....,..._...._....,W...._. ,,.,......day of...... 19,
$00 go ,4rrlm)
I•Iewlrxt ctf,sM,t:.el ,lase 8700495
v
F(M )'(Wlo( I'R.O'l 11"(1 ION LUt)IC FOIZ Tl If" F&1)
i
GENERAL CONDITIONS
TABLE OF .CONTEt!TS
1 `
I
Article I - DEFINITIONS GC-1
Article 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS GC-3
GC -4
2.1 - Execution of Agreement GC-4 +
2.2 - Delivery of Bonds GC-4 i
2.3 - Copies of Documents GC-4
2.4 - Contractor's Pre-start Representations
2.5 - Coaxm,ncement of Contract Mime; Notice to Proceed GC-4
2.6 - Sta ting the Project GC-5
2.7 - Before Starting Construction
Article 3 - CORRELATION, INTERPRETATION AND INTENT OF GC-5
CONTRACT Article 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS: PHYSICAL CONDITIONS: GC-6
REFERENCE POINTS GC-6
4.1 - Availability of Lands GC-6
4.2 - Physical Conditions - Surveys and Reports GC-6
4.3 - Unforseen Physical Conditions GC-6
4.4 - Reference Points GC-7
I Article 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE GC-7
5.1 - 5.2 - Performance, Payment and Other Bonds GC-7
5.3 - Contractor's Insurance Requirements GC-8
5.4 - Additional Bonds and Insurance GC-8
Article 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES GC-8
6.1 - 6.2 - Supervision and Superintendence 9
! 6.3 - 6.6 - Labor, Materials and Equipment G GCC--9
6.7 - Substitute Materials or Equipment GC-10
I, 6.8 - 6.11 - Concerning Sub-contractors GC-10
6.12 - 6.13 - Patent Fees and Royalties GC-11
6.14 - Laws and Regulations GC-11
6.15 - Taxes GC-11
6.16 - 6.17 - Use of 4'remises GC-11
6,18 - Record Drawings GC-12
6.19 - Safety and Protection
j 6. - Emergencies GC-12
GC-13
6-21 - 6.26 - Shop Drawings and Samples GC-14
6.27 - Cleaning GC-14
J 6.28 _ 6,29 - Indemnification GC-15
Article 7 - WORK BY OTHERS
Article 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES GCGC--15
15
Article 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS•DURING CONSTRUCTILIN GC-16
9.1 - Owner's Representative GC-16
9.2 - Visits to Site GC-16
9.3 - Clarifications and Interpretations GC-17
9.4 - Rejecting Defective Work
9.5 - 9.7 - Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments GC-17
TC-1
i
. ,
>s
9.8 - Resident Project Representatives
9.9 - 9.10 - Decisions on Disagreements GC-17 /
9.11 - 9.13 - Limitations on Engineer's Responsibilities GC-18
Article 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK
Article 11 - CHANGE Or CONTRACT PRICE GC-19 ;
Article 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME GC-20
Article 13 - WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE: TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; GC-20
CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE. OF DEFECTIVE
WORK
13.1 - Warranty and Guarantee GC-21
13.2 - 13.4 - Tests and Inspections GC-21
13.5 - Access to Work GC-21
13.6 - 13.7 - Uncovering Work GC-22
13.8 - Owner May Stop Work GC-22
13.9 - Correction or Removal of Defective Work GC-23
13.10 - One Year Correction Period GC-23
13.11 - Acceptance of Defective Work GC-23
13.12 - Neglected Work by Contractor GC-24
Article 14 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION GC-24
14.1 - Schedules GC-24
14.2 - Application for Progress Payments GC-24
14.3 - Contractor's Warranty of Title GC-24
3 14.4 - 14.6 - Approval of Payments GC-25
14.7 - 14.8 - Substantial Completion GC-25
14.9 - Partial Utilization GC-26
14.10 - Final Inspection GC-27 J
14.11 - Final Application for Payment GC-28
14.12 - 14.13 - Approval of Final Payment GC-28
14.14 • Contractor's Continuing Obligation GC-28
14.15 - Waiver of Claims GC-29
j Article 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION GC-29
15.1 - Owner May Suspend Work GC-30
15.2 - 15.4 - Owner May Terminate GC-30
15.5 - Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate GC-30
Article 16 - ARBITRATION GC-31
Article 17 - MISCELLANEOUS GC-31
11.1 - Giving Notice GC-32
11.2 - Computation of Time GC-32
17.3 - 17.5 - General GC-32
GC-32
TC-2
t
i
Si
r'
i
l
j.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS
Wherever used in these General Conditions or in the other Contract
Documents, the following terms have the meanings indicated which are
f applicable to both the singular and plural thereon': ~
Addendum (Addenda) - A supplement to the Contract Documents issued in j
writing prior to the receipt of bids.
I
Agreement - The written Agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering
the Work to be performed.
Application for Payment - The form furnished by ENGINEER which is to
be used by CONTRACTOR in requesting progress payments and which is to
include the schedule of values required by paragraph 14.1 and an af-
fidavit of CONTRACTOR that progress payments theretofore received on
account of the Work have been applied by CONTRACTOR to discharge in
full all of CONTRACTOR's obligations reflected in prior Applications
M for Payment and that all materials and work included in the application
for payment conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents,
Bid - The offer or proposal of the Bidder submitted on the prescribed
form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed.
Bidder • Any person, firm or corporation submitting a Bid for the Work.
Bonds - Bid, performance, payment, maintenance bonds and other instru-
ments of security, furnished by CONTRACTOR and his surety in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
i
Calendar Day - A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from mid-
night to the next midnight and is any day of the week, no days being
excepted.
J Contract Amendment - A written agreement signed by both parties altering
the terms of the General Conditions and/or the Supplementary Conditions.
Change Order - A written order to CONTRACTOR signed by OWNER authorizing
an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment i:i the
Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued after execution of the
Agreement..
Contract Documents - The Agreement, Addenda, Invitation for Bids, In-
structions to Binders, CONTRACTOR's Did, the Bonds, the Notice of Award,
these General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the Specifi-
cations, Drawings and Modifications.
F&N-78 GC-1
p ~
L
Contract Price - The total moneys payable to CONTRACTOR under the Contract t
Documents,
Contract Time - The number of days stated in the Agipement for the cool-
pletion of the Work, computed as provided it) paragraph 17,2
CONTRACTOR - The person, firm or corporation with whom OWNER has executed
the Agreement.
Drawings - The drawings which show the character "lid scope of the Work
to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by ENGINEER
and accepted by Owner and are referred to in the Contract Documents
except shop drawings as required by the Contract Documents.
ENGINEER - The person, firm or corporation named as such in the Agreement,
Field Order - A written r;rder issued by ENGINEER which clarifies or
interprets the Contract Documents in accordance with paragraph 9.3 or
orders minor changes in the Work in accordance with
paragraph
Modification - (a) Contract Amendment; (b) Change Order; (c) Field Order,
Notice of Award - A written notice by OWNER to the apparent successful hat bedfulfillednbythim withinotheitime specified, OWNERowili a ecute an
deliver the Agreement to him, d
r
Notice to Proceed - A written notice given by OWNER to CONTRACTOR (with
a copy to ENGINEER) fixing the date on which the Contract Time will
commence to run and on which CONTRACTOR shall start to perform his obli-
gations under the Contract Documents,
OWNER - A public body or authority, corporation, association
ship, or individual for whom the Work is to be performed, partner-
Project - The entire construction to t.e performed as provided in the
Contract Documents,
Resident Project Representative - The authorized representative of ENGI-
NEER who is assigned to the Project site or any part thereof, 11
Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, brochures, schedules
and other data which are prepared by CONTRACTOR, a Subcontractor, manu-
facturer, supplier or distributor and which Illustrate the equipment,
material or some portion of the Work,
I
F&N-78
GC-t.
i
rl
Specifications - Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting
systems written technical ro edures and workmanship,asgapplmied,to therWork uction
, standards, p
con-
Subcontractor - An indik!i
othercSubcuntractlorvfor the performance
tract with CONTRACTOR or with , any
of a par#, of the Work at the site.
Substantial Completion - Certification by ENGINEER that the construction
of the Project or a specified part thereof is sufficiently completed,
in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Project or
sperified part can be utilized for the purposes for which it was in-
is9dueriifathere
tended pursuant to the ovisions of idate when final 1
be no such certification,
cordance with Paragraph 14.12.
Supplementary Conditions - A portion of the Contract Documents which
modifies the General Conditions by making additions, clans
and/or deletions. In cases of conflict between the Supplementary
Conditions and the General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions
shall have precedence over the General Conditions.
Pro JectrassigneditotorSundertaken
the successful obliations theduties
to Work
by CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents, including all labor, materials,
equipment and uther incidentals, and the furnishing thereof.
Working y A day not including Saturdays, Sundays or any of the
followingaholidays: New Year, Washington's Birthday, Memorial Day,
Independence Day, Labor Day, Columbus Day, Veterans Day, Thanksgiving
Day and Christmas Day, in which weather or other conditions, not under
the control of the CONTRACTOR, will permit construction of the principal
units of the work for a period of not less than seven (7) hours between
7:00 A.M. and 6:00 P.M.
ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS
_J Execution of Agreement:
2.1 The Agreement, Bonds and such other portions of the Contract
Documents as may be required will be executed and delivered by CON-
TRACTOR to OWNER within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the Notice
of Award. The Owner shall
the counterparts. number ENGINEER
The OWNER will execute
F&N-78 GC-3
n
r
1
1
i
shall each receive an executed counterpart of the Contract Documents /
and additional conformed copies as required.
Delivery of Bonds:
2,2. When fie delivers the executed Agreement to OWNER, CONTRACTOR
shall also deliver to OWNER such Bonds as he may be required to furnish J
in accordance with paragraph 5.1 and 5,4.
Copies of Documents:
2.3. OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to ten (10) copies (unless
otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions) of the Contract
Documents as are reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work.
Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of re-
production.
Contractor's Pre-Start Representations:
2.4. CONTRACTOR represents that he has familiarized himself with,
and assumes full responsibility for having familiarized himself with,
the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, locality, and
with all local conditions and federal, state and local laws, ordinances,
rules and regulations that may in any manner affect performance of the
Work, and represents that he has correlated his study and observations
with the requirements of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR also represents
that he has studied all surveys and investigation reports of subsurface
and latent physical conditions referred to in the Contract Documents
and will make such additional surveys and investigations as he deems
necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price in accordance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents and that he has correlated
the results of all such data with the requirements of the Contract Documents,
Commencement of Contract Time; Notice to Proceed:
i 2.5. The Contract Time will conmience on, and include, the (My following
the date established in the Notice to Proceed issued by Owner to Contractor.
Starting the project:
2.6. CONTRACTOR shall start to perform his obligations under the
Contract Documents on the date when the Contract Time commences to run.
No Work shall be done at the site prior to the date on which the Contract
Time commences to run.
F&N-78 GC-4
f
I
Before Starting Construction, J
2.7. Before undertaking the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully
study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent
figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. He shall
at once report in writing to ENGINEER any conflict, error or discrepancy
which he may discover.
2.8. Within ten (10) days after delivery of the executed Agree-
ment by OWNER to CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for
approval, an estimated progress schedul indicating the starting and
completion dates of the various stages of the Work, and a preliminary
schedule of Shop Drawing submissions.
2.9. When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agreements the CONTRACTOR
I shall furnish OWNER and ENGINEER certificates of insurance as required
by Article 5. After delivery of the executed Agreement by OWNER to
CONTRACTOR, but before starting the Work at the site, a conference
will be held to review the above schedules, to establish procedures
for handling Shop Drawings and other submissions and for processing
Applications for P~iyment, and to establish a working understanding
between the parties as to the Project. Present at the conference will
be OWNER or his representative, 4,11NEER, Resident Project Representatives,
I j CONTRACTOR and his Superintendent.
ARTICLE 3 - CORRELATION, IN'rERPRFTATION AND INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ,
3.1. It is the intent of the Specificat;ons and Drawings to de-
scribe a complete Project to be constructed in accordance with the
Contract Documents. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agree-
ment between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. They may be altered only by a 1
Modification.
3.2. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called
for by one is as binding as if called for by all, If CONTRACTOR finds
a conflict, error or discrepancy in the Contract Documents, he shall
I call it to ENGINEER's attention in writing at once and before pro-
J ceeding with the Work affected thereby. Any Wurk that may reasonably
be inferred from the Specifications or Drawings as being required to
produce the intended result shall be supplied whether or not it is
specifically called for. Work, materials or equipment described in
words which so appliad have a welt-known technical or trade meaning
shall be dc,.,,ad to refer to such recognized standards.
I
I
I
I
I
t
F&N-71l GC_5
i ~
i
ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS: PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS
Availability of Lands;
4.1. OWNER shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract documents
and not later than the date when needed by CONTRACTOR, or such later
date as set forth in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the
Work is to be done, rights-of-way for access thereto, and such other
lands which are designated fur the use of CONTRACTOR. Easements for
permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will
be obtained and paid for by OWNER, unless otherwise specified in the
Contract Documents. If CONTRACTOR believes that any delay in OWNER's
1.urnishing these lands or easements entitles him to an extension of
the Contract Time, he may make a claim therefor as provided in Article
12. CONTRACTOR shall prnvide for all additional lands and access thereto
that may be required fol temporary construction facilities or storage
of materials and equipment.
Physical Conditions - Surveys and Reports;
4.2. Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identi-
fication of those surveys and investigation reports of subsurface and
latent physical conditions at the Project site or otherwise affectinn
performance of the Work which have been relied upon by ENGINEER in preparation
of the Drawings and Specifications. The data is for general information
and the OWNER, and ENGINEER do not guarantee the accuracy.
Unforseen Physical Conditions:
4.3. CONTRACTOR shall, within three (3) days after discovery, notify
OWNER and ENGINEER in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions
at the site differing materially from those indicated in the Contract
f Documents. ENGINEER will investigate those conditions and advise OWNER
In writing if further surveys or subsurface tests are necessary. Thereafter,
j Owner shall obtain the necessary additional surveys and tests and furnish
l copies to ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR. If ENGINEER finds that the results
of such surveys or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent
physical conditions which differ materially from those intended in the
Contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated
or discovered by CONTRACTOR through his efforts as represented pursuant
to Article 2.4 of these General Conditions, a Change Order may be issued
incorporating the necessary revisions.
Reference Points:
r 4.4. OWNER shali provide engineering surveys for construction to
establish reference points which in his judgment are necessary to enable
i
r F&N-78 GC_F,
.
r t .a . Y•} ~1
i
s !r r r • f
L
r r
rl
r r r .
.
Worth
r - •
. • Tyr ~
h1a ta'e', ~
Area 'PJdr{;
~ fOr ~'On{ ~
Q in r ~ 7
n rQ.
1 r
t.
x EJffSI. Fence
o......_.~ Re%cafed Fence
• r a
x o.- -----o .111ew f''enae
. t
~I
Exist. Electric
7"ransl'ormers ~ f
Ir
~ ~ I l x Gafe.
. i
K
, [
T-
~r ~ ~ - l9~'8 z I 1
r
00. '1 f I r t ~I I ~I
! ~ Ch~m~cal ~ I
X Sforar~e f ,
ck-
-ON
,4 11 1'hisshtrl 4j~
ti
INC r
~ P. A V`~ ~ Chem. ~B/cfq'~^ Elevator ~
i
1 I I r L~ r rrinmrd r -1 1 r
f
I~I~ I Ifll ~ III I 'I 1 Z~ _ _ J
1.1
! 1
f A mp 5~of ion / .1I
G'
I
i
1
C,lianhd/a, Clar~,os, ~ L {.,..Z....... l_ ._..a _ J
Unieusbion As Spec.
J i
Champ 5hvll ec 1 I
In/bCBd Evercl 9'"ra a ~ ~ipV~; ,k/gr`~'r 5upoly r
1
540 _ w~ M.. -
,r
-:I
f
i
I
• • ~ - ~Xtsf ~ ~gnt`o~r Lrn~s
'i
s
J
ti•I~,~
1 4 i4tiilc W RAW .WATER PUMP STATION $H .
AMLZ, ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
COAWN OAT 9 -
ti~ t~~cio BALI _ a~ LAYOUT 4,.o.t9't 'I Y
I r
1
f
J
1
r
I
• ~ ~
1
Ik
1
73,
t i 7
i 1i1, 5
Y _
Norfh
i J
Tom, _ _ N~
1 \ li 1
1 J
j I
- - =
1
f J
F
X ~
J
, i
J•s . P'~r=
re
-s
I
I
K ~I
1 ~
i
j
n
~i ~v
i
J .i
~ I I ~ I I J~ ~ i
f
~ I ~ ~ I ~ ~I I I I I ~~I s i
J
This Jhf, I X't3
i
l
i1 -t
Handling t t
C/r~rf . I I 1 1 L~ JJ L 1
~ I I rrm m rfl
5torQge 8u1*1d1l19 As Shown
I ~ ~ ~ ~ i iiiiii.iiii~ ► - ~ l l~ '!i II 1----------- III 1 I I 1 I~
r y , ,
~I
~ ~ pumo Sfa~ion /
(inr'Cvsh~~o,~ RS Spec,
Clorno8 Shal! ,5e ~
Ploced Ever 3'-~'r /2'~~?V,C, ooVolor $U,OrO%
e; 0
r
538
Ch'EMICQL ~ t,
4 4"M
. ~f
■
' DESIGNED Jos No 1'N • 13J. ZvHG Add Z./ml 1, of- ^aal id ■ RAW WATER PUMP STATION
SHEET
Q L2,410 DRAWN DATE 00E /1195
LAYOUT 4 Of 9
TRACED sCAlf AS MOWN
~ o+rt otnt~or ~ CHECKED 1
f of 's
{
.f
j r
'ii[
i
CONTRACTOR to proceed with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible
for surveying and laying out the Work (unless otherwise provided in
the Supplementary Conditions), and shall protect and preserve the
established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations
without thF yrior written approval of OWNER. He shall report to ENGINEER
whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation
because of necessary changes in grades or locations. CONTRACTOR shall
replac and accurately relocate all reference points so lost, destroyed
or moved.
ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE
Performance, Payment and Other Bonds:
5.1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish performance and payment Bonds as
security for the faithful performance and payment of all his obligations
under the Contract Documents. These Bonds shall be in amounts at least
equal to the Contract Price, and (except as otherwise provided in the
Supplementary Conditions) in such form as set forth in the Contract
Documents and with such corporate sureties as are licensed to conduct
business in the state where the Project is located and are named in
the current list of "Surety Companies Acceptable on Federal Bonds" as
published in the Federal Register by the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts,
U. S. Treasury Department. The performance bond and payment bond shall
be extended to include the Correction Period set forth in Article 13.10.
5.2. If the surety on any Bond furnished by CONTRACTOR is declared
a bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated
in any state where any part of the Project is located is revolted, CONTRACTOR
shall within five (5) days thereafter substitute another Bond and surety,
both of which shall be acceptable to OWNER.
Contractor's Insurance Requirements:
5.3. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will
protect him from claims under workmen's compensation laws, disability
l benefit laws or other similar employee benefit laws; from claims for
damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease,
or death of his employees, and claims insured by usual personal injury
liability coverage; from claims for damages because of bodily injury,
sickness or disease, or death of any person other than his employees
including cla•hns insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;
and from claims for injury to or destruction of tangible property, in-
cluding loss of use resulting therefrom - any or all of which may arise
out of or result from CONTRACTOR's operations under the Contract Documents,
whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor or anyone
F&N-78 GC-7
j
,I
Ir
directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any
of them may be legally liable, This insurance shall include the specific
coverage and be written for not less than any limits of liability and
maximum deductibles specified in the Supplementary Conditions or required
by law, whichever is greater, shall include contractual liability insurance
and shall include OWNER and ENGINEER ;,5 additional insured parties.
The Contractor shall maintain such additional insurance as he may deem
appropriate. With the execution of the Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall
file with OWNER and ENGINEER certificates of such insurance, acceptable
to OWNER; these certificates shall contain a provision that the cover-
age afforded under the policies will not be cancelled or materially
changed until at least fifteen (15) days' prior written notice has been
given to OWNER and ENGINEER.
Additional Bonds and Insurance:
r
5.4. Prior to delivery of the executed Agreement by OWNER to CON-
TRACTOR, OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to furnish such other Bonds and
such additional insurance, in such form and with such sureties or insurers
as OWNER may require, If such other Bonds or such other insurance are
specified by written instructions given prior to opening of Bids, the
premiums shall be paid by CONTRACTOR; if subsequent thereto, they shall
r be paid by OWNER (except as otherwise provided in paragraph 6.7).
ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
Supervision and Superintendence:
I
6.1. CONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the Work efficiently
with his best skill and attention, He shall be solely responsible for
the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction
and safety at the site. CONTRACTOR shall he solely responsible to see
that the finished Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents,
CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER and OWNER intend that CONTRACTOR shall be an independent
contractor and not the agent or employee of either OWNER or ENGINEER.
\,_J 6.2. CONTRACTOR shall keep at the project site at all times during
its re of the work a competent resident superintendent, who shall
not be replaced without written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER except
under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be CONTRACTOR's
representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf
of CONTRACTOR. All communications given to the superintendent shall
be as binding as if given to CONTRACTOR.
F&N-78 GC-8
I.
Labor, Materials and Equipment;
6.3. CONTRACTOR shall provide competent, suitably qualified person-
nel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required
by the Contract Documents. Ile shall at all times maintain good disci-
pline and order at the site.
6.4. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all materials, equipment, labor,
transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, ap-
pliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water and sanitary
facilities and all other facilities anri incidentals necessary for the
execution, testing, initial operation and completion of the Work.
6.5. All materials and equipment which is to be incorporated
into the Project shall be new, except as otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents. If required by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall furnish
satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equip-
ment.
6.6. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed,
connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with
the instructions of thn applicable manufacturer, fabricator or pro-
cessors, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The
CONTRACTOR shall furnish the OWNER with four (4) sets of all operating
instructions, maintenance manuals and parts list for all mechanical
and electrical equipment furnished for the project.
Substitute Materials or Equipment;
6.7. If the Specifications, law, ordinance or applicable rules
or regulations permit CONTRACTOR to furnish or use a substitute that
is equal to any material or equipment specified, and if CONTRACTOR
wishes to furnish or use a proposed substitute, He shall, prior to
the conference called for by paragraph 2.9, make written application
to ENGINEER for approval of such a substitute certifying in writing
that the proposed substitute will perform adequately the functions
tailed for by the general design, be similar and of equal substance
- to that specified and be suited to the same use and capable of per-
forming the same function as that specified; and identifying all vari-
ations of the proposed substiute from that specified and indicating
available maintenance service. No substitute shall be ordered or in-
stalled without the written approval of ENGINEER who will be the judge
of equality and many require CONTRACTOR to furnish such other data
about the proposed substitute as he considers pertinent. No substitute
shall be ordered or installed without such performance guarantee and
bonds as OWNER may require which shall be furnished at CONTRACTOR's
expense.
F&N-78 GC-9
1
Concerning Subcontractors:
6,8, CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcontractor or other person
or organization (includin those who are to furnish the principal items
of materials or equipmentq}, whether initially or as a substitute, against
whom 01-INER ;nay have reasonable objection. Acceptance of any Subcontractor,
other person or organization by OWNER shall not constitute a waiver of
any right of OWNER to reject defective Work or Work not in conformance
with the Contract Documents. If OWNER after due investigation has reasonable
objection to any Subcontractor, other person or organization proposed
by CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall submit an acceptable substitute, CONTRACTOR
shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, other person or organization
h against whom he has reasonable objection, CONTRACTOR shall not without
l the consent of OWNER make any substitution for any Subcontractor, other
Ir person or organization who has been accepted by OWNER,
6.9, CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for all acts and omis-
sions of his Subcontractors and of persons and organizations directly
or indirectly employed by them and of persons and organizations for whose
acts any of them may be liable to the same extent that he is responsible
for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him. Nothing
in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship be-
tween OWNER or ENGINEER and any Subcontractor or other person or organization
having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR, nor shall it create any obligation
on the part of OWNER or ENGINEER to pay or to see to the payment of any
moneys due any Subcontractor or other person or organization, except
li as may otherwise be required by law, OWNER or ENGINEER may furnish to
any Subcontractor or other person or organization, to the extent practicable,
evidence of amounts paid to CONTRACTOR on account of specific Work done
in accordance with the schedule )f values.
6.10. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the
identifications of any Drawings shall not control CONTRACTOR in dividing
the Work among Subcontractors or delineating the Work to be performed
by any specific trade,
- ~1
6.11. CONTRACTOR agrees co bind specifically every Subcontractor
to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for
the benefit of OWNER.
Patent Fees and Royalties:
6.12. CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume
all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work and the
completed Project of any invention, design, process, product or device
which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others.
F&N-7B GC-10
t
CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER and ENGINEER and anyone
directly or indirectly employed by either of them from and against all
claims, damages, losses and expenses (including attorneys' fees) arising
out of any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the
use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation
in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device and
shall defend all such claims in connection with any alluded infringement
of such rights.
6.13. CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all construction permits
and licenses and shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees
necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the
time of his Bid. OWNER shall assist CONTRACTOR, when necessary, in obtaining
such permits and licenses. CONTRACTOR shall pay all public utility charges.
Laws and Regulations:
6.14. CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply with all laws,
ordinances, rules and regulations applicable to the Work. If CONTRACTOR
observes that the Specifications or Drawings are at variance therewith,
I he shall give ENGINEER prompt written notice thereof, and any necessary
changes shall be adjusted by an appropriate Modification. If CONTRACTOR
performs any Work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations,
and without such notice to ENGINEER, he shall bear all costs arising
therefrom.
Taxes:
6.15. CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar
taxes reg0 red to be paid by him in accordance with the law of the place
where the Work is to be performed.
Use of Premises:
E 6.16. CONTRACTOR shall confine his equipment, the storagu of materials
and °quipment and the operations of his workmen to areas permitted by
law, ordinances, permits, or the requirements of the Contract Document,
and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with materials or equipment.
6.17. CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any part of any structure
to be loaded with weights that will endanger the structure, nor shall
he subject any part of the Work to stresses or pressures that will endanger
it.
Record Drawings:
it 6.18. CONTRACTOR shall keep one record copy of all Specifications,
Drawings, Addenda, Modifications, and Shop Drawings at the site in good
E&N-78 GC-11
I
I~
r
I
order and annotated to show all changes made during the construction ~
process. These shall be available to ENGINEER and shall be delivered
to him for OWNER upon completion of the Project.
Safety and Protection;
6.19. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining
and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with
the Work. He shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of,
and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury
or loss to;
6.19.1. all employees on the Project site and other persons
who may be affected thereby,
I
' 6.19.2. all the Work and all materials or equipment to be
incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, and
6,19.3, other property at the site or adjacent thereto,
including, but not limited to, trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pave-
ments, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal,
relocation or replacement in the course of construction.
CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations and orders of any public body having jurisdiction for the
safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury
or loss. He shall erect and maintain, as required by the conditions
and progress of the Work, all necessary safeguards for its safety and
protection. He shall notify owners of adjacent utilities when prosecution
of the Work may affect them. All damage, injury or loss to any property
referred to in paragraph 6.19.2 or 6.19.3 caused, directly or indirectly,
in whole or in part, by CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or anyone directly
or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any
of them may be liable, shall he remedied by CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR's
li duties and responsibilities for the safety and protection of the Work
shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and ENGINEER
has issued a notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR in accordance with paragraph
_--J 14.12 that Work is acceptable.
Emergencies;
6.20. In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property,
the CONTRACTOR shall act, at his discretion, to prevent threatened
damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or extension of
time claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work shall be
determined as provided in Article 11 and 12 for Changes in the Work.
FP,N-78 GC-12
i
I
e
i
Shop Drawings and Samples: /
6.21. After checking and verifying all field measurements, CONTRACTOR f
shall submit to ENGINEER for approval, in accordance with the accepted
schedule of Shop Drawing submissions (see paragraph 2.8) five copies
(or at ENGINEER's option, one reproducible copy) of all Shop Drawings,
which shall have been checked by and stamped with the approval of CONTRACTOR
and identified as ENGINEER may require. The data shown on the Shop Drawings
will be complete with respect to dimensions, design criteria, materials
of construction and the like to enable ENGINEER to review the information
as required.
6.22. CONTRACTOR shall also submit to ENGINEER for approval with
such promptness as to cause no delay in Work, all samples required by
the Contract Documents, All samples will have been checked by and stamped
with the approval of CONTRACTOR, identified clearly as to material, manu-
facturer, any pertinent catalog numbers and the use for which intended.
6.23. At the time of each submission, CONTRACTOR shall in writing
call ENGINEER's attention to any deviations that the Shop Drawings or
sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
6 24, ENGINEER will review and approve with reasonable promptness
Shop Drawings and samples, but his review and approval shall be only
for conformance with the design concept of the Project and for compliance
with the information given in the Contract Documents. The approval of
a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in
which the item functions. CONTRACTOR shall make any corrections required
by ENGINEER and shall return the required number of corrected copies
of Shop Drawings and resubmit new samples until approved. CONTRACTOR
shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the
corrections called for by ENGINEER on previous submissions. CONTRACTOR's
stamp of approval on any Shop Drawing or sample shall constitute a repre-
1J sentation to OWNER and ENGINEER that CONTRACTOR has either determined
and verified all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria,
materials, catalog numbers, and similar data or he assumes full responsibility
for doing so, and that he has reviewed or coordinated each Shop Drawing
j or sample with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents.
I1 i
6.25. Where a Shop Drawing or sample suboission is required by
J the Specifications, no related Work shall be commenced until the submission
has been approved by ENGINEER. A copy of each approved Shop Drawing {
I and each approved sample shall be kept in good order by CONTRACTOR at
the site and shall he available to ENGINEER.
I
F&N-78 GC-13
I
i
6.26. ENGINEER's approval of Shop Drawings or samples shall not
relieve CONTRACTOR fran his responsibility for any deviations from
the requirements of the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR has in ;
writing called ENGINEER's attention to such deviation at the time of
submission and ENGINEER has given written approval to the specific
deviation, nor shall any approval by ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR from
responsibility for errors or ommissions in the Shop Drawings.
Cleaning:
II 6.27. CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises free from accumulations
of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work,
and at the completion of the Work he shall remove all waste materials,
rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools,
onst uc and machinery, and surplus materials, and shall
r tion equipment
c
leave the site clean and ready for occupancy by OWNER. CONTRACTOR
shall restore to their original condition those portions of the site
not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
Indemnification:
6.28. CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER and
ENGINEER and their agents and employees from and against all claims, and expenses Including, but not limited to, attorneys,
damages, losses an from any act, omission or defect connected
fees arising out of or resulting
with the performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage,
loss or expense (a) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease
or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other
than the Work itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom
j and (b) is caused in whole or in part by any condition of premises
or materials, act or omission of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, anyone
directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not is caused
in part negligently or otherwise, by a party indemnified hereunder.
6.29. In any and all claims against OWNER or ENGINEER or any
of their agents or employees by any employee of CONTRACTOR, any Sub-
contractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or
anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification
obligation under paragraph 6.28 shall not be limited in any way by
any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits
payable by or for CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor under workmen's com-
pensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
,
F&N-78 GC-14
i
i
ARTICLE 7 - WORK BY OTHERS /i
7.1. OWNER may perform additional work related to the Project
by himself, or he may let other direct contracts. CONTRACTOR shall
afford the other contractors who are parties to such direct contracts
(or OWNER, if he is performing the additional work himself), reasonable
opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equip-
ment and the execution of work, and shall properly connect and co-
ordinate his Work with theirs.
7.2. If any part of CONTRACTOR's Work depends for proper
execution or result upon the work of any such other contractor (or
OWNER), CONTRACTOR shall inspect and promptly report to ENGINEER in
writing any defects or deficiencies in such work that render it un-
suitable for such proper execution and result. His failure so to report
shall constitute an acceptance of the other work as fit and proper
for the relationship of his Work except as to defects and deficiencies
which may appear in the other work after the execution of his Work.
7,3. CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of
his Work that may be required to make its several parts come together
properly and fit it to receive or be received by such other work.
CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, exca-
vating or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter
their work with the written consent of ENGINEER and of the other con-
tractors whose work will be affected.
7.4. If the performance of additional work by other contractors
or OWNER is not noted in the Contract Documents prior to the execution
j of the Agreement, notice thereof shall be given to CONTRACTOR prior
to starting any such additional work.
i
I ARTICLE 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
8.1. OWNER shall issue all communications to CONTRACTOR through
ENGINEER.
8.2. In case of termination of the employment of ENGINEER, OWNER
-~i shall appoint an engineer against wham CONTRACTOR makes no unreason-
able objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be
that of the former ENGINEER, Any dispute in connection with such ap-
pointment shall he subject to arbitration.
8.3. OWNER shall furnish the data required of him under the
Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to CONTRACTOR
promptly after they are due as provided in paragraphs 14.4 and 14.12.
F&N-78 GC-15
' i
i
I
1
8.4. OWNER's duties in respect of providing lands and easements r
and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set
forth in paragraphs 4.1 and 4.4. Paragraph 4.2 refers to OWNER's identifying
and making available '..r CONTRACTOR copies of surveys and investigation
reports of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or other-
wise affecting performance of the Work which have been relied upon by
ENGINEER in preparing the Drawings and Specifications.
8.5. OWNER's responsibility in respect of certain inspections,
tests and approvals is set forth in paragraph 13.2.
8.6. In connection with OWNER's right to stop Work or suspend Work,
see paragraphs 13.8 and 15.1. Paragraph 15.2 deals with OWNER's right
to terminate services of CONTRACTOR under certain circumstances.
ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
Owner's Representative:
9.1. ENGINEER will be OWNER's representative during the construction
period unless the OWNER advises the CONTRACTOR of other arrangements.
The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of ENGINEER
as OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in Articles
1 through 17 of these General Conditions and shall not be extended without
written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER.
j Visits to Site:
9.2. The ENGINEER will make visits to the site to familiarize himself
generally with the progress and quality of the Work and to determine
in general if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract
Documents. On the basis of his on-site observations as an ENGINEER,
he will keep the OWNER informed of the progress of the Work, and will
endeavor to guard the OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Work
of the CONTRACTOR. The ENGINEER will not be required to make exhaustive
or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of
~f the Work.
Clarifications and Interpretations:
9.3. ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness such written
clarifications or interpretations of the Contract Documents (in the form
of otherwise) as he may determine necessary, which shall
Drawings
be consistent or with or reasonably inferable from the overall intent of
the Contract Documents. If CONTRACTOR believes that a written clarification
f
F&N-78 GC-16
I
T
and interpretation entitles him to an increase in the Contract Price,
he may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11.
Rejecting Defective Work:
9.4. ENGINEER will have authority to disapprove or reject Work
which is "defective" (which term is hereinafter used to describe Work
that is unsatisfactory, faulty or defective, or does not conform to the
requirements of the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements
of the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any in-
spection, test or approval referred to in paragraph 13.2 or has been
damaged prior to approval of final payment). He will also have authority
to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in para-
graph 13.7, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments:
9.5. In connection with ENGINEER's responsibility for Shop Drawings
snd samples, see paragraphs 6.21 through 6.26 inclusive.
9.6. In connection with ENGINEER's responsibility for Change Orders,
see Articles 10, 11 and 12.
9.7. In connection with ENGINEER's responsibilities in respect
of Applications for Payment, etc., see Article 14.
Resident Project Representatives:
9.8. If OWNER and ENGINEER agree, ENGINEER will furnish a Resident
Project Representative and assistants to assist ENGINEER in carrying
out his resporrsibilites at the site. The duties, responsibilities and
limitations of authority of any such Resident Project Representative
and assistants shall be as set forth in the Supplemental Conditions.
Decisions on Disagreements:
9.9. ENGINEER will be the interpreter of the requirements of the
Contract Documents and the judge of the performance thereunder. In his
capacity as interpreter and judge ENGINEER will exercise his best efforts
to insure faithful performance by both OWNER and CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER
will rot show partiality to either and will not be liable for the result
of any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith. Claims, disputes
and other matters relating to the execution and progress of the Work
or the interpretation of or performance under the Contract Documents
F&N-78 GC-17
i
shall be referred to ENGINEER for decision; which he will render in
writing within a reasonable time.
9.10. Either OWNER or CONTRACTOR may demand arbitration with
respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter that has been re-
ferred to ENGINEER, except any which have been waived by the making
or acceptance of final payment as provided in paragraph 14.15, such
arbitration to be in accordance with Article 16. However, no demand
for arbitration of any such claim, dispute or other matter shall be
made until the earlier of (a) the date on which ENGINEER has rendered
his decision or (b) the tenth (10th) day after the parties have presented
their evidence to ENGINEER if he has not rendered his written decision
before that date. No demand for arbitration shall be made later than
thirty (30) days after the date on which ENGINEER rendered his written
decision in respect of the claim, dispute or other matter as to which
arbitration is sought; and the failure to demand arbitration within
said thirty (30) days' period shall result in ENGINEER's decision being
final and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If ENGINEER renders a
decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision
may be entered as evidence but shall not supersede the arbitration
proceedings, except where the decision is acceptable to the parties
concerned.
Limitations on ENG:"IEER's Responsibilities:
9.11. Neithe- ENGINEER's authority to act under this Article 9
or elsewhere in 'ne Contract Documents nor any decision made by him
in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority shall
give rise to any duty or responsibility of ENGINEER to CONTRACTOR,
any Subcontractor, any materialman, fabricator, supplier or any of
their agents or employees or any other person performing any of the
Work.
9.12. ENGINEER will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's means,
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the
safety precautions and programs incident thereto, and he will not be
responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform the work in accordance
with the Contract Documents. The ENGINEER shall have no responsibility
with respect to safety and has no obligation to see that the CONTRACTOR's
safety obligations are fulfilled.
9.13. ENGINEER will not be responsible for tine acts or omissions
of CONTRACTOR, or any Subcontractor, or any of his or their agents
or employees, or any other persons at the site or otherwise performing
any of the Work.
F&N-78 GC-18
I
i
i
r
ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK
1011. Without invalidating the Agreement, OWNER may, at any time
or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the
Work; these will be authorized by Change Orders. Upon receipt of a
Change Order, CONTRACTOR shall prW eed with the Work involved, All
such Work shall be executed under the applicable conditions of the
Contract Documents. If any Change Order causes an increase or de-
crease in the Contract Price or an extension or shortening of the
Contract Time, an equitable adjustment will be made as provided in
Article 11 or Article 12 on the basis of a claim made by either party.
10.2. ENGINEER may authorize minor changes or alterations in
the Work not involving extra cost or contract time and not incon-
sistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents. These may
be accomplished by a Field Order. If CONTRACTOR believes that any
minor change or alteration authorized by ENGINEER entitles him to an
increase in the Contract Price or Contract Time, he shall not proceed
with the work and shall in writing advise the ENGINEER and request a
Change Order.
10.3. Additional Work performed by CONTRACTOR without author-
ization of a Change Order will not entitle him to claim an increase
in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, except
in the case of an emergency as provided in paragraph 6.20 and except
as provided in paragraph 73.7.
i
10.4. OWNER, after consideration and approval, may execute ap-
propriate Change Orders prepared by ENGINEER covering changes in the
Work to be performed as provided in paragraph 4.3, and Work performed
in an emergency as provided in paragraph 6.20 and any other claim of
CONTRACTOR for a change in the Contract Time or the Contract Price
which is approved by ENGINEER,
j ARTICLE 11 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE
11.7. The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation pay-
able to CONTRACTOR for performing the Work. All duties, responsi-
bilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by CONTRACTOR shall
be at his expense without change in the Contract Price,
11.2. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order.
Any claim for an increase in the Contract Price shall be based on written
notice delivered to OWNER and ENGINEER within ten (10) days of the
occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount
of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within thirty
(30) days of such occurrence unless ENGINEER allows an additional
FAN-78 GC-19
I~
l
period of time to ascertain accurate cost data. All claims for ad-
justments in the Contract Price shall be determined by ENGINEER if
OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree on the amount involved.
11.3. The value of ar; Work covered by a Change Order or of any
claim for an increase or c•Arease in the Contract Price shall be de-
termined in one of the fol; ways:
11.3.1. Where the Work involved is covered by unit prices
contained in the Contract Documents, by application of unit prices
to the quantities of the items involved, unless actual quantities
differ from bid quantities by twenty (20%) percent. Revised con-
sideration will be given to that portion in excess of the twenty
(20%) percent difference subject to mutual acceptance of a revised
unit price.
11.3.2 By mutual acceptance of a lump sum.
11.3.3 On the basis of the actual cost directly related
to the Work plus a Contractor's Fee for overhead and profit in
the amount of fifteen (15%) percent. The actual cost shall be
limited to: labor, including foremen; materials entering perma-
nently into the work; the ownership or rental cost of construction
plant and equipment during the time of use on the extra work;
power and consumable supplies for the operation of power equip-
ment; insurance; and social security and old age and unemploy-
ment contributions.
11.4. The amount of credit to be allowed by CONTRACTOR to OWNER
for any such change which results in a net decrease in cost, will be
the amount of the actual net decrease which decrease shall include
a CONTRACTOR's Fee for overhead and profit in the amount of fifteen
(15%) percent. When both additions and credits are involved in any
one change, the CONTRACTOR's fee of fifteen (15%) percent shall be
figured on the basis of the net increase, if any.
11.5. Whenever the cost of any Work is to be determined pursuant
h cost 11.3, CONTRACTOR will
together submit t suIn form pportingr data. by ENGINEER
an Itemized
ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF 'iHE CONTRACT TIME
12.1. The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order.
Any claim for an extension in the Contract 'ime shall be based on written
notice delivered to OWNER and ENGINEER within ten ('10) days of the
occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the extent
F&N-78 GC-20
of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within thirty
(30) days of such occurrence unless ENGINEER allows an additional period
of time to ascertain more accurate data. All claims for adjustment
in the Contract Time shall be determined by ENGINEER if OWNER and CON-
TRACTOR cannot otherwise agree. Any change in the Contract Time re-
sulting from any such claim shall be incorporated in a Change Order.
12.2. The Contract Time will be extended in an amount equal to
time lost due to delays beyond the control of CONTRACTOR if he makes
a claim therefor as provided in paragraph 12.1. Such delays shall
include, but not be restricted to, acts or neglect by any separate
contractor employed by OWNER, fires, floods, labor disputes, epidemics,
or acts of God other than weather conditions. No time extensions will
be allowed for weather conditions for Project using calendar days for
/ the C,)ntract Time.
12.3 The CONTRACTOR agrees that time is of the essence of this
contract, and that for each day of delay beyond the number of days
herein agreed upon for the completion of the work herein specified
and contracted for (after due allowance of such extension of time as
is provided for in Article 12) the OWNER may withhold perhnanently from
the CONTRACTOR's total compensation, the amount per day set forth in
Supplementary Conditions, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages
and for added expense for engineering services, etc.
ARTICLE 13 - WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE: TESTS AND INSPECTIONS: CORRECTION,
REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
Warranty and Guarantee:
13.1. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to OWNER and ENGINEER
that all materials and equipment will be new unless otherwise specified
and that all Work will be of good quality and free from faults or defects
and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and
of any inspections, tests or approvals referred to in paragraph 13.2.
All unsatisfactory Work, all faulty or defective Work, and all Work
J not conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents at the
time of acceptance thereof or of such inspections, tests or approvals,
shall be considered defective. Prompt notice of all defects shall
be given to CONTRACTOR. All defective Work, whether or not in place,
may be rejected, corrected or accepted as provided in this Article 13.
Tests and Inspections:
13,2. If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regu-
lations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require
BN-78 GC-21
I
V
F
I~
I V
any Work to specifically be inspected, tested, or approved by some
public body, CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility therefor, 1 /
pay all costs in connection therewith and furnish ENGINEER the required
certificates of inspection, testing or approval. All other inspections,
tests and approvals required by the Contract Documents shall be per-
formed by organizations selected by OWNER and the costs thereof shall
be borne by OWNER unless otherwise specified.
13.3. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely notice of readiness
of the Work for all inspections, tests or approvals. If any such Work
required so to be inspected, tested or approved is covered without
written approval of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, be
uncovered for ubservation, and such uncovering shall be at CONTRACTOR's
expense unless CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER timely notice of his intention
to cover such Work and ENGINEER has not acted with reasonable promptness
in response to such notice.
13.4. Neither observations by ENGINEER nor inspections, tests
' or approvals by persons other than CONTRACTOR shall relieve CONTRACTOR
from his obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract Documents,
Access to Work:
'13,5. ENGINEER and his representatives and other representatives
of OWNER will at reasonable times have access to the Work, CONTRACTOR
shall provide proper and safe facilities for such access and observation
of the Work and also for any inspection or testing thereof by others.
Uncovering Work;
13.6. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request
of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, be uncovered for
ENGINEER's observation and replaced at CONTRACTOR's expense.
13.7. If any Work has been covered which ENGINEER has not speci-
fically requested to observe prior to its being covered, or if ENGINEER
considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be inspected
or tested, CONTRACTOR, at ENGINEER's request, shall uncover, expose
or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing
as ENGINEER may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing
all necessary labor, material and equipment, If it is found that such
Work is defective, CONTRACTOR shall bear all the expenses of such un-
covering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satis-
factory reconstruction, including compensation for additional professional
services, and an appropriate deductive Change Order shall be issued.
If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall
F&N-78 GC-22
f
be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure,
observation, inspection, testing and reconstruction if he makes a claim
therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. ;
Owner, May Stop the Work;
13.8. If the Work is defective, or CONTRACTOR fails to supply
sufficient skilled workmen or suitable materials or equipment, or fails
to conforin to the progress schedule required by Paragraph 14.1, or
if CONTRACTOR fails to make prompt payments to Subcontractors or for
labor, materials or equipment, OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to stop the
Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been
eliminated; however, this right of OWNER to stop the Work shall not
give rise to any duty on the part. of OWNER to exercise this right for
the benefit of CONTRACTOR or any other party.
Correction or Removal of Defective Work;
13.9. If required by ENGINEER prior to approval of final payment,
CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER and as specified by
ENGINEER, either correct any defective Work, whether or not fabricated,
installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by ENGINEER,
remove it from the site and replace it with nondefective Work. If
CONTRACTOR does not correct such defective Work or remove and replace
such rejected Work within a reasonable time, all as specified in a
written notice from ENGINEER, OWNER may have the deficiency corrected
or the rejected Work removed and replaced. All direct or indirect
costs of such correction or removal and replacement, including compen-
sation for additional professional services, shall be paid by CONTRACTOR,
and an appropriate deductive Change Order shall be issued. CONTRACTOR
shall also bear the expenses of making good all Work of others destroyed
or damaged by his correction, removal or replacement of his defective
Work.
One Year Correction Period;
13.10, If, after the approval of final payment and prior to the
expiration of one year thereafter or such longer period of time as
may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special
guarantee required by the Contract Documents, any Work is found to
't be defective, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER and
in accordance with OWNER 's written instructions, either correct such
defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by OWNER, remove it from
the site and replace it with nondefective Work. If CONTRACTOR does
M not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, OWNER may
have the defective Work corrected or the rejected Work removed and
F&N-78 GC-23
i
,l
replaced, and all direct and indirect costs of such removal and re-
placement, including compensation for additional professional services,
shall be paid by CONTRACTOR.
Acceptance of Defective Work:
13,11. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replace-
ment of defective Work, OWNER prefers to accept it, he may do so.
In such case, if acceptance occurs prior to approval of final payment,
a Change Order shall be issued incorporating the necessary revisions
in the Contract Documents, including appropriate reduction in the Con-
tract Price; or, if the acceptance occurs after approval of final pay-
ment, an appropriate amount shall be paid by CONTRACTOR to OWNER,
Neglected Work by Contractor:
13.12. If CONTRACTOR should fail to prosecute the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents, including any requirements of the progress
schedule, OWNER, after seven (7) days' written notice to CONTRACTOR
may, without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good such
deficiencies and the cost thereof (including compensation for additional
professional services) shall be charged against CONTRACTOR in which
case a Change Order shall be issued incorporating the necessary revisions
in the Contract Documents including an appropriate reduction in the
Contract Price. If the payments then or thereafter due CONTRACTOR
are not sufficient to :over such amount, CONTRACTOR shall pay the dif-
ference to OWNER. ,
i
ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
Schedules:
14.1. At least ten (10) days prior to submitting the first Appli-
cation for a progress payment, CONTRACTOR shall submit a progress schedule,
a final schedule of Shop Drawing submission and a schedule of values
of the Work, These schedules shall be satisfactory in form and sub-
stance to ENGINEER. The schedule of values shall include quantities
and unit prices aggregating the Contract Price, and shall subdivide
the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the
basis for progress payments during construction. Upon approval of
the schedules of values by ENGINEER, it shall be incorporated into
the form of Application for Payment furnished by ENGINEER.
Application for Progress Payment:
14.2. At least ten (10) days before each progress payment falls
due (but not more often than once a month), CONTRACTOR shall submit to
1
F&N-78 GC-24
i
4
i
i
ENGINEER for review an Application for Payment on a form supplied by
the 014NER filled out and certified by CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed
as of the date of the Application. If payment is requested on the basis
of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered
and suitably stored at the site, the Application for Payment shall also
be accompanied by such data as required by OWNER. Each subsequent Appli-
cation for Payment shall also include an affidavit of CONTRACTOR stating
that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have
been applied to discharge in full all of CONTRACTOR's obligations reflected
in prior Applications for Payment. The CONTRACTOR shall certify on each
Application for Payment that the Work performed to date complies with
the Contract Documents.
Contractor's Warranty of Title:
14.3. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title to all Work,
materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether
incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to OWNER at the time of
payment free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests and encumb-
rances (hereinafter in these General Conditions referred to as "Liens"),
Approval of Payments:
14.4. ENGINEER will, within ten (10) days after receipt of each
Application for Payment, either indicate in writing his approval of payment
and present the Application to OWNER, or return the Application to CONTRACTOR
Indicating in writing his reasons for refusing to approve payment. In
the latter case, CONTRACTOR may make the necessary corrections and resubmit
the Application. OWNER shall, within ten (10) days of presentation to
him of the approved Application for Payment, pay CONTRACTOR the amount
approved by ENGINEER less ten (10%) percent of the amount thereof which
shall be retained until Final Payment and less all other sums that may
be retained by the OWNER as set forth in the Contract Documents.
14.5. ENGINEER's approval of any payment requested in an Application
E for Payment will constitute a representation by him to OWNER, based on
ENGINEER's on-site observations of the Work in progress as an experienced
and qualified design professional and on his review of the Application
for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules that the Work has
progressed to the point indicated; that, to the best of his knowledge,
information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with
the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning
Project upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent
tests called for in the Contract Documents and any qualifications stated
in his approval); and that CONTRACTOR is entitled to payment of the amount
approved, However, by approving any such payment ENGINEER will not thereby
F&N-78 GC-25
be deemed to have represented that he made exhaustive or continuous on-
site inspections to check the quality or the quantity of the Work, or
that he has reviewed the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and pro-
cedures of construction, or that he has made any examination to ascertain
how or for what purpose CONTRACTOR has used the moneys paid or to be
paid to him on account of the Contract Price, or that title to any Work,
materials or equipment has passed to OWNER free and clear of any Liens.
14.6. ENGINEER may refuse to approve the whole or any part of any
payment if, in his opinion, it would be incorrect to make such representations
to OWNER, He may also refuse to approve any such payment, or because
of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections
or tests, nullify any such payment previously approved, to such extent
as may be necessary in his opinion to protect OWNER from loss because:
14.6.1. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been
damaged requiring correction or replacement,
14,6.2. claims or liens have been filed or, there is reason-
able cause to believe such may be filed,
14.6.3. the Contract Price has been reduced because of Modifications,
14.6.4. OWNER has been required to correct defective Work
or complete the Work in accordance with paragraph 13,11, or
14.6.5. of unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work, including
1 failure to furnish acceptable submittals or to clean up,
14.6.6. reasonable indication that the Work will not be completed
I within the Contract Time,
14.6.7, reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for
the unpaid balance of the Contract Price.
Substantial Completion;
i 14.7, Prior to final payment, CONTRACTOR may, in writing to OWNER
and ENGINEER, certify that the entire Project is substantially complete
and request that ENGINEER issue a certificate of Substantial Completion,
Within a reasonable time thereafter, OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall
make an inspection of the Project to determine the status of completion.
If ENGINEER does not consider the Project substantially complete, he
will notify CONTRACTOR in writing giving his reasons therefor, If ENGINEER
considers the Project substantially complete, he will prepare and deliver
F&N-78 GC-26
i
J
to OWNER a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall
fix the date of Substantial Completion and the responsibilities between
OWNER and CONTRACTOR for maintenance, heat and utilities. There shall
be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed
or corrected before final payment, and the certificate shall fix the
time within which such items shall be completed or corrected, said time
to be within the Contract Time. OWNER shall have seven (7) days after
receipt of the tentative certificate during which he may make written
objection to ENGINEER as to any provisions of the certificate or attached
list. If, after considering such objections, ENGINEER concludes that
the Project is not substantially complete, he will within fourteen (14)
days after submission of the tentative certificate to OWNER notify CONTRACTOR
in writing, stating his reasons therefor. If, after consideration of
OWNER's objections, ENGINEER considers the PROJECT substantially complete,
he will within said fourteen (14) days execute and deliver to OWNER and
CONTRACTOR a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a
revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting
such changes from the tentative certificate as he believes justified
after consideration of any objections from OWNER. The failure of the
ENGINEER to include any items on such tentative list of items to be completed
does not alter the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all Work
in accordance with the Contract Documents.
14.8. OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the
Project after the date of Substantial Completion, but OWNER shall allow
j CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative
list.
f
Partial Utilization:
F
14.9. Prior to final payment, OWNER may request CONTRACTOR in writing
to permit him to use a specified part of the Project which he believes
he may use without significant interference with construction of the
other parts of the Project. If CONTRACTOR agrees, he will certify to
OWNER and ENGINEER that said part of the Project is substantially com-
plete and request ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion
for that part of the Project. Within a reasonable time thereafter OWNER,
J CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of that part of the
Project to determine its status of completion. If ENGINEER does not
consider that it is substantially complete, he will notify OWNER and
CONTRACTOR in writing giving his reasons therefor. If ENGINEER considers
that part of the Project to be substantially complete, he will execute
and deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a certificate to that effect, fixing
the date of Substantial Completion as to that part of the Project, at-
taching thereto a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected
before final payment and fixing the responsibility between OWNER and
F&N-78 GC-27
{
I
i
1
1
CONTRACTOR for maintenance, heat and utilities as to that part of the
Project. OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from any part
of the Project which ENGINEER has so certified to be substantially com-
plete, but OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete
or correct items on the tentative list.
Final Inspection:
14.10. Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that the Project is
complete, ENGINEER will make a final inspection with OWNER and CONTRACTOR
and will notify CONTRACTOR in writing of all particulars in which this
inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective, CONTRACTOR
shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to remedy such
deficiencies.
Final Application for Payment:
14.11. After CONTRACTOR has completed all such corrections to the
satisfaction of ENGINEER and delivered all maintenance and operating
instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates of inspection
and other documents - all as required by the Contract Documents, he may
make application for final payment following the procedure for progress
payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied by
such data and schedules as OWNER may reasonably require, together with
complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to OWNER)
of all Liens arising out of the Contract Documents and the labor and
services performed and the material and equipment furnished thereunder.
In lieu thereof and as approved by OWNER, CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts
or releases in full; an affidavit of CONTRACTOR that the releases and
receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which
a Lien could be filed, and that all payrolls, material and equipment
i bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which OWNER
or his property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise
satisfied, and consent of the Surety, if any, to final payment. If any
Subcontractor, materialman, fabricator or supplier fails to furnish a
release or receipt in full, CONTRACTOR may furnish a Bond or other collateral
satisfactory to OWNER to indemnify him against any Lien.
Approval of Final Payment:
14.12. If, on the basis of his observation and review of the Work
during construction, his final inspection and his review of the final
inspection and his review of the final Application for Payment - all
as required by the Contract Documents, ENGINEER is satisfied that the
Work has been completed and CONTRACTOR has fulfilled all of his obligations
F&N-78 GC-28
Y
4
fI
• I
under the Contract Documents, he wiII, within ten (10) days after receipt j
of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing his approval
of payment and present the Application to OWNER for payment. There-
upon ENGINEER will give written notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR that
the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of paragraph 14.15,
Otherwise, he will return the Application to CONTRACTOR, indicating
in writing his reasons for refusing to approve final payment, in which
case CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application. OWNER shall, within ten (10) days of presentation to
him of an approved final Application for Payment, pay CONTRACTOR the
amount approved by ENGINEER.
14.13. If after Substantial Completion of the Work final com-
pletion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of CONTRACTOR,
and ENGINEER so confirms, OWNER, upon certification by ENGINEER, and
without terminating the Agreement, may make payment of the balance
due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If
the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is
less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have
been furnished as required in paragraph 5.1, the written consent of
the Surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the
Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the CONTRACTOR
to the ENGINEER prior to certification of such payment. Such payment
shall be made under the terms and conditions yoverning final payment,
except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims, "
Contractor's Continuing Obligation:
14.14, CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the Work and complete
the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute,
Neither approval of any progress or final payment by ENGINEER, nor
the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion, nor any pay-
ment by OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents, nor any use
or occupancy of the Project or any part thereof by OWNER, nor any act
of acceptance by OWNER nor any failure to do so, nor any correction
of defective work by OWNER shall constitute an acceptance of Work not
~J in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Waiver of Claims:
14.15, The making and acceptance of final payment shall consti-
tute a waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER othor than
those previously made in writing and still unsettled,
i
I
F&N-78 GC-29
i
i
ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
Owner May Suspend Work;
15.1, OWNER may, at any time and without cause, suspend the Work
or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days
by notice in writing to CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER which shall fix the
date on which Work shall be resumed. CONTRACTOR shall resume the Work
on the date so fixed. CONTRACTOR may be allowed an increase in the
Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, directly
attributable to any suspension if he makes a claim therefor as provided
in Articles 11 and 12.
Owner May Terminate;
15,2, If CONTRACTOR is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, or
if he makes a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors,
or if a trustee or receiver is appointed for CONTRACTOR or for any
of his property, or if he files a petition to take advantage of any
debtor's act, or to reorganize under the bankruptcy or similar laws,
or if he repeatedly fails to supply sufficient skilled workmen or suit-
able materials or equipment, or if he repeatedly fails to make prompt
payments to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment or
if he disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of
any public body having ,jurisdiction, or if he disregards the authority
of ENGINEER, or if he otherwise violates any provision of the Contract
Documents, then OWNER may, without prejudice to any other right or
remedy and after giving CONTRACTOR and his Surety seven (7) days' written
notice, terminate the services of CONTRACTOR and take possession of
the Project and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment
and machinery thereon owned by CONTRACTOR, and finish the Work by whatever
method he may deem expedient. In such case CONTRACTOR shall not be
entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished.
If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the direct and
indirect costs of completing the Project, including compensation for
additional professional services, such excess shall be paid to CONTRACTOR,
If such costs exceed such unpaid balance, CONTRACTOR shall pay the
difference to OWNER, Such costs incurred by OWNER shall be determined
by ENGINEER and incorporated in a Change Order,
15,3, Where CONTRACTOR's services have been so terminated by
OWNER, said terminations shall not affect any rights of OWNER against
CONTRACTOR then existing or which may thereafter accrue, Any retention
or payment of moneys by OWNER due CONTRACTOR will not release CONTRACTOR
from liability.
f
r F&N-78 GC-30
i
I
IE
f
15,4. Upon seven (7) days' written notice to CONTRACTOR and ENGI-
NEER, OWNER may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right
or remedy, elect to abandon the Project and terminate the Agreement. ;
In such case, CONTRACTOR shall be paid for all Work executed and any
expense sustained plus a reasonable profit.
Contractor May "top Work or Terminate;
15.5. If, through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR, the ;fork is
suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by OWNER or under
an o-der of court or other public authority, or ENGINEER fails to act
on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is
submitted, or OWNER fails to pay CONTRACTOR any sum approved by ENGINEER
or awarded by arbitrators within thirty (30) days of its approval and
presentation, then CONTRACTOR may, upon seven (7) days' written notice
to OWNER and ENGINEER, terminate the Agreement and recover from OWNER
payment for all Work executed and any expense sustained plus a reason-
able profit. Ip addition and in lieu of terminating the Agreement,
if ENGINEER i'd$ failed to act on an Application for Payment or OWNER
has failed to make any payment as aforesaid, CONTRACTOR may upon seven
(7) days' notice to OWNER and ENGINEER stop the Work until he has been
paid all amounts then due.
ARTICLE 16 - ARBITRATION
16.1. All claims, disputes and other matters in question arising
out of, or relating to, this Agreement or the breach thereof except
for claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final
payment as provided by paragraph 14.15, shall be submitted to arbitra-
tion at the request of either party to the dispute. The parties may
agree upon one arbiter, otherwise, there shall be three, one named
in writing by each party, and the third chosen by the two arbiters
so selected; or if the arbiters fail to select a third within ten (10)
days, he shall be chosen by a District Judge serving the County in
which the major portion of the Project is located, unless otherwise
L specified. Should the party demanding arbitration fail to name an
arbiter within ten (10) days of the demand, his right to arbitrate
shall lapse, and the decision of the ENGINEER shall be final and binding
on him. Should the other party fail to choose an arbiter within ten
(10) days, the ENGINEER shall appoint such arbiter. Should either
party refuse or neglect to supply the arbiters with any papers or in-
formation demanded in writing, the arbiters are empowered by both
parties to take ex parte proceedings, The arbiters shall act with
promptness. The decision of any two shall be binding on both parties
to the contract. The decision of the arbiters upon any question sub-
mitted to arbitration under this contract shall be a condition
F&N-78 GC-31
;a
`.i
~l
precedent to any right of legal action. The decision of the arbiter
or arbiters may be filed in court to carry it into effect, The arbiters,
if they deem the case demands it, are authorized to award the party
whose contention is sustained, such sums as they deem proper for the
time, expense and trouble incident to the appeal, and if the appeal
was taken without reasonable cause, they may award damages for any
delay occasioned thereby. The arbiters shall fix their own compensation,
unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the cost and
charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties. The award
of the arbiters must be made in writing.
16,2. CONTRACTOR will carry on the Work and maintain the progress
schedule during any arbitration proceedings, unless otherwise agreed
by him and OWNER in writing.
ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS
Giving Notice:
17.1, Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires
the giving of written notice it shall be deemed to have been validly
given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the
firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or
if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage pre-
paid, to the last business address known to him who gives the notice.
Computation of Time:
17.2. When a period of time is referred to in the Contract Docu-
ments by days, it shall be computed to exclude the first and include
the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls
on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law
of the applicable jurisdiction, such day shall be omitted from the
computation,
General:
17.3. All Specifications, Drawings and copies thereof furnished
by ENGINEER shall remain his property. They shall not be used on another
Project, and, with the exception of those sets which have been signed
in connection with the execution of the Agreement, shall be returned
to him on request upon completion of the Project.
17.4. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Con-
ditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder, and, in particular
F&N-78 GC-32
n
M
but without limitation, the warranties, guarantees and obligations
imposed upon CONTRACTOR by paragraphs 6.28, 13.1, 13,10 and 14.3 and
the rights and remedies available to OWNER and ENGINEER thereunder, f
shall be in addition to, and shall not be construed in any way as a
limitation of, any rights and remedies available to them which are
otherwise imposed or available by law, by special guarantee or by other j
provisions of the Contract Documents.
i
17.5. The Contract Documents shall be governed by the law of
the place of the Project.
~ I
I
i
1
i
f I
L I
i
F$N-18 GC-33
E
I
I
i
h 11
r
SUPP1 MENTARY CONDITIONS
. 1 1
1. INSURANCE: The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Para- ;
graPTi of the General Conditions and shall, at his own expense,
purchase, maintain and keep in force such insurance as will protect him
from claims which may arise out of or result from his operations under
this Contract, whether such operations are by himself or by any Sub-
contractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them
or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, Minimum in-
surance requirements are to be as outlined in the table, "INSURANCE
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS".
Such insurance as Is required in the "INSURANCE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS"
shall be written so that the Owner will be notified in writing, in the
event of cancellation, restrictive amendment or non-renewal at least
thirty days prior to such action. Certificates of Insurance on the i
r form attached to this Section shall be filed with the Owner prior to
the commencement of the work.
All insurance required in the "INSURANCE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS" shall be
written with the City of Denton as co-insured, and the City shall
receive a duplicate copy of every insurance policy required.
The stated limits of insurance required by the attached table are
MINIMUM ONLY and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to
c-Term ne w at limits are adequate. These minimum limits may be basic
policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits.
In any event, the Contractor is fully responsible for all losses
I arising out of, resulting from or connected with operations under this
contract whether or not said losses are covered by insurance. The
Owners acceptance of Certificates of Insurance that in any respect do
not comply with the Contract requirements does not release the
Contractor from compliance herewith.
1
The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other fur dam-
ages caused by fire or other perils to the extent their interests are
covered by insurance under this Section, except such rights as they may
have to the proceeds of such insurance when held by the Owner as trus-
tee. The Contractor shall require similar waivers by Subcontractor
and Sub-subcontractors. s
2. RESIDENT PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE: The Owner has retained the Engi- i
neer o proof e a Tres en p or ject representative during the construc-
tion phase of this project. In general, the authority of the resident
project representative is as set forth in Attachment A which is
included immediately following these Supplementary Conditions.
3. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: In the event the Contractor fails to attain sub-
s an a comp e, o`n of the entire project (all bid items) within the
time set forth in the Proposal, the Owner may withhold money perma-
nently from the Contractor's total compensation the amount set forth
SC-1
I
II
i
in the table below as liquidated damages and for added expenses for
engineering services, etc., in accordance with Article 12 of the Gen..
era] Conditions. i
i
Amount of Contract Amount of Liquidated Damages
Less than $ 5,000.00 $ 60.00 Per Day
$ 5,000,00 to 14,999.99 80.00 Per Day
15,000.00 to 24,999.99 100.00 Per Day
25,000.00 to 49,999.99 120.00 Per Day
50,000.00 t0 99,999.99 160.00 Per Day
100,000.00 to 1,000,000.00 240.00 Per Day
More than 1,000,000.00 500.00 Per Day
i
?he Owner will be the sole judge as to whether the work has been com-
pleted within the allotted time.
4. MINIMUM WAGE SCALE: The rates shown in attached "Schedule B" have been
e3ermiiiFny"fT7e-City of Denton, Texas in accordance with the statu-
tory requirements and prevailing local wages.
5. SHOP DRAWINfS: Article 6, Paragraph 21, of the GENERAL CONDITIONS,
shall) a amei,:Jed so that the Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of
all Shop Drawings to the Engineer.
END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
j
i
i
SC-2
P
I
}
I
ATTACHMENT A
Duties, Responsibilities and Limitations of Authority
of Resident Project Representative
A. General,
Resident Project Representative is ENGINEER's Agcnt, will act os directed by and under the supervision of ENGI•
NEER, and will confer with I•,NGINFFR regarding his actions, Resident Prtjecl Representative's dealings in matters
pertaining to the on-site Work shall in general be only with FNGINEER and CONTRACTOR, and dealings with
subcontractors shall only be through or with the full knowledge of CONTRA:: FOR. Written ceiirmumi-ation with
OWNER will be only through or as directed by ENGINFFR.
R. Duties and ResponslblRtles,
Resident Project Representative will:
1. Schedules: Review the progress schedule, schedule of Shop Drawing submissions and schedule of values prepared
by CONTRACTOR and consult with ENGINEER concerning their acceptability
2. Conferences: Attend preconstrtrction conferences. Arrange a schedule of progress meetings and oiherjob conferences
as required in consultation with ENGINEER and notify those expected to attend in advance. Attend meetings, and
maintain and circulate copies of adnutes thereof,
J. unison:
a. Serve as ENGINVER'.s liaison with CONTRACTOR, working principally through CONTRACTOR's superinlen•
dent and assist him in understanding the intent of the Contract Documents. Assist ENGINEER in serving as OWNER's
liaison with CONTRACTOR when CONTRACTOR's operations affect OWNER's on-site operations.
b. As requested by ENGINEER, assist in obudn;ng from OWNER additional details or Information, when required
at the job site for proper execution of the Work.
4, Shop Drawings and Srunplea:
a. Receive and record date of receipt of Shop Drawings and samples, receive samples which are furnished at the sit(-
by CONTRACTOR, and notify ENGINEER of their availability for examination,
b. Advise ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR or Its superintendent immediately of the commencement of any Work
requiring at Shop Drawing or sample submission irthe submission has not been approved by ENGINEER,
S. Review of Work. Rejecrlon of 1)(ferrire Wo),k, lnspecrions and Tars:
a. Conduct on-site observations of the Work in progress to assist ENOINVER In determining if the Work is proceeding
in accordance with the Contract DOCUments and that completed Work will conform Io the Contract Documents.
b. Report to ENGINEER whenever he believes dial any Work is unsatisfactory, faulty or defective or does not
conform to the Contract Documents, or (Ines not meet the requirements of any inspections, tests or approval required
to be made or has been damaged prior to final payrncnC and advise ENGINEER when he believes Work should be
corrected or rejected or should be uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, Inspection or approval
` c. Verify that tests, equipment and systems startups and operating and maintenance instructions are conducted as
f required by the Contract DOCLIMenls and in presence of the required personnel, and that CONTRACTOR maintains
adequate records thereW ohserve• record and report to ENGINEER appropriate details relative to the test procedures
and suulups,
J. Accompany visiting inspectors representing public or other agencies ha%Ing jarisdiclion over the project. record
the outcome of these inspections and report to ENGINFRR.
1979 by Nruionai Slickly Of lhnfcssiunal Fnpinecrc 20,19 K Sc. NW„ Washington. D.C. 1f88M
NSIIl:HA('IiC'AS('V hiblicallun No. 19I0-I•A
197) Edilinn
~i
}
s
I
I
6. lei terprelatiun ofC'nnfriexT Documeyu.i: Transmit lu CON'I'RACE'OR ENOINEER's clarifications and interpretations
of the Contract Documents.
i
1 7. Modiffn+tiorts: Consider and evaluate CONTRACPOR's suggestions for modifications in Drawings or Specifications
and report them with recommendations to f NGINY1iR.
8. Records:
1 a. Maintain at the job site orderly riles for correspondence, reports of job conferences, Shop Drawings and samples
submissions, reproductions of original Contract Documents including all addenda, change orders, field orders, addi•
tional Drawings issued subsequent to the execution of the Contract, INGINEER's clarifications and interpretations
of the Contract Documents, progress reports, and other Project related documents.
1 b. Keep a diary or log hook, recording hours on the job site, weather conditions, data rclativc to questions of extras
or deductions, list of visiting officials and representatives of manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers and distributors,
daily activities, decisions, observations in general and specific observations in more detail as in the case of observing
lest procedures. Send copies to ENGINEER.
I c. Record names, addresses and telephone numbers of all CONTRACTORS, subcontractors and major suppliers of
materials and equipment.
I 9. Reports:
o. Furnish ENCIINEERperiodic reporisasrequired ofprogress oftheWork andCONTRACTOR'scompliance with the
approved progress schedule and schedule of Shop Drawing submissions.
b. Consult with ENCYlNI'sER in advance of scheduled major tests, inspections or start of important phases of the
work.
c. Report immediately to ENGINEER upon the occurrence of any accident.
it 10. Payment Requistrlons: Review applications for payment with CONTRACTOR for compliance with the established
procedure for their submission and forward them with recommendations to ENGINEER, noting particularly their
reltuion to the schedule of values, Work completed and materials and equipment delivered at the silt but not tncor•
t porated in the Work.
11. C'errficares, A4ainfenance and Operation Mmmals: During the course ofthe Work, verify that certificates, maintenance
and operation manuals and other data required to he assembled and furnished by CONTRACTOR are applicable to
the items actually installed; and deliver this material to ENGINEER for his review and forwarding to OWNER prior
to final acceptance of the Work.
12. Completion,,
a. Before ENGINEER issues a Certificatt J Substantial Completion, submit to CONTRACTOR n list of observed
items requiring completion or correction.
b. Conduct final inspection in the company of ENOINEFR, OWNER and CONTRACTOR and prepare It final list of
items to be completed or corrected.
c. Verify that all items on final list have been cnlrrpteted or corrected and make recommendations to ENGINEFR
concerning acceptance.
-J C. Glmltallons of Aulhorily,
I'sxcepl upon written instructions of E'NOINEER, Resident E'roject Represcntativel
1. Shall not authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or approve any substitute materials or equipment.
2, Shall not exceed limitations on ENGINEER's authority as set forth !n the Contract Documents.
3. Shall notunderfakeanyoftheresponsibilities ofCONTRAC'TOR. subcontractors orCONTRACTOR'ssuperinWndent,
or expedite the Work,
4, Shall not advise on or Issue directions relative to auy aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures of conslruclion unless such is specifically called for in the Contract Documents,
S. Shall not advise on or issue directions as to safety precautions bind programs in connection with the Work.
6. Shall not authorize OWNER to occupy the Project in whole or in port,
7. Shall not participate in specialized field or laboratory tests.
he rated by 11 n8meuV I. InI Cunlurl IN. Umen II ('FIMM AItt
I~bl,rbtdlmmlY by r4nfelaunal P.nynearln Rlrtle trot lice ~Pdrllu Jwwnn oflhe Ntlmn'a1.MrlltW Or P. Ie4uona F.npneot Amemm~ Gmmlan~l'npn<rn ('nunul. Anwmm 5rrcult
nr hal r;nSo"m
I
;a
i
I
1
1
SCBk:DULE "B"
CITY OF OENTON MINIAMUM WAGE RATES FOR PUB41C
ENGINEERING (HIGHWAY/HEAVY) CONSTRUCTION AND
UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONTRACTS
1
The rates below have been determined by the City of Denton,
Texas in accordance with the statutory requirements and
prevalling local wages.
Overtime shall be paid for at the rate of one and one-hall
(1-1/2) times the regular rates for every hour wockad Ln excess
of forty (40) hours per weak.
Trade-Craft Classification Rate Per Hour
Air Tool Man
Asphalt Heaterman
Asphalt Raker 6.55
Asphalt Shoveler 5.00
Satching Plant Scaleman 6.50
satterboard Setter
Carpenter 6.65
Carpenter Helper 5.45
Concrete Finisher (Paving) 7.05
Concrete Finisher Helper (Paving) 5150
Concrete Finisher (Structures) 6.80
Concrete Finisher Helper (Struct) 5.55
Concrete Rubber
electrician 9.50
Electrician Helper 5.50
Form Builder (Structures) 6.70
Focm Huildec Helper (Str.uct) 3.00
form Liner (Paving a Curb) 7.25
Form Setter (Paving S Curb) 6.10
Form Setter Helper (Paving s Curb) 4.50
Form Satter (Structures) 7.00
Form Setter Helper (Structures) 5.69
Laborer, Common 4.00
Laborer, Utility Kan 4.90
Manhole Builder, SCLcX
Mechanic 6.70
Mechanic Helper 5.00
E Oiler 6.05
I Serviceman 5.75
1 i 1 Painter (Structures)
Fainter Helper (Structures)
Piledrivecman
Pipelayer 5.75
Pipelayer Helper 4.75
Powderman 1.00
Reinforcing Steel Satter (Paving) 5,00
Reinforcing Steal Satter (Struct) 6.60
Reinforcing Steel Setter Helper 4.30
steel Worker (Structural) 5.25
Stool Wocker Helper (Structural)
Sign zrector
sign erector Helper
Spreader Box ;dart 6.00
Swamper 4.b5
Power_Equionent Ooeratorse
Asphalt 013trioutor 6.00
Asphalt Paving Machine 6.95
Broom or sweeper Operator 3.20
Bulldozer 130 HP s Lass 6.25
Bulldo2er L30 HP 6.75
Concrete Paving curing Macnine 6150
Concrete Paving Finlshlnq mach 6.30
a - (z.5
I
j ~
I
Trade-Craft Classification Rate Per H..°uc /
Concrete Paving Form Grader
Concrete Paving joint machine 6.35 l
Concrete Paving Longitudinal Float 1.75
Concrete Paving mlxe' 6.05
Concrete paving saw
Concrete Paving Spreader
Paving Sub Grader
Crane, Clamshell, Backho%., errick, 7.00
Oragline, Shovel (1893 n 1 1/2 CY)
Crane, Clam$hell , Backhoe, Derrick, 7.35
Dragline, Snovel (L 1/2 Cy h Over)
Crusher ur screening plan, Operator
Elevating Grader
Form Loader
Foundation Ocill Operator (Crawler
mounted) 8.25 )
Foundation Drill OP. (Truck mounted) 5.45
Foundation Drill Operator Helper 6.15
Front End Loader (2 1/2 CY s Less) 7,25
Front End Loader (Over 2 1/2 CY) 6.00
Hoist (Over 2 drums)
Mixer {over L6 CF)
mixer (16CF6 Lass
tor, Fine Grade 7,55
Motor Grader Op 7.25
motor Grader Operator
Roller, Steel Wheel (Plant-41x 6.35
Pavements)
j RoLlec steel wheel (Other-Flat 6.45
wheel oe Tamptnq) 5.15
Roller, Pneumatic (Self Propallad) 6.25
M Scrapers (17 Cy & Lees) 6.10
Scrapers (Over L7 CY)
Side Boom ) LSU HP & Lass
Tractor (Crawler TYDee over L HP 6.90
Tractor (Crawler Ty. ) 9.60
Tractor (pneumatic) 80 HP S Less 6.15
' Tractor (Pheumatic) over 80 HP
Traveling mixer
Trenching machine, Light
Trenching machine, Heavy ~I
wagon Drill, Boring machine or post 5.25
Hole Driller Operator 1
Truck_ Dr ver,4 i
if i 5.35 ~
Single Axle, Light
Single Axle, Heavy
Tandom Axle ar Semitrailar
LowcoY-Float 5.70
Transit-Mix
winch 7.15
welder
welder Helper 1
The CONTRACTOR snail comply with all State and Federal Laws I
applicable to such ,rocs. * on
listed idsThe
The above are minimum ratesif Snddexcess aof tmoadssthe'
rated they expect to pay, loc K payment to CONTRACTOR
pwN3R will not consider o! +agessnigndrthan toosa specified.
on account of Pa`y
{
i
s e44 ¢>i;~'.: ' 111
J
• ~j
1
CITY OF DENTON
INSURANCE MINIMUM KE4UIREMENTS j
Without limiting any of the other obligations or liabilities of the
Contractor, the Contractor shall provide and maintain until the
work is completed and accepted by the laity of Denton, Owner,
minimum insurance coverage as follows:
TYPE OF COVERAGE ~F LIMITS Ur' LIABILITY
1. WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION STATuroRY
II. COMPREHENSIVE GENERAL LIABILITY
Bodily Injury $300,000 $1,000,000
Each occurance Aggregate
Property Damage $100,000
j Each accident
III. COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
i
i
Bodily Injury $300,000 $1,000,000
Each person Each accident
Property Damage $100,000
Each accident
A. In addition to the insurance described above, the
Contractor shall obtain at his expense an OWNER'S
PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE POLICY with the
following limits,
{ BODILY INJURY PROPERTY DAMAGE
' $300,000 each person $100,000 each accident
$300,000 each accident $1,000,000 aggregate
Covering the work to be performed by ttie Contractor for
the City of Denton.
B. The contractor will furnish the Owner's Protective
Policy described above and execute the Certificate
described on the following page to the City of 'Denton
for its approval. Insurance must be accepted before
commencing any work under the contract to which this
insurance applies.
j The City of Denton will be listed on all policies as an
additional named insured.
#0399c
' to
l
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
THIS IS TO CERTIFY that the following policies, subject to their terms, conditions and exclusions, have been issued by
the company or companies shown below,
THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE neither affirmatively or negatively amends, extends or alters the coverage afforded by
kite policy or policies shown below, nor is it an endorsement making the person, firm or corporation at whose request it is issued an
additional insured on the policy or policies referred to herein,
In the event of any material change in or cancellation of thn policy or policies, the company or companies will mail ten ;10) _ t
days' written notice to the party to whom this certificate is addressed,
NAME AND ADDRESS OF PARTY TO WHOM CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED DATE:
i
~ REMARKS: ,
City of Denton Bid #
901-8 Texas St,
Denton, TX 76201
Attn: John J. Marshall, C,P.M.
L Purchasing Agent:
NAME AND AODREiS OF INSURED: _
Policy Effective Expiration LIMITS OF LIABILITY'
Insurance Company Type of insurance Number Date Dote
-
• Workmen's Compensation Statutory
and
` Employers Liability Employers Liability Limps-5100,000
Comprehensive Bodily Injury
General Liability
i
$ Each Occurrence
Aggregate Products
$ & C_ompleed Operations
i
Property Damage
$ Each -0c, u-ff lace
S AggregateOperatlons
$ Aggregate Protective
S -Aggregate Contractual
Aggregate products
& Completed Operations
~I - Comprehensive - -v-- Bodily Injury Each Person
Automobile Liability" $ -
$ Each Occurrence ,
Property Damage
$ Each Qccuuen<a
I ~
h
r 'Absence of any appropriate entiy means no such Insurance Is in force. NAME AND ADDRESS OF AORBCY ;
"Covers all owned, no"wned or hired vehicles. li
pti0i N"EP, OF AOENC7 Authorized Hepresensanves of the Insuronc! Companies referred to alcove,
.Y.
C1-2
I
i
{
II,~
1
zi
J
1
r
01001 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION RFQUIRF_MENTS
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The work involved under this contract consists of the furnishing of
all materials, tools, equipment, transportation, services, and all
labor and superintendence necessary for the construction and com-
pletion of Phase I of the Denton Water Treatment Plant Upgrade.
This work shall include:
1. Replacement of filter media, and inspection and repair of filter
bottoms, in Filters 1 through 8.
2. Construction of a 36" filtered water line from the filters to i
the clearwells.
3. Construction of a new potassium permanganate feed system at the j
Raw Water Pump Station,
4. Construction of an air handling unit at the Raw Water Pump
Station.
i
5. Replacement of the existing weir plates with serpentine weir
parrs in settling basins 1 through 8.
All work shall be performed in accordance with the Plans and
Specifications.
1.02 EXCESS EARTH
Excess earth from the various excavations (earth not required for
backfill or embankment), shall be disposed of by the Contractor, off
the site, at no additional expense to the Owner.
1.03 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION
i Excavation will be unclassified. It shall be the responsibility of
the bidder to make such subsurface investigations as he deems
necessary to determine the nature of material to be excavated,
_ J 1.04 CORRECTION PERIOD
Nothing in the General Conditions Article 13 concerning the
correction period shall establish a period of limitation with respect
to any other obligation which Contractor has under the Contract
Documents, The establishment of time periods relates only to the
specific obligations of Contractor to correct the work, and has no
relationship to the time within which his obligations under the
Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time
within which proceedings may be commenceu to establish his liability
with respect to his obligations other than to specifically correct
01001-1
I
.'r
i
i
1
I
the work, This correction period shall he covered by the extension
of the Performance Bond.
1,05 CONNECTIONS TO EX1SfING FACILITIES i
1
It will be necessary, during the course of construction, to make
several connections to the existing plant, All work involved in
making connections which will require a shutdown of any section of
the existing plant shall be carefully planned and coordinated with
both the Engineer and the Owner so that "down" time of the existing
plant may he held to a minimum, On occasions when a section of the
existing plant is down for purpose of making a connection, work shall
proceed on a 24-hour schedule until the plant is back in operation,
See paragraph 1,18, SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION, concerning partial 1
plant shutdowns required for construction.
1.06 WORKMANSHIP
These specifications contain detailed instructions and descriptions
' covering the major items of construction and workmanship necessary
for building and completing the various units or elements of the
project. The specifications are intended to be so written that only
first class workmanship and finish of the best grade and quality will
result. The fact that, these specifications may fail to be so
complete as to cover all details will not relieve the Contractor of
full responsibility fur providing a completed project of high
quality, first class finish and appearance and satisfactory for
operation, all within the apparent intent of the plans and
specifications,
( 1.07 FIELD OFFICE
The Contractor shall furnish, equip, and maintain a field office on
the site for the Engineer's use. Office space shall be approximately
140 square feet, Field office space may be in a separate building or
mobile trailer' or may be contained in a construction office building
of the Contractor, but in such case shall have an outside door with
lock and provisions for locking any interior connecting doors.
Office space shall contain drafting table and plan rack (may be
built,.in) and shall be substantially constructed, vents) Wl ,
lighted, air-conditioned for summer use, heated for winte use and
weatherproofed so that all documents will not be damaged by the
elements, The Contractor, at his expense, shall pay for all yris,
water, and electricity required for the field office space. 1
addition, the Contractor shall, at his expense, provide phone servir,e
to the field office and shall pay for monthly phone service fees tc
exclude non-local calls, which will be paid for by the Owner.
1.08 SANITATION FACILITIES
The Contractor shall provide portable toilet facilities (Chem-cans)
In sufficient number for the Contractor's use throughout the course
01001-2
of the project and in accordance with OSHA requirements.
contractor's personnel will riot be permitted to use toilet facilities
in the existing plant buildings.
1.09 SALVAGED MATERIAL
During construction of the project any equipment or materials which
has been the property of the Owner and which is salvaged by the
Contractor shall remain the property of the Owner, Brick and
concrete rubble shall be the property of the Contractor and shall be
disposed of off the plant site,
1,10 MATERIALS
These specifications are intended to be so written that only
materials of the best quality and grade will be furnished, The fact
that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some
detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for
providing materials of high quality and protecting them adequately
until incorporation in the structure, The specifications for
materials set out the minimum standard of quality which the Owner
believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. No
substitutions will be permitted until the Contractor has received
written permission of the Engineer to make a substitution for the
material which has been specified.
Where the term "or equal", or "or approved equal" is used, it is
understood that if a material, product, or piece of equipment of the
specified name and quality is furnished it will be approvable, as the
particular name was used for the purpose of establishing a standard
of quality acceptable to the Owner. If a product of any other name
is proposed for use, the Engineer's approval thereof must be obtained
before the proposed substitute is procured by the Contractor,
Wherever the term "or equal" is used, it is understood to mean "or
approved equal"
j 1,11 COST BREAKDOWN
Within thirty (30) days after the execution of the Contract, and not
less than ten (10) days prior to the first monthly estimate, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a cost breakdown of the work
under this Contract. This breakdown is for use by the Engineer in
preparing the monthly estimates and for the Owner's use in cost
accounting for the project. The breakdown shall be in detail,
itemizing all items of equipment and construction and shall
accurately reflect the cost of all work as included in the bid
prices. Cost breakdown shall be such that an overall cost of the
various elements of the project can be determined,
1.12 PROGRESS SCHEDULES
Within 10 days prior to submission of first monthly progress payment,
the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval
01001-3
t
six (G) copies of the schedule in which the Contractor proposes to
carry on the work, the date of which he will start the several major
activities (including procurement of materials, plants, and equip-
went) and the contemplated dates for completing the same. The
schedule shall be in the form of a progress chart of suitable scale
to indicate graphically the percentage of work scheduled for
completion at any time. As the work progresses, the Contractor shall
enter on the chart the actual progress at the end of each partial
payment period or at such intervals as directed by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall also revise the schedule to reflect any adjustments
in contract time approved by the Engineer. Three copies of the
updated schedule shall be del ivered at. such intervals as directed by
thc: Engineer.
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, work accomplished falls behind
that scheduled, the Contractor shall take such action as necessary to
improve his progress. In addition, the Engineer may require the
Contractor to submit a revised schedule demonstrating his program and
proposed plan to make up lag in scheduled progress and to insure
completion of the work within the contract time. If the Engineer
finds the proposed plan not acceptable, he may require the Contractor
to increase the work force, the construction plant and equipment, the
number of work shifts or the overtime operations without additional
cost to the Owner.
Failure of the Contractor to comply with these requirements shall be
considered grounds for determination by the Engineer that the
Contractor, is failing to prosecute the work with such diligence as
will insure its completion within the time specified.
1.13 TESTS
E
In addition to the tests called for in the Specifications, the Owner
may have tests made of pipe and materials for conformity with the
Specifications by an independent testing laboratory. Such indepen-
dent laboratory will be selected and paid by the Owner. The Owner
may require the Contractor to furnish mill test certificates on
reinforcing steel or, wire, cast iron pipe and fittings, and cement.
E
1.14 POWER FOR CONSTRUCTION
The Contractor shall provide at his awn e.cpense electrical power for
project construction.
1.15 FINAL TESTING AND OPERATION
Prior to presentation for final acceptance of the work under this
contract, the Contractor shall have started and operated all units of
the plant for a sufficient duration of time to permit the Engineer to
observe overall performance of the respective units and equipment.
it Such operation shall be properly coordinated with the Owner's
operating personnel.
01001-4
i~
[y
%
1.16 SANITATION AND CLEANUP
During construction, the Contractor shall maintain the premises in an
orderly, neat, and presentable condition. Scraps and debris shall
` not be left scattered around but shall be assembled in one place.
When construction under this Contract has been otherwise completed,
i the Contractor shall remove all left over ronstruction materials,
! equipment, scraps, debris and rubbish, and leave the site in a neat,
! well kept appearance.
I
At the completion of the work, all buildings and structures shall be
broom clean. The Contractor shall clean the walls of all hydraulic
structures of dirt, stains, or other materials and pipes shall be
left free of any and all foreign material, The Contractor shall
remove all marks, stains, dirt and soil from all finished surfaces
and shall thoroughly clean all floors, cyan and polish all finished
hardware and other such devices.
r 1.17 DISINFECTION
After completion of the work the Contractor shall disinfect the
various basins, conduits, etc., that are to be built or renovated
under this contract, prior to being placed in service. They shall be
thoroughly cleaned with lime water (or other suitable material) and
then filled with chlorinated water in which the residual shall be
maintained at not less than 20 ppm for 24 hours. The Contractor
shall furnish all materials, labor, etc., for disinfecting.
1.18 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION
It will be necessary to construct the 36-inch filtered water line
prior to commencing work on the filters. An existing isolation valve
located on the filtered water line the the filter pipe gallery will
allow isolation of filters 1-8 so that they can be operated during
j construction of the proposed pipeline. This will also allow construc-
tion of the serpentine weirs in Basins 5-8 concurrent with the pipe-
line construction, Upon completion, testing, disinfection and placing
into operation the new filtered water line, work may commence on
Filters 1-8 and the serpentine weirs in Basins 1-4. At no time will
l more than one half of the plant be out of service for any time
J exceeding four hours. In addition, during the filter media replace-
ment and installation, only two filters may be out of service at any
one time. Each two filters must have the existing media removed, any
weak or soft grout replaced, any broken filter bottoms replaced, sand
deposits under filter blocks removed, new filter media installed, and
the filters placed back into operation before beginning work on the
next set of filters. The following construction sequence shall be
mandatory for this project:
1. Construction of the 36" filtered water line from the filter to
the clearwells shall be complete by April 30, 1986.
01001-5
5
I
2. During replacement of filter media, and inspection and repair of
filter bottoms, no more than two (2) filters shall be taken out
of service at any one time.
Sequence of construction of all other work on this project will be at j
the Contractor's option,
1.19 PROTECTING EXISTING S,fRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
Where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and
utilities, the Contractor shall at his own expense carefully support
and protect all such structures and/or utilities so that there will
be no failure or settlement. Where it is necessary to move services,
poles, guy wires, pipelines or other obstructions, the Contractor
shall notify and cooperate with the utility owner. In case damage to
an existing structure or utility occurs, whether failure or
settlement, the Contractor shall restore the structure or utility to
its original cond tion and position without compensation from the
Owner.
Contractor shall repair or replace all damaged street surfaces,
driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, drainage structures,
or other structures, to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the
Owner. Structures shall be restored to a condition equal to or better
than the original condition and of a similar material and design.
The costs of such repair or replacement shall be borne by the
Contractor and shall be included in the Proposal.
i ~
The Engineer has shown all existing piping, valves, electrical
conduits, utility poles, etc, as best can be determined from
available records. The Contractor shall verify the type, size, and
location of all existing piping and valves in the construction area.
All piping, valves, electrical conduit, etc, in the construction area
shall be removed and/or relocated as necessary in a manner acceptable
to the Engineer, and no additional compensation will be considered
for relocating any of these items whether shown on the plans or not.
1.20 REFERENCE STANDARDS
Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or
association, or to codes of local and state authorities, shall mean
the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative specification
adopted and published at the date of taking bids, unless specifically {
stated otherwise.
1.21 METHODS OF OPERATION
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in advance concerning his
plans for carrying on each part of the work, but the Contractor alone
shall be responsible for the safety, adequacy, and efficiency of his
plant, equipment, and methods.
01001-6
{
r I
i
i
Any method of work suggested by the Owner or Consulting Engineer, but
not specified, shall be used at the risk and responsibility of the
Contractor, and the Consulting Engineer and Owner will assume no j
responsibility therefor,
Review by the Owner or Consulting Engineer of any plan or method of
1
work proposed by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of
any responsibility therefor, and such review shall not be considered
as an assumption of any risk or, liability by tke Owner or Consulting
Engineer, or any officer, agent, or employee thereof. The Contractor
shall have no claim on account of the failure or inefficiency of any
plan or method so reviewed. 1
The Owner and the Consulting Engineer will not be responsible for any {
act or omission of the Contractor, or, any subcontractor, or any of {
their agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the J
work. The Owner and Consulting Engineer will not be responsible for
any failure of the Contractor or his subcontractors or any other
persons to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of
the contract documents.
1.22 UNFAVORABLE CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS
Ouring unfavorable weather, wet ground, or other unsuitable
construction conditions, the Contractor shall confine his operations
to work which will not be affected adversely thereby. No portion of
the work shall be constructed under conditions which would affect
adversely the quality or efficiency thereof, unless special means or
precautions are taken by the Contractor to perform the work in a
E proper and satisfactory manner.
1.23 PUMPING AND DEWATERING OPERATIONS
Work to be performed will require draining, pumping and dewatering,
and certain cleaning operations necessary to complete the work as
specified and as indicated on the drawings. It is the intent of
these specifications that such draining, pumping and dewatering, and
cleaning operations shall be the obligation of the Contractor and
that the Owner will aid in lowering the liquid level in the
structures involved only to the extent possible by operation of
existing drain valves and transfer facilities.
The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that basins and
other structures containing water are located adjacent to the site of
the new construction. The Contractor shall provide all necessary
pumping, as required by the excavation work specification, to remove
all surface water, ground water, leakage, and water from other
sources from excavations.
1.24 DEFINITIONS
Whenever the words, forms or phrases defined herein, or pronouns used
in their place occur in these specifications, or in any document or
01001-7
+1
i
instrument herein contemplated, the intent and meaning shall be
interpreted as follows, /
BHP - drake Horsepower J
BIL - Basic Impulse Level
BTU - British Thermal Unit
EE)U[PMEN1' MANUFACTURER OR VENDOR - A manufacturing company engaged in
the production OT equipmerit, r materials purchased for use in this
project.
GPM or_gpm - Gallons per Minute
HP - Horsepower
UA - Kilovolt Amperes
KW - Kilowatt
MGD - Million Gallons per Day
NPSH - Net Positive Suction Head
PIV - Peak Inverse Voltage
PF - Power Factor
RPM - Revolutions per Minute a
TOWR - Texas Department of Water Resources
THD - Texas Department of Highways and Public Transportation
1.25 STANDARDS
Reference to technical society, organization or body is made in
j Specifications in accordance with the following abbreviations,
AASHO American Association of State Highway Officials
AIA American Institute of Architects
ACI American Concrete Institute
AGA American Gas Association
AGMA American Gear Manufacturer's Association 1
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association
ANSI American National Standard Institute
ASA American Standards Association
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air {
Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
01001-fl it
li
I
J
?i
2
ASTM American Society for Testing Materials
AWSC American Welding Society Code
AWWA American Water Works Association
CSI Construction Specification Institute
FIA Factory Insurance Association
FM Factory Manual
FS Federal Specification
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electro!iic Engineers
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NEPA National Fire Protection Association
NBS National Bureau of Standards
NEC National Electric Code
OSHA Federal Occupational Safety & Health Act, 1970
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association, incorporated
SPR Simplified Practice Recommendation
UBC Uniform Building Code
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
1.25 HANDLING MATERIALS,NOT APPROVED
The Contractor shall remove from the site any materials found to be
damaged, and any materials not meeting the specifications. These
materials shall be removed promptly, unless the Engineer will accept
the materials after repairing. Materials found to be damaged, or not
acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed. Inspection before
installation shall not relieve the Contractor from any responsibility
to furnish good quality materials.
1.27 WATER FOR CONSTkUCT10N
The Contractor may purchase water as required for construction
purposes at the Owner's published rate of charge through existing
fire hydrants. If the Contractor desires to take water at fire
hydrants, then he shall install at his expense, a slow closing valve
on the outlet and a suitable meter, When the Contractor is using
water from the hydrant, he shall open the hydrant valve in the
morning and use the valve which he has installed for control at all
other times. At night, upon cessation of constr_ tion operations,
the hydrant valve shall be closed. At all other times when the
Contractor's valve remains on the outlet, the Contractor shall keep
necessary wrenches available at the hydrant so that the valve can be
quickly removed by the City in case of fire, The Owner will not be
required to furnish water unless the Contractor adheres to the above
described requirements.
1.28 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The "Bid Price" for each and every item, as set forth in the
Proposal, shall include the furnishing of all labor, tools, mater-
01001-9
i
i
ials, machinery, appliances, and plant equipment appurtonant to and
necessary for the con °truction and completion in a first class, work-
man-like manner of all work as herein specified in strict accordance r
with these specifications and accompanying plans. The "Bid Price" ,
shall also include any and all kinds, amount or class of excavation,
backfilling, pumping or drainage, sheeting, shoring and bracing, ;
disposal of any and all surplus materials, cleaning tip, overhead
expense, bond, public liability and compensation and property damage
insurance, patent fees, royalties, risk due to the elements, and
profits unless otherwise specified.
The bid price shall also include all other incidentals not
specifically mentioned above that may be required to fully construct
each and every item complete in place In accordance with the true
intent and meaning of the specifications and accompanying plans,
A. CONSTRUCTION OF THE 36" FINISHED WATER LINE
The lump sum bid for this item shall be full compensation for
construction of the 36" finished water line, as shown on the
Plans and specified herein.
B. REPLACEMENT OF FILTER MEDIA AND INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF FILTER
BOTTOMS
The lump sum bid for this item shall be full compensation for
the replacement of the existing filter media with dual filter
media, inspection of filter bottoms, grout replacement where
necessary, cleaning of the underdrain system, and modification ,
of the surface wash system in filters 1 through 8, as shown on
the Plans and specified herein,
C. REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING WEIR PLATES
The lump sum bid for this item shall be full compensation for
the replacement of the existing weir plates with serpentine weir
pans in settling basins 1 through 8, including concretl3 removal,
as shown on the Plans and specified herein.
D. CONSTRUCTION OF THE POTASSIUM PERMANGANATE FEED SYSTEM
The lump sum bid for this item shall be full compensation for
the construction of the potassium permanganate feed system at
the Raw Water Pump Station, including all appurtenant piping,
electrical work, concrete work, relocation and reconstruction of
the fence, additional fencing, and the construction of the
fiberglass building, as shown on the Plans and specified herein,
E. CONSTRUCTION OF THE AIR HANDLING SYSTEM
The lump sum bid for this item shall be full compensation for
the construction of the air handling system, including all
01001-10
i
I
I
i
i
appurtenant piping and ductwork, electrical work and concrete
work, as shown on the Plans and specified herein.
F. SUPPLYING AND INSTALLING LF.OPOLD FILTER UNDERDRAIN BLOCKS
I
The unit price bid for this item shall be full compensation for
supplying and installing one (1) Leopold filter underdrain
block, breaking out and removing the existing filter block, and
grouting the new block in place, as shown on the Plans and
specified herein. No payment will be made for this item unless
work is actually performed,
G. SUPPLYING AND INSTALLING WHEELER FILTER UNDERDRAIN BLOCKS
The unit price bid for this item shall be full compensation for j
supplying and installing one (1) Wheeler filter underdrain block
and shall include breaking out and removing the existing filter
block, and grouting the new block in place, as shown on the
Plans and specified herein. No payment will be made for this
item unless work is actually performed,
END OF SECTION
I
I
a
I
E
01001-11
I
02201 EARTHWORK
1.00 GENERAL 1
1.01 SCOPE
i The Contractor shall perform all excavation and embankment as may be
necessary for the construction, to line and grade shown on the Plans,
of all structures, roadways, utilities, and incidentals thereto. In
making excavations, the Contractor shall do all necessary shoring,
bracing, sheeting, pumping and bailing. Where necessary to determine
the location of existing pipes, valves, or other underground
structures, the Contractor, after a careful examination of available
records, shall make all explorations and excavations for such
purpose. Temporary support, adequate protection, and maintenance of
all underground and surface pipes, structures and other obstructions
encountered in the progress of the work shall be furnished by the
Contractor at his own expense.
1.02 EXCAVATION
A. STORAGE
j All excavation shall be unclassified and shall include all
M E materials encountered regardless of their nature or manner in
which they are removed.
Excavated material to be used for backfill may be deposited by
the Contractor in storage piles at points convenient for
j rehandling the material during the backfilling operations. The
location of storage piles shall be subject to the approval of
the Engineer.
B. EXCESS EARTH
Excess earth from the various excavations, which is not required
for backfill on the plant site, shall be disposed of by the
Contractor at locations to be arranged for by the Contractor.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. CONCRETE FOR BACKFILL, BLOCKING, CRADLING AND ENCASEMENT
All concrete used for these purposes shall be 1500 psi as
specified in Section 03300, CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE.
02201-1
1.11
I
S
1.
Lt
A
f
<'1
it
i
l
13. SELECI MATERIAL
i
A non-expansive soil with sufficient permeability
characteristics to allow rapid elimination )f seepage water
shall be used to backfill against the walls of the structures
except as otherwise noted.
C. IMPERVIOUS CLAY
Impervious clay material shall have a liquid limit greater than
30% and plasticity index greater than 15.
0. TOPSOIL
Organic weathered topsoil shall be cleaned of major root
systems, weeds, brush and debris.
E. GRANULAR BACKFILL MATERIAL
1 1. WATER AND SANITARY SEWER LINES
Granular backfill as required for backfilling under and
adjacent to structures and for pipe embedment shall be
defined as free flowing sandy material which contains no
clay and is reasonably free of organic material. The
material shall have a plasticity index of 9.0 or less and
shall meet the following requirements,
Sieve Size Percent Passing
r. ~
2 inch 100
I I inch 90 - 100
j No. 40 60 - 100
No. 100 0 - 5
Granular embedment shall not form mud or muck when wet.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATIONS
_J
A. STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION
Excavation shall axtend a sufficient distance from walls and
footings to ailow for forms, installation of services and for
inspection, except' where concrete for walls and footings is
authorized to be deposited directly against excavated surfaces.
Where the excavation is made below the elevations indicated on
the Plans or required herein through the fault of the
Contractor, the excavation shall be restored to the proper
elevation with lean (1500 psi) concrete at the expense of the
Contractor.
02201-2
i
in order that the Engineer may judge the adequacy of the
proposed foundation, the Contractor, if required, shall make
soundings to determine the character of the subgrade material.
The maximum depth of such sod{o~rigytgraderequired to
exceed five feet below the proposed
The final elevation to which a foundation is to be constructed
shall be as shown on the Plans or as raised or lowered by
written order from the Engineer when suchdalterations arrementse
proper to satisfactorily comply
the structure. Should it be found necessary to change the depth
of footings from that shown on the Plans, the necessary
intarmanneriastdirectedlby thehEngineer,rwhohshallehaveotheished
right to substitute revised details if required.
When a structure is to rest on an excavated surface other than
rock, special care shall be taken not to disturb the bottom of
the excavation, and removal of the last. material required to
reach foundation final grade shall not be performed until just
before structure to be placed.
j All rock or other hard foundation material shall be free from
all louse material, edorsecleanedo rrated, cutto wAllher
level, hall
{ seams shall be cleaned out and filled with concrete at the time
t the structure is placed.
B. TRENCH EXCAVATION
Trench excavation comprises excavation for all water lines,
` sludge lines, drain lines, sewer lines, lmnese11Al1oexcavationsn
appurtenances for the various types inches
shale be made by open cut
to a behallowedr. (Sides of
below ebottom sshall of pipes.
be ip kept as nearly vertical as possible, and if
trenches shall
perly sheeted abrac. than twenty-four
required, shall b pro
be not less than twelve (12")) Inches
(2411) inches wider than the outside diameter of the pipe to be
aid therein and shall be excavated ottrue
lestotlinesio (6a) a chesr
space each side of tinche,e and smaller, nine (9") inches for
for pipe fifteen (15) inc'ies up to and including thirty (30")
ipipe nchesover and fiftwelteen ve 12 41J,~) ) inches for pipe over thirty (30 ) inches
~ in di:.,reter. Bell holes shall be excavated to insure pipe
resting for its entire length on the granular material at the
bottom of the trench. Excavation for manholes and other
accessories shall be sufficient to leave at least twelve (12")
inches in the clear between the outer surfaces and the
excavation. Except at locations
shalhere rock excavation fors the
, taken not to excavate
bottoms of the trenches ca
I below the required depths. Where rock excavation is required,
1
02201-3
I
the rock shall be excavated a minimum clearance depth of four
(4") inches, (six (611) inches for water lines) and backfilled to
the required elevation with granular material thoroughly tamped
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
If unstable foundation is encountered, it shall be removed and
replaced with crushed rock to an elevation of four (411) inches
below bottom of pipe, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.02 BACKFILL
A. LEAN CONCRETE BACKFILL
Lean concrete backfill is to be used at the locations shown on
the Plans. Lean concrete shall be 1500 psi concrete as
specified in Section 03300, CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE.
0. CONCRETE BLOCKING, CRADLE AND ENCASEMENT
Concrete blocking, cradle and encasement shall be 1500 psi
concrete as specified in Section 03300, CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE.
Blocking shall be placed so as to rest against firm undisturbed
trench walls. The supporting area for each block shall be at
least as great as that indicated on the Plans and shall be
sufficient to withstand the thrust, including water hammer,
which may develop. Each block shall rest on a firm undisturbed
foundation of trench sides and bottom. Where pipes are placed
below structures they shall be completely encased in 1500 psi
concrete, which shall extend up to bottom of structure as shown
on the Plans.
C. EMBEDMENT INSTALLATION
All lines, except water lines, shall have a minimum of 4"
granular embedment below the pipe. Water lines shall have a
minimum of sic (611) inches below the bottom of pipe. Granular
embedment shall be as specified in paragraph 2.01-E, GRANULAR
BACKFILL MATERIAL, of this specification. The initial layer of
J embedment placed to receive the pipe shall be brought up to a
grade slightly higher than that required for the bottom of the
pipe and the pipe shall be placed thereon and brought to grade
by tamping, or by removal of the slight excess amount of
embedment under the pipe. Adjustment to grade line shall be
made by scraping away or filling with embedment material.
Wedging or blocking up of pipe will not be permitted. Each pipe
section shall have a uniform bearing on the ernbedmeut for the i
length of the pipe, except immediately at the ,joint.
Granular embedment shall be used for backfill in the pipe zone
and for a minimum depth of twelve (1211) inches over the pipe.
Embedment shall be jetted or tamped to 95% Standard Proctor
Density.
02201-4
U. BACKFILLING TRENCHES
1. Under Pavement and within Right-of-Way; All lines located
under paved surfaces or within dedicated street
right-of-way, shall be backfilled completely with granular
embedment material to the top of the trench and compacted
to 95% Standard Proctor Density.
2. Outside Paved Areas or Street Right-of-Way; After
sufficient time has elapsed for the free moisture to be
gone from the embedment material, the remaining backfill
may be either tamped in layers not to exceed six (6")
inches in depth, or if excavatEd trench material is
suitable for ,jetting, shall be placed in layers not
exceeding three (31) feet in depth and thoroughly settled
by jetting with water in a manner approved by the Engineer.
After the backfill has reasonably dried out and settled, it
shall be brought to grade and jetted a second time.
r Compaction of the backfill shall be to 90% Standard Proctor
Density, and density tests may be made as deemed necessary
by the Engineer. If such tests determine that the backfill
does not meet this required density, the Contractor will be
required to remove all the backfill to the point one (11)
foot above the pipe or as required by the Engineer and
rebackfilled with suitable material until the density
required is obtained,
~ I
E. BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES
After completion of foundation footings and walls and other
construction below the elevations of the final grades, all forms
shall be removed and the excavation cleaned of any trash, debris
or other objectionable matter prior to backfilling.
Contractor shall secure the approval of the Engineer prior to
placing backfill around any of the structures. Contractor shall
be responsible for settlement, and shall restore surfaces should
any settlement occur.
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the plans, select
material meeting the requirements of paragraph 2.01-B, SELECT
MATERIAL, of this specification shall be used to backfill
structures. The material shall be placed in layers
approximately nine (9") inches in depth, properly moistened to
approximately optimum requirements, and each layer compacted by
machine tampers or other suitable equipment to a density of 95%
Standard Proctor Density, Where pipes, walks, or other
construction is to be placed on or in the backfilled material,
the backfilling shall be done in a thorough manner to preclude
after-settlement.
02201-5
i
The select material backfill shall be brought up to eighteen
(1811) inches below finished grade.
A 1.0-foot layer of impervious clay {from six (611) inches to
eighteen (1811) inches below finished grade) shall be compacted
in place for the full width of the original excavation from the ;
side of the structure. I
F. TOPSOIL
All areas which have been excavated but do not receive paved
surfaces shall receive six (611) inches of topsoil unless
otherwise shown on the Plans. The six (611) inches of topsoil
shall be dumped in separate piles and uniformly distributed by
blade, grader or other suitable equipment. Topsoil shall not be
placed when the ground is frozen or excessively wet. Each layer
or layers shall be compacted to a density approximately that of
undisturbed topsoil adjacent to the site.
3.03 FINISHING AND CLEAN-UP
All areas which do not receive any type of paved surface, shall be
graded as shown on the Plans and raked smooth and even so that they
will drain generally away from the structures toward the roads and
streets or the natural drainage course. All clods of earth shall be
broken up and no rocks, trash or debris shall remain on or near the
surface of the finished grade.
END OF SECTION "
1
F ~ +
1
1
i
I
02201-6
I
i
1
f
1
02445 REMOVE AND RELOCATE FENCE J
1.00 GENERAL
This item shall include the removal, relocation, and reconstruction
of the existing fence at the locations shown on the Plans. The
Contractor shall exercise caution in removing and salvaging the
materials so they may be used in reconstructing the fence. The
reconstructed fence shall be equal in every way, or superior, to the
fence removed.
The Contractor shall furnish and install additional chain litik
fencing as required by the Plans. The fence shall be similar and
equal to that of the Cyclone Fence Division of U.S. Steel Company.
The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of full and complete shop
drawings in accordance with Section 5 of the SUPPLEMENTARY CONDI-
TIONS , SHOP DRAWINGS. Shop drawings shall include a complete descrip-
tion of all materials offered including details, illustrating fence J
height, sizes of posts, rails, braces, gates, etc. 1
2.00 PRODUCTS j
Additional chain link fabric required to complete the fence shall be I
identical to the height of the existing fence, 9 gauge, aluminum-
coated steel chain link wire, woven in a 2" mesh, Top and bottom
salvages shall be knuckled.
j The top rail shall be 1-5/8" 0.0, galvanized pipe, weight 2,27 pounds
per foot, with outside sleeve type couplings at least 7" long.
Fabric shall be tied to the top rail at 24" centers with 9 gauge
aluminum wire, Line posts shall be galvanized 2" H-column, weight
2.72 pounds per foot, or 2-3/8" O.D., weight 3,65 pounds per foot,
Schedule 40 galvanize pipe, spaced not to exceed 10 feet. Fabric
shall be tied to line posts with 6 gauge galvanized clips on 14"
centers. Terminal posts at ends and corners pull posts shall be
2-718" 0.0, galvanized pipe, weight 5.79 pounds per foot, these
posts shall be equipped with 1/4" x 3/4" tension bars, 11 gauge x 1"
wide tension bands, and 3/8" carriage bolts, bands on approximately
14" centers. Gate posts for the 4'-0" gates shall be 2-3/8" Schedule
40 galvanized pipe. Bottom tension wire shall be No. 7 galvanized or
aluminum coated spring coil or tension wire which shall hold fabric
in proper alignment and be resilient so as to restore alignment when
fabric is deflected.
Gates shall have poses as specified above, with a frame of 2" O.D.
galvanized pipe. Corner fittings shall be heavy malleable cast
fittings. Hinges shall allow gates to swing 90' outward. The gates
shall be complete with a padlocking device, catches and stops.
02445-1
I
I
i
Barbed wiry shall be double strand twisted 12-112 gauge aluminum
coated steal wire with 14 gauge, 4-point round aluminum barbs spaced
at approximately 5-inch centers conforming to thn requirements of
ASTM-A-585-71, Extension arms to accommodate the barbed wir•i shall
extend outward from the enclosed area at a 45 degree angle. Exten-
sion arms to accommodate barbed wire shall withstand a 250-pound
pulldown load from end of arm and have a 3-inch apron around post.
I
3.00 EXECUTION
The fence shall be relocated and installed by skilled and experienced
fence erectors and on lines and grades established by the Engineer.
All line posts shall be set in concrete u minimum of 9" in diameter
and 36" deep. Gate posts shall be set in concrete a minimum of 12"
in diameter and 3671 deep. The complete fence shall be as such to
discourage tampering with all connections and ends secured as to
prevent easy removal, or disconnecting.
I
END OF SECTION
I
E
A
II
I
I
1
~I I I
I
I
I
I
I
J
1
I
I
02445-2
i
s'
02614 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CYLINDER PIPE
1.00 GENERAL. f ~
1.01 SCOPE
Furnish and install all concrete cylinder pipe and fittings, and
specials, including connections and appurtenances completely as shown
on the Plans and specified herein and make hydrostatic test,
1.02 SUBMITTALS
Submit the required shop drawings to the Engineer for approval before
fabrication or shipment to the job site,
All of the drawings and data shall be complete and shall include a
complete description of the pipe offered, including cuts, tabulated
layout and all pertinent engineering data required for a complete
evaluation of the submittal.
Prior to delivery of the pipe to the project site, the manufacturer
shall furnish an affidavit certifying that all pipe, fittings, and
specials, and other products and materials furnished, comply with the
applicable provisions of this Specification.
2.00 PIPE
2.01 GENERAL
Concrete cylinder pipe, fittings and specials shall be
designed, fabricated and tested in accordance with the latest
requirements of AWWA C•-301, "Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe,
Steel Cylinder Type, for Water and Other Liquids" with
additional requirements or modifications as described herein.
2,02 PIPE DESIGN CLASSES
f
Pressure class for the parallel line from the filters to the
clearwells shall be Class 100, Sizes shall be as shown on the
J drawings. Fittings, specials and connections shall be same class as
the associated pipe unless otherwise indicated. All pipe and
fittings shall be clearly marked with the pressure class and piece
number to permit easy identification in the field,
Pipe design shall be based on trench conditions shown on the
Drawings. The select backfill in the pipe zone will be selected or
processed material from trench excavation which is loose workable
material free of lumps or rocks larger than 2 inches in their
greatest dimension. Material will be consolidated or compacted to at
02614-1
f
i
I
least ninety percent (90%) of maximum density, Standard Proctor, as
determined by ASTM 0698, "Test for Moisture-Density Relations for
Soils."
Pipe shall be designed for the trench depths indicated using a Soil
Reaction Modulus E of 700, and a maximum pipe deflection of
D§2t/4,000.
2.03 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE CYLINDER PIPE
A. CEMENT 1
Cement for use on inside and outside mortar coating shall be
Type II Portland event, with not more than five (5%) percent
tricalcium acuminate (C3A),
B. FLANGES
r Flanges shall have ANSI Drilling of class equal to or greater
than the pipe class, unless otherwise specified, and shall match
class of valves or appurtenances which are attached.
C. INSULATED CONNECTIONS
The pipe vendor shall furnish dilectric insulation gaskets
and/or bushings at locations indicated on the Plans. Where
flanges are to he insulated, furnish and install "Insulket"
flange gaskets, insulating sleeves and two plastic washers for
each bolt,
i 2.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. GENERAL
The Owner reserves the option to have an independent testing
laboratory, at the Owner's expense, inspect pipe and fittings at
the pipe manufacturer's plant to ensure compliance with the
applicable specifications, The Owner's testing laboratory and
Engineer shall have free access to those parts of the
manufacturer's plant that are necessary to ensure compliance
with the gove,ning standard. The pipe manufacturer shall notify
the Owner, in writing, at least two weeks ahead of pipe
fabrication as to start of fabrication and fabricating schedule
so that the Owner can advise the manufacturer as to Owner's
decision regarding tests to be performed by an independent
testing laboratory. In event the Owner elects to retain an
lndependent testing laboratory to make material tests and weld
tests, it is the intent that the test; be limited to one spot
testing of each category unless the tests do not show compliance
with the Standard, If these tests do not show compliance, the
Owner reserves the right to have the laboratory make additional
tests and observations to ensure compliance of the finished
product with the Standard.
02614-2
In any event, the manufacturer shall perform the tests described
In AWWA C303, and furnish the Owner with a copy of the test
reports, if requested, at the expense of the pipe manufacturer.
The pipe manufacturer shall furnish the Owner with affidavit of
compliance as outlined in the Standard. !
8. SPECIAL FITTINGS
All welds for water tightness in special pipe and fittings that
have not been hydrostatically tested may be examined by use of
visible dye penetrant system meeting requirements of ASTM E165;
however, collar reinforcement and all other lapwelds shall be
tested by introducing air under 10 psi pressure between the
collar and cylinder and checking fur leaks around and through
the welds with soap solution.
The area to receive the dye penetrant shall be cleaned free from
contaminants that might interfere with with the penetrant
process. The temperature of the steel in the weld area shall be
between 60 and 125 degrees F. when the penetrant is applied.
Dwell time of six hours shall be allowed after application of
the penetrant and developer before interpreting the results.
Defects that are found shall be repaired and the test repeated
until all defects are eliminated. Colored penetrant shall be
removed before fittings are lined.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
E A. PIPE HANDLING
Pipe, fittings, valves and other accessories shall be hauled to
and distributed at the site of the project by the Contractor;
they shall at all times be handled with care to avoid damage.
Before lowering into the trench, each joint of pipe shall be
Inspected, and any damaged pipe shall be rejected.
The pipe shall be kept clean during the laying operation and
free of all sticks, dirt, and trash, and at the close of each
operating day, the open end of the pipe shall be effectively
sealed against the entrance of all objects and especially water.
No pipe shall be laid in water.
B. PIPE JOINTING
1. General: Before laying each joint of pipe, the bell and
spigot rings shall be thoroughly cleaned by brushing and
wiping. If any damage to the protective coating on the
metal has occurred, it will be required of the Contractor
to repair such damage before the pipe is laid.
02614-3
h '
Sections of pipe .hall be tightly fitted together and care
shall be exercised to secure true alignment and grade,
rlhen a joint of pipe is being laid, the gasket shall be
placed on the spigot ring and the spigot end of the pipe
shall then be entered into the bell of the adjoining pipe r
and forced into position. The gasket and the inside
surface of the bell shall be lubricated with an approved
lubricant (flax soap) which will facilitate the telescoping
of the joint. The inside joint recess between ends of the
pipe sections shall have a maximum opening of seven eights
(7/£311) inch and minimum of one quarter (1/411) inch. No
"blocking up" of pipe or joints will be permitted, and if
the pipe is not uniformly supported or the joint not made
up properly, the joint shall be removed and the trench
shall be properly prepared.
For interior welded joints backfllling shall be completed
before welding. For exterior field welded joints, adequate
working room shall be provided under and beside the pipe.
2. Exterior Joint; The exterior joint shall be made by placing
a joint wrapper around the pipe which will be held in place
by means of two metal straps. The wrapper shall be nine
(911) inches wide for pipe 36" and larger, and seven (711)
Inches wide for smaller pipe, and hemmed on each side. The
wrapper shall be fiberglass reinforced or burlap cloth, of
such length that it will encircle the pipe, leaving enough
opening between ends to allow the mortar to be poured
inside the wrapper to the joint, The wrappers shall be
j similar and equal to those manufactured by Mar-Mac
Manufacturing Company,
The grout used for pouring the joint shall consist of one
part portland cement to two parts clean, fine, sharp sand,
as specified for interior joints, and mixed to the
consistency of thick cream. The joint shall be filled with
j this grout from one side In one continuous operation until
the grout has flowed entirely around the pipe. During the
filling of the joint, the sides of the wrapper shall be
patted or manipulated as required to settle the mortar and
expel any entrappei air,
3. Interior Joints: Upon completion of backfilling of the pipe
trench, the inside joint recess shall be filled with a
stiff cement mortar consisting of one part of cehr^nt to two
parts of sand by a qualified workman working inside the
pipe, Cement shall be ASTM C150, Type 11 or Type III with
the modification that the cement shall contain not more
than five (5%) percent tricalcium aluminate (OA). Sand
shall conform to ASTM Specification C144 (plaster sand).
02614-4
i
Prior to placing of mortar, any dirt, or trash which has
collected in the joint shall he cleaned out and the
concrete surfaces of the joint space shall be moistened by
spraying or brushing with a wet brush. The stiff mortar
shall be rammed or packed into the joint space and extreme
care shall be taken to insure that no voids remain in the
joint space.
After the joint has been filled, the surfaces of the joint
shall be leveled with the interior surfaces of the pipe
with a steel trowel so that the surface is smooth,
Interior joints of pipe smaller than 21 inches shall have
the bottom of the bell buttered with mortar, prior to
inserting the spigot, such that when the spigot is pushed
into position it will extrude surplus mortar from the
joint. The surplus mortar shall be struck off flush with
the inside of the pipe by pulling a filled burlap bag or an
inflated ball through the pipe with a rope.
4. Welded Joints: Joints to be welded shall be telescoped
together i-o th rubber gasket as specified above and aligned
perfectl with the adjacent section of pipe.
Welding shall be accomplished by laying a filler rod
between the steel bell of one section and the steel spigot
of the other, and welding the bell to the outside of the
spigot, No less than three (3) complete passes shall be
used to make the weld which shall be watertight.
When the joint weld is completed the exterior joint shall
JJ be poured with mortar as specified above, Sufficient time
shall elapse to allow the mortar to set-up before skidding
assembled sections into the casing. High early strength
ce.vent may be used for this purpose if desired.
After all sections are in final position, the interior
joint shall be filled as specified above.
C. PROTECTION OF EXPOSED METAL
All exposed ferrous meta' shall be protected by a minimum of one
(1") inch coating of Portland Cement mortar consisting of one
part cement, as specified for inside joints, and two parts sand.
Exposed surfaces such as, but not limited to, flanges, bolts,
caulked joints, threaded outlets, closures, etc., shall have
coating reinforced with galvanized wire mesh,
The surface receiving a cement mortar coating shall be
thoroughly cleaned and wetted with water just prior to placing
the cement mortar coating, After placing, care shall be taken
to prevent cement mortar from drying out too rapidly by covering
02614-5
i
i
I
with damp earth or burlap, Cement mortar coating shall not be
applied during freezing woather,
D. PATCHING
Excessive patching of lining or coating will not be permitted,
Patching of lining or coating will be allowed where area to be
repaired does not exceed 100 square inches and has no dimensions
greater Chan 12 inches, In general, there shall not be more '
than one patch or either the lining or the coating of any one
joint of pipe.
Wherever necessary to patch the pipe, patch shall be made with a
mortar of one part Portland Cement and two parts clean sharp
sand; all measurements to be by weight, Pipe thus patched shall
not be installed until the patch has been properly and
adequately cured and approved for laying by the Engineer.
i
E. f:PE BEDDING
Trench bottom shall be excavated below the pipe for installing
pipe bedding as specified under Section 02201, EARTHWORK, Pipe
shall be laid on the bedding such that it is supported uniformly
from end to end,
F. BACKFILLING
As soon as the pipe joint has been complete, the joint mortar
has set.-up and all concrete blocking completed, the bacicfilling
in the "pipe zone" to a point at least 12 inches above the pipe
shall be done as specified under Section 02201, EARTHWORK, ~
G. BLOCKING
The Contractor shall repair and replace concrete blocking in
accordance with Section 02201, EARTHWORK. The Concrete blocking
shall be placed so as to rest against firm, undisturbed trench
walls, normar to the thrust. The supporting area for each block
shall be sufficient to withstand the thrust which may develop at
the pipe design pressure. Each block shall rest on a firm,
undisturbed foundation or trench bottom.
3,02 HYDROSTATIC TEST
A. GENERAL
After the pipe has been laid and backfilled, each valved section
of newly laid pipe shall be subjected to a hydrostastic pressure
test. For any section being tested, the pressure applied shall
be such that at the lowest point in the section, the test
pressure shall be equal to the pipe design class, Test pressure
shall be as the rated pressure at the pipe,
02614-6
i
I
i
A temporary bulkhead shall be constructed for the test at the
end of the proposed pipe section at the Filter pipe gallery.
Each valved section of pipe shall be slowly filled with water
and the specified test pressure shall be supplied by means of a ,
pump connected to the pipe in a satisfactory manner. The pump,
pipe connection, and all necessary apparatus including gauges
and meters shall be furnished by the Contractor.
Water for filling line may be obtained from the existing system
to which the pipel ine coiinects.
8. PROCEDURE
Care shall he used to see that all air vents are open during the
filling. After the line, or section thereof, has been
completely filled, it shall be allowed to stand under a slight
pressure at least 24 hours to allow the pipe to absorb what
water it will and to allow the escape of air from any air
pockets, During this period, the plugs, valves, manholes and
connections shall be examined for leaks. If any are found,
these shall be stopped, or in the case of valves in the main
line or plugs, provision shall be made for measuring the leakage
during the test. The water necessary to maintain the test
pressure shall be measured through a meter or by other means
satisfactory to the Owner, Contractor shall furnish all
necessary equipment and make tests at his expense.
Before applying the specified test pressure, all air shall be
expelled from the pipe, In the event it is necessary to expel
air from high points other than where taps are provided, the
Contractor may tap the line for this purpose and afterward
tightly plug the tap with a brass plug. No extra compensation
will be made for these taps. Duration of test shall be four (4)
hours.
C. EXAMINATION UNDER PRESSURE
During the last two hours of the test, the entire route of the
k pipeline under test shall be inspected to locate any leaks or
breaks. Any defective .joints, cracked or defective pipe,
fittings, or valves discovered in consequence of this pressure
test shall be removed and replaced with sound material in the
manner provided and the test shall be ropeated until
satisfactory results are obtained.
0. PERMISSIBLE LEAKAGE
No pipe installation will be accepted until the leakage is less
than 26 gallons per mile, per 24 hours, per inch of nominal
diameter of pipe, based on 32' joint lengths and 100 psi test
pressure,
02614-7
i
r
1
E, LEAKAGE DEFINED
Leakage is defined as the net quantity of water to be supplied
into the newly laid pipe, or any valved section of it, necessary 1.
to maintain the specified leakage test pressure after the pipe r
has been filled with water and the air expelled. 1 i
1
F. VARIATION F110M PERMISSIBLE LEAK',GE
Should any test of pipe laid disclose leakage greater than that
specified, the, Contractor shall at his own expense, locate and 1
repair the defective joints, until the leakage is within the
specified allowance,
3,03 DISINFECTION
Prior to being placed in service, the 36" finished water line shall
be disinfected in accordance with Ser;tion 15019, DISINFECTION.
END OF SECTION
l
a
J~
i
1
1
i
L/
I
III
02614-8
_T
03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK
1.00 GENERAL
1,01 SCOPE: i
The work covered by this item consists of furnishing all material and
labor required for forming, tieing, bracing and supporting the wet
concrete, the reinforcing steel and all embedded items until the
concrete has developed sufficient strength to permit form removal.
1.02 GOVERNING STANDARDS
All forming materials, accessories and their use shall conform to the
requirements ofr
ACI-347 Concrete Formwork
American Concrete Institute,
P, 0. Box 19150, Redford Station
Detract, Michigan 48219
RISC Manual of Steel Construction
American Institute of Steel Construction
400 North Michigan Avenue
Chicago, Illinois 60611
AISI Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual
American Iron and Steel Institute
New York, New York
i
2.00 PRONCTS
j 2,01 MATERIALS
A, LIMBER
All lumber for forms anu falsework shall be properly seasoned
and of good quality, It shall be free from loose or unsound
knots, knot holes, twists, shakes, decay, splits, and other
imperfections which would affects its strength or impair the '
finished surface of the concrete. The lumber used for facing or '
sheathing shall be surfaced on at least one side and two edges,
and shall be sized to uniform thickness. Lumber of nominal
one-inch thickness or plywood of 3/4-inch thickness will be
permitted for general use on structure if backed by a sufficient
number of studs and wales.
B. FORM LINING
Timber forms for exposed concrete surfaces which are to be given
a rubbed finish, shall be facelined with an approved type of
03100.1
,
1
form lining material. If plywood is used for form lining, it
shall be made v,1th water-proof adhesive, shall have a minimum
thickness of r -fourth inch, and preferably shall be oiled at 10
the mill and t.ren re-oiled or lacquered on the Job before using. %
If fiber board is used it shall be tempered Masonite Concrete j
Form Presdwood, having a minimum thickness of thrr_e-sixteenths
inch and shall be thoroughly wet with water at least 12 hours
before using. The water shall be applied to the screen side of
the board and the boards shall be stacked screen side to screen 1
side. The smooth hard face shall be used as the contact surface
of the form,
If desired by the Contractor, such surfaces may be formed with
three-fourths inch thick plywood made with water-proof adhesive
backed with adequate studs and wales, keening in mind that the
greatest strength of the outer plies should be at right angles
to the studding, and in this case, form lining will not be 1
required.
Edges and faces of adjacent panels shall be carefully aligned
and the joints between panels shall be filled with patching
plaster or cold water, putty to prevent leakage, and sanded
11clitly with No, 0 sandpaper, to make the joints smooth. Forms
which are being reused shall have all unused form tie holes
filled and smoothed as described above so as to be perfectly
smooth.
C. SPECIAL FORM LUMBER
1. Molding specified for chamfer strips or other uses shall be
made of redwood, cypress, or pir,? materials of sulh grade
that will not split when nailed and which can be maintained
to a true line without warping. The molding shall be mill
cut and dressed on all faces. Where shown on the plans,
forms shall be filleted at sharp corners, both inside and
h outside, and at edges, with triangular chamfer strips. The
strips ;hall be of sizes indicated, All chamfer strips
shall be thoroughly oiled before installation on forms.
2. Forms for railings and ornamental work shall be constructed
;I to standards equivalent to first class mill work. All
moldings, panel work, and bevel strips shall be straight
and true with neatly mitered joints and of such design that
the finished work shall be true, sharp, and clean-cut.
0, METAL FORMS
The foregoing specifications for "Forms" as regards design,
mortar tightness, filleted corners, beveled projections,
bracing, alignment, removal, reuse, oiling, and wetting shall
apply equally to metal forms. The metal used for forms shall be
of such thickness that the forms will remain true to shape, All
03100-2
k
i
,
r
bolt and rivet heads on the facing sides shall be countersunk.
Clamps, pins, or other connecting devices shall be designed to e
hold the forms rigidly tcgether and to allow removal without
injury to the concrete, Metal forms which do not present a
smooth surface or line up properly shall not be used. Special
care shall be exercised to keep metal free from rust, grease, or
other foreign material such as will tend to discolor the
1
concrete, j
E. PAN/SLIP FORMS 1
Pan/Slip Forms, when required, shall meet all of the applicable I
portions of this specification.
I. FORM TIES
Metal form ties of a type approved by the Engineer shall be used
to hold forms in place. Such ties shall have provision to
permit ease of removal of the metal as hereinafter specified,
The use of wire form ties will not be permitted except by
approval of the"Engi"neer. All metaT_-appliances used inside of
the forms to hold them in correct alignment shall be removed to 4
a depth of at least one-half inch from the surface of the
concrete and shall be so constructed that metal may be removed
without undue Injury to the surface from chipping or spalling.
Such devices, when removed, shall leave a smooth opening in the
concrete surface not larger than seven-eighths inch in diameter.
Burning off of rods, bolts, or ties will not be permitted.
Metal ties shall be held in place by devices attached to wales.
Each device shall be capably of developing the strength of the
tie. Metal and wooden spreaders which are separate from the j
forms shall be wired to top of form and shall be entirely
removed as the concrete Is being placed, Where wire ties are
permitted, all wires shall be cut back at least one-half inch
I from the face of the concrete, with a sharp chisel or nippers.
The use of metal form ties of a type that are encased in paper
or other material to allow the removal of complete tie, leaving
a hole through the concrete structure, will not, be permitted in
the construction of basement or water bearing walls.
i G. FORM OIL
The oil used for this purpose shall be a light clear oil which
rJ will not discolor or otherwise injuriously affect the concrete
surface or delay or impair curing operations,
2.02 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS
A. DESIGN LOADS
Forms shall be designed for the pressure exerted by a liquid
weighing 150 pounds per cubic foot, The rate of placing the
03100-3
concrete, temperature of the concrete, and whether the concrete
is vibrated or not, shall be taken into consideration in
determining the depth of the equivalent liquid. An additional
live load of 50 pounds per square foot shall be allowed on
horizontal surfaces. The maximum unit stresses shall not exceed
125 percent of the allowah.e stresses used for the design of
structures,
B. ALIGNMENT CONTROL
True alignment of walls and other vertical surfaces having
straight lines or rectangular shapes shall be -ontrolled by the
following procedure-. Forming shall be arranged .,ith provisions
for adjusting the horizontal a1igninent of a for after the form
has been filled with concrete to grade, using wenges,
turnbuckles, or other approved adjustment n,thodr, The general
procedure will be to establish a transit line or other approved
reference such that adjustments can be made to an established
line while the concrete in the top of the form is still plastic.
Adjusting facilities shall be at intervals which will permit
adjustments to a stralgght line. The Contractor shall be
responsible for this alignment check, and shall furnish his own
personnel for such checking and adjustment. Tolerance for the
adjustment shall be subject to th3 Engineer's approval. No
forms will be approved for pouring until adequate adjusting
facilities are in place,
C. FALSEWORK
All falsework shall be designed and constructed so that no
excessive settlement or deformation will occur, and so that the
necessary rigidity will be provided.
All timber used in falsework centering shall be sound, in good
condition, and free from defects which will impair its strength.
Steel members shall be of adequate strength and of such shape as
to be suitable for the purpose intended. Timber piling may be
~J of any species of wood which will withstand driving
satisfactorily and which will adequately support the
superimposed load.
Where sills or timber grillages are used to support falsework
columns, such sills and grillages, unless founded on solid rock,
shale or other hard materials shall be placed in excavated pits
and backfilled to prevent the softening of the supporting
material by drip from the forms or by rains that may occur
during the construction process. Sills or grillages shall be of
ample size to support the superimposed load without settlement,
Falsework which cannot be founded on a satisfactory spread
footing shall be supported on piling which shall be driven to a
bearing capacity sufficient to support the superimposed load
without settlement.
03100-A
h
3,00 EXECUTION
3,01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS lr'
A. FORM WORK !
Forms shall be built mortar-tight and of material sufficient in
strength to prevent bulging between supports. They shall be set:
and maintained to the lines designated until the concrete is
sufficiently hardened to permit form removal, During the
elapsed time between the building of the forms and the placing
of the concrete, the forms shall be maintained In a manner to
eliminate warping and shrinking, If, at any stage of the work,
the forms show signs of bulging or sagging, that portion of the
concrete causing such condition shall be immediately removed, if
necessary, and the forms shall be reset and securely braced
against further movement. Forms or form lumber to be reused
1 shall be maintained clean and in good condition as to accuracy,
shape, strength, rigidity, tightness, and smoothness of surface.
I All forms shall be so constructed as to permit removal without
damage to the concrete. Particular and special care must be
J exercised in framing forms for copings, offsets, railing, and
all ornamental work, so that there will be no damage to, or
marring of, the concrete when the forms are removed. Whenever
practicable, forms shall be erected complete before the
reinforcement Is placed, For narrow walls and other locations
where access to the bottom of the forms Is not otherwise readily
attainable, adequate cleanout openings shall be provided,
B. EMBEDDED ITEMS
Pefore placing concrete, care shall be taken to determine that
all embedded items are firmly and securely fastened in place as
Indicated in the drawings or required by the Engineer. All
embedded items shall be thoroughly clean and free of oil and
other foreign material. Anchor bolts shall be set to exact
locations by the use of suitable anchor bolt templates, or as
otherwise shown on the plans,
`i C. PLACING REINFORCEMENT
Reinforcement In concrete structures shall be carefully and
accurately placed and rigidly supported as provided in the Item
"Concrete Reinforcement",
I), WE"ITING ANO OILING FORMS
The facinn of all forms shall be treated with a suitable form
oil before concrete is placed, In hot weather, buth sides of
the face forms may be required to be treated with oil to prevent
warping and to secure tight joints, The oil shall be applied
before the reinforcement is placed. In general, all surfaces of
I
03100-5
forms which will come in contact with the concrete shall be
wetted immediately before tho concrete is placed,
F. CLEANING FORMS f
At the time of placing concrete, the forms shall be clean and
entirely free from all chips, dirt, sawdust, and other
extraneous matter. Forms for slab, beam and girder construction
shall not have tie wire cuttings, nails, matches or any other
matter whatsoever which would mar the appearance of the finished
construction. All forms shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of
the Engineer, and kept free cif foreign matter of all kinds
during concrete placing.
F. ENGINEERS APPROVAL
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer upon completion of
various portions of the work required for placing concrete so
that inspection may be made as early as is practicable. When
all items have been found to be in order, the Engineer will
authorize the contractor to proceed with the placement,
3,02 REMOVAL OF FORMS
Forms shall be removed in such a manner that the underlying concrete
surface is not marred or damaged in any way. Forms may be removed in
not less than the number of curing days set forth in the following
table:
Forms and falsework under slabs, beams and girders
I
where deflections due to dead load moment may
exist 7 days
1
Forms for walls, columns, sides of piers, massive
structural components and other members not
resisting a bending moment during curing 1 day
Forms for concrete of minor structural load
carrying importance 1 day
END OF SECTION
03100-6
03_200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
The work covered by this item consists of furnishing all the
reinforcing materials and labor required for cutting, bending,
tieing, splicing, placing and supporting the reinforcement in the
material grades, sizes, quantities and locations as shown on the
plans.
1.02 GOVERNING STANDARDS
All reinforcing materials and the cutting, bending, tieing, splicing,
placing and supporting of same shall be in compliance with the
following listed standards unless otherwise noted in the Contract
Documents. The publications listed below are from,
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race St.,
Philadelphia, Pa. 19103.
ACI - American Concrete Institute, P.0. Box 19150, Redford Station,
Detroit, Michigan 48219,
CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, 180 N, LaSalle St.,
Chicago, Ill. 60601.
AWS - American Welding Society, Inc., 550 N.W. LeJeune, P. 0. Box
351040, Miami, Fla. 33135.
Other specifications and proprietary items are as noted.
The Contractor shall maintain one (1) copy of each of the applicable
standards at the construction field office or job site,
f
ASTM-A82 Standard Specification for Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM-A185 Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM•-A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-
Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
AN-315 Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced
Concrete Structures
ACI-318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
AWS-D1,4 Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel
CRSI Manual of Standard Practice
03200-1
1,03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND NANOLING
A. STORAGE
Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the
ground upon platform skids, or other supports and shall be
protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and r
surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing
rust, When placed in the work, it shall be free from dirt,
scale, dust, paint, oil and other foreign material. All steel
reinforcement shall be tagged and stored for ease of currelation
with shop drawings.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2,01 MATERIALS
A. BARS
All bar reinforcement shall conform to Deformed Billet-Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, ASTM Designation A••615. Unless i
otherwise specified, bars shall be Grade 60 with a minimum yield
strength of 60,000 psi.
B. WIRE FABRIC
Wire for fabric reinforcement shall be Cold-Drawn steel wire
conforming to the requirements for Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for
Concrete Reinforcement, ASTM Designation A-82, and Fabricated in
accordance with ASTM Designation A-1£15,
C. SUPPORTS "
Bar supports or chairs shall be furnished in accordance with the
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Manual of Standard
Practice, Bar supports which will be used in slabs or beams 1
which will h ve a rubbed finish on the bottom side shall have
uniform high density polyethylene tips on the legs, The tips
shall be approximately 1/4-inch thick between the ends of the
chair legs and the form, and shall be as manufactured by
Plastichair or equal.
_J 2,02 FABRICATION
A. BENDING
i
The reinforcement shall be bent cold by machine to shapes
indicated on the Plans, Bends shall be true to shapes
indicated, and Irregularities in bending shall be cause for
rejection. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, all Hook and
Bend Details and Tolerances shall conform to the requirements of
AC1-315 and ACI-318, j
i
03200-2
II
1
J
i
a
B. SHOP DRAWINGS
i
The Contractor or the Supplier shall prepare and submit detailed /
shop drawings for each detail of the general plans requiring the f
use of reinforcing steel, Each sheet, shall have a title. The r
shop drawings shall be submitted in duplicate for the review of
the Engineer. After review and making any necessary +7
corrections, six (6) copies of the shop drawings shall be
submitted for final approval, The approved shop drawings will
be distributed as follows:
2 - Engineer I - Supplier
2 - Contractor 1 - Ownrr
The Shop Drawings shill conform to the recommendations of
ACI-315.
3.00 EXECUTION
. 1
3.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUiREME.NTS
A. APPROVAL BY THE ENGINEER
No concrete shall be deposited until the Engineer has inspected
and approved the placing of the reinforcing steel and given
permission to place concrete, Exposed reinforcing steel
Intended for bonding with future extensions shall be effectively
protected from corrosion.
B. SPLICES "
1. Lap Splices; No splicing of bars, except when shown on the i
Plans, will be permitted without the written approval of
the Engineer Approval of bar bending schedules or of
placing drawings will constitute written approval. Lap
splices which are permitted shall have a lap in accordance
with the table of Tension Bar-Laps and Embedment lengths as
shown on the Plans, The bars shall be. rigidly clamped or
wired at all splices In a manner approved by the Engineer.
Sheets of wire fabric shall overlap each other sufficiently
to maintain a uniform strength and shall be securr:ly
fastened.
.
2, Welded Splices: Welding of reinforcing steel is not i
permitted without the written approval of the Engineer.
When permitted, the welding must be done in compliance with
the requirements of AWS-D12.1,
3. Mechanical Splices: Mechanical splices where shown an the
plans or permitted by the Engineer shall be made using i
"Cadweld" (or equal) reinforcing bar connectors, installed
In strict accordance with the manufacturer's instruc0 ons
03200-3
I
i
I
a
and recommrndations. The mechanical device shall develo,
I.he full tensile strength of the bar. 1
t
C. TOLERANCES
i 1
All reinforcement shall be placed as shown on the Plans with the
following maximum tolerances;
Cover + 1/B"
Spacings + 3/16" in 12"
0. PLACING
1. General; Steel reinforcement sha11 ,e placed in the exact
position as shown on the Plans and neld securely in place
during the placing of the conci-ete. The minimum clear
distance between bars shall be two tlmrs the bar diameter.
Vertical stirrups shall always pass around the main tension
members and be securely attached thereto. All reinforcing i
shall be wired together at a sufficient number of
intersections to produce a sound or sturdy mat or cane of
reinforcement that will maintain the reinforcement in the
intended positions when the concrete is poured. Every 4th
intersection is considered maximum unless otherwise
authorized by the Engineer.
2. Approval; No concrete shall be deposited until the fi!:7ineer
has inspected and approved the placing of the reinforcing
steel and given permission to place concrete. Exposed
reinforcing steel intended for bonding with future 0
extensions shall be effectively protected from corrosion.
1
3. Tieing and Supporting; The reinforcing steel in all
concrete slabs shall be held firmly in place, as shown on
the drawings, by wire supports or "chairs". Wire sizing
and spacing of the chairs shall be sufficient to properly
support the steel, and shall be in accordance with CRSI
Manual, "Recoliunended Practice for Placing Bars."
4. Spacers; The reinforcing steel in all concrete walls shall
be spaced its proper distance from the face of the forms,
as shown on the drawings, by means of approved galvanized
metal spacers or approved precast mortar or concrete J
blocks. Before any concrete Is placed, all mortar blocks {
to be used for holding steel in position adjacent to formed
surfaces shall be cast in Individual molds, at which time
the blocks shai', be immersed in water for the remainder of
at least a four-day curing period. The blocks shall
preferably be cast with the sides beveled and In such
manner that the size of the block increases away from the
surface to be placed against the forms. Blocks in the form
of a frustum of a cone or pyramid are preferred. Suitable
03200-4
I
I
iii
c
it
1
tie wires shall be provided in each block for anchoring the
block to the steel, and to avoid displacement when placing
the concrete, Unless specifically authorized by the
Engineer, the size of the surface to be placed adjacent to
the forms shall not exceed two and one-half (2-1/211) inches
square or she equivalent thereof when circular or
rectangular areas are provided. Blocks shall be accurately
cast to the thickness required, and the surface to be
` placed adjacent to the forms shall be a true plane free of
surface imperfections.
END OF SECTION
I
i
i
1
i
i
i
E 03200-5
`r
f
! 1
I
i
03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
1.00 GENERAL f
1.01 SCOPE
The work covered by this item consists of furnishing all material, i
mixing and transporting equipment, and performing all labor for the
proportioning, mixi;ig, transporting, placing, consolidating,
finishing and curing of concrete in the structure. Concrete.shall be
composed of portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, air
entraining admixture and water as hereinafter specified.
1,02 GOVERNING STANDARDS
All mixing, sampling, placing, curing and testing of concrete and the
materials used therein shall be in compliance with the latest
revision of the following listed standards unless otherwise noted in
the Contract Documents. The publications listed below are from:
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race St.,
Philadelphia, Pa. 19103.
ACI - American Concrete Institute, P. 0. Box 19150, Redford
Station, Detroit, Michigan 48219.
CRD - OCE, COE, Dept, of the Army, HQDA Washington, D,C. 20314.
I
Other specifications and proprietary items are as noted.
The Contractor shall maintain one (1) copy of each of the applicable i
standards at the construction field office.
ASTM-C31 Making & Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the field
ASTM-C33 Specifications for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM-C39 Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens
ASTM-C42 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams
f of Concrete
ASTM-C94 Specification for Ready Mix Concrete
ASTM-C109 Test for Compressive Strengths of Hydraulic Cement
Mortar
ASTM-C125 Concrete and Concrete Aggregates, Definitions of
Terms
ASTM-C143 Slump Test
ASTM-C150 Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM-C156 Test for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials
ASTM-C 3.71 Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
ASTM-C172 Sampling Fresh Concrete
I
i
03300-1
I
I
ASTM-0173 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method
ASTM-C191 Test, for Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vicat
Needlr
ASTM-C192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Laboratory
ASTM-C231 Test for Air Content by Pressure Method
ASTM-C260 Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures for
Concrete
ASTM-C293 Test for Flexural Strength of Concrete
ASTM-C309 Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds
for Curing Concrete
ASTM-C494 Specifications for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM-C595 Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements
ASTM-0618 Specification for fly Ash and Pozzolans for Use with
Portland Cement
ASTM-C806 Standard Test Method for Restrained Expansion of
Expansive Cement Mortar
ASTM-C827 Test for Early Volume Changes of Cementitious
h Materials
ASTM-CS45 Specification for Expansive Hydraulic Cement
ASTM-C878 Standard Test MethoJ for Restrained Expansion of
Shrinkage-Compensating Concrete
ASTM-D412 Tests for Rubber Properties
ASTM-0570 rest for Water Absorption of Plastics
ASTM-D746 Test for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics
ASTM-01190 Hot Poured Joint Sealer
ASTM-01152 Specification for Preformed Cork Expansion Joint
Fillers
ASTM-1)2240 Test for' Rubber Property Durometer
ASTM-E96 Test for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
i FS-TT-S-
00230E Type II C1, B Expansion Joint Sealant !
CRD-C621-83 Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout
ACI 211.1 Proportions for Normal Weight Concrete
ACI 214 Compression Test Results
ACI 223 Standard Practice for Use of Shrinkage Compensating
Concrete
ACI 301 Structural Concrete
ACI 304 Measuring, Mixing, Transporting & Placing Concrete
ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306R Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 306 Curing Concrete
ACI 309 Consolidation of Concrete
1,03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING i
A. STORAGE OF CEMENT
Cement may be delivered in bulk or in bags which are marked
plainly with the brand and name of manufacturer. Immediately
upon receipt cement shall be stored in a dry, weathertight and
{
03300-2.
I
i
properly ventilated structure, which excludes moisture. All
storage ft,uiI Wes shall be subject to approval and shall be
such as to permit easy access for inspection and identification
Sufficient cement shall be in storage to complete any lift. of
concrete started. In order that cement may not become unduly
aged after delivery, records of delivery dates shall be i
maintained and the Contractor shall use any cement which has
been stored at the site for 60 days or more before using cement
of lesser age. No cement will be used which is lumped or caked
or has been stored more than 90 days, or when the cement
temperature exceeds 170°F.
B, STORAGE OF AGGREGATES
The handling and storage of concrete aggregate shall he such as
to prevent the admixture of foreign materials, If the
aggregates are stored on the ground, the sites for the
stockpiles shall be grubbed, cleared of all weeds and grass, and
leveled, The bottom layer of aggregate shall not be disturbed
or used without recleaning,
Different sizes of aggregates shall be stored in such a manner
as to prevent intermixing. Materials in all stockpiles shall be
handled in such a manner that segregation of materials within
the pile will be avoided, and shall be built up in layers not
over three (3) feet in depth. Should segregation occur, the
aggregates shall be remixed to conform with the grading
requirements, Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, all
j fine aggregates shall be stockpiled at least. 24 hours before
mixing to reduce the free moisture content,
a
2,00 PRODUCTS
2,01 MATERIALS
A. CEMENT
Type I Portland Cement, conforming to the requirements of
ASTM-C16O, shall be used for all concrete.
B, FLY ASH/POZZOLANS
No fly ash/pozzolan will be permitteo,
C. ADMIXTURES
Unless otherwise approved by the En ineer, concrete of 3000 psi
or stronger shall contain air-entraining admixtures and when job
conditions require water reducing and set controlling admixtures
may be used with written approval of the Engineer,
i 0330U-3
I.
Air Entraining Adrniztnre: This shall comply with ASTM
Designation C-260. The total average air content shall be
in accordance with recommendations of ACI 211,1; 4,5% r
1.0% for 1-112" maximum size aggregate.
2, Water Reducing Admixtures: This shall comply with ASTM
Designation C-494, Types A and D only, and shall be
accurately measured and added to the mix in accordance with
the manufacturer's recorronendations.
3, Set Retarding Admixtures; Retarders may be used if approved
by the engineer, Retarders shall comply with ASTM !
Designation C-494, Types 6 and D only and be accurately
measured and added to the mix In accordance with the
manu a.cture's recommendations.
0. WATER
1
Water for concrete shall be clean and free from injurious
amounts of oil, acid alkali, salt, organic matter, or other
deleterious substances. Water suitable for drinking or for
ordinary household use will be accepted for use without being
tested.
Water from doubtful sources shall not be used until tested and j
approved in writing by the Engineer. The Contractor sh-11 not
take water for use in concrete from shallow, muddy, or marshy
sources,
When comparative tests are made with water of known satisfactory
quality in accordance with ASTM Method C-87 any indication of
i unsoundness, marked change in the time of set, or reduction of
more than five percent. in mortar strength shall be sufficient
cause for rejection of water tinder test,
E. FINE AGGREGATE
Fine aggregate shall consist of natural washed and screened sand
complying with the requirements and tests of Specifications for
Concrete Aggregates, ASTM Designation C33, The gradation as
included in ASTM-C33 air entrained concrete is as follows,
SIEVE SIZE PERCENT RETAINED PERCENT PASSING
j 3/8" 0 100
#4 0 - 5 95 - 100
#8 0 - 20 80 - 100
#16 15 - 50 50 - 85
#30 40 - 75 25 - 60
#50 70 90 10 - 30
#100 90 - 98 2 - 10
03300-4
i
I '
Fine aggregate shall have not more than 45 percent retained
between any two consecutive sieves and its fineness modulus, as
defined in ASTM-0125, shall be not less than 2.3 nor more than
3.1. /
F. COARSE AGGREGATE 1
Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone or gravel i
conforming to the requirements and test of Specifications for
Concrete Aggregates, ASTM Designation C33, Gradation Size Number
461.
Gradation size Number 467, a maximum aggregate size of
1-1/211, as included in ASTM C33 is as follows:
NO, 467
SIEVE SIZE
SQUARE OPENING PERCENT RETAINED PERCENT PASSING
~ 'l" 0 100 ~
1-1/2" 0 - 5 95 - 100
3/4" 30 - 65 35 - 70
3/811 70 - 90 10 - 30
No. 4 95 - 100 0 - 5
I
G. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
1. Joint Materials For Water Retaining Structures;
a. Premolded expansion joint material shall conform to ,
ASTM D-1752 for resilient, non-bituminous, Type II6 in
the i;hlckness specified. i
b. Joint sealer shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
01190.
C. Expansion joint sealant shall be a one component gun
grade polysulfide base elastomeric sealing compound.
This material shall conform to the requirements of
FS-TT-S-00230E Type II Class B as manufactured by A.
C. Horn Co,, or Thiokol Chemical Co,, or approved
equal, Backing material for sealant shall be 1-inch
polyethylene rod prepared as shown on plans, Where
surface is to receive a swept-in grout topping, a ;
3-fnch wide i mil polyethylene strip shall be placed
above the joint sealant, which st ip shall be held In
place with 1-inch wide polyethylene tape spaced at
12-Inch centers (maximum),
I
y
03300-5
`a
2. Joint Materials for Non-Water Retaining Structures:
a. A bituminous type preformed expansion Joint filler +
meeting the requirements of ASTM D-994, in the
thickness shown on the Plans.
3. Waterstops shall be extruded PVC in the sizes and types
specified meeting the requirements of:
7
ASTM D412 ASTM 02240
ASTM D570 ASTM D746
Unless otherwise shown on plans, waterstops shall be of
a dumbbell type, 6" for construction ,joints, 9" for r
expansion ,joints.
4. Sheet materials for curing concrete when required shall
conform to ASTM C171.
a. Waterproof paper
II
b. Polyethylene film 1
G. White burlap - polyethylene film
I
5. Membrane curing compound when allowed shall conform to ASTM
C309. Curing compounds shall be submitted to the Engineer {
for approval prior to use. Compound shall be non-staining
and shall ba applied as per manufacturer's recommendations.
6. Epoxy Resins for coating, grouting, seal coating, wearing
surfaces, etc. The epoxy selected shall carry the
manufacturer's recommendation for the planned application.
For applications involving moist or wet surfaces, the epoxy
selected shall be compatible with the moisture. The
manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed In every
detail.
7. Epcxy Resins for bonding fresh concrete to hardened
concrete shall be Sikadur H1-MOD (Sikastix 370) or an
approved equivalent. The epoxy shall carry the
manufacturer's recommendation for the planned application
and the recommendation shall be followed in every detail.
Epoxy bonding system shall conform to ASTM C881-83.
8. Shrinkage Compensating Grout:
a. General: This section covers grouting of pump, motor, j
and equipment baseplates or bedplates; column
baseplates, other miscellaneous baseplates, piping
block outs and other uses of grout as indicated on the
I'
03300-6
i
ji
drawings. Epoxy grouts shall he used in the presence
of chemicals that will abrade cementitious grouts.
b. Materials:
(1) For all non-shrinking grout, the manufacturer /
shall furnish from an approved independent
laboratory, recent test results verifying that
the grout shows:
(a) No shrinkage from the time of placement, or
expansion after set, under AST14-CS27 and
CRO-0621-83 (Corps of Engineers).
(b) A twenty-four (24) hour compressive strength in
a trowelable mix of not less than three thousand
pounds per square inch (3,000 psi) under
ASTM-C109.
(c) An initial set time of nO less than forty-five
(45) minutes under ASTM-C191.
(2) Non-Shrink Metallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory
packaged, ferrous aggregate mortar grouting
compound, Products offered by manufacturers tj
comply the requirements loclude the following:
Embeco 636: Master Builders Company
Ferrogrout: L&M Construction Chemicals
(3) Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout: Pre-mixed,
E nonstaining, non-shrink grout shall be Masterflow
713 Grout as manufactured by Master Builders Co.;
or CRYSTEX by L&M Construction Chemicals; or
approved equal.
C. Installation:
(1) The Contractor shall obtain field technical
assistance from the grout manufacturer, as
required, to insure proper installation of the
grout in compliance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and procedures,
(2) For non-shrink grouts, the foundation should be
saturated for twenty-four (24) hours before
installation and cleared of excess water
Immediately before installation. All baseplates
or bedplates should be free of oil, grease,
laltance and other foreign substances.
i
03300-7
719
;i
(3) Mixing: All mixing shall take place according to
manufacturer's recommended procedures.
(4) Placement: Grout shall be placed in strict r
accordance with the directions of the i
manufacturer so that all spaces and cavities
below the top of the baseplates and bedplates are
completely filled without voids. Forms shall be
provided where structural components of the
baseplates or bedplates will not confine the
grout. Where necessary, and acceptable under
' manufacturer's procedures, a round head pencil
vibrator, three quarters of an inch (3/411)
maximum diameter, is allowable.
(5) Edge Finishing: In all locations where the edge
of the grout will be exposed to view, the non-
shrink grout, after it has reached its initial
set, shall be finished smooth. Except where
indicated to be finished on a slope, the edges of
the grout shall be cut off flush at the base-
plate, bedplate, member, or piece of equipment.
(6) Curing: For non-shrink grouts, wet curing should
take place for at least three (3) days, unless
specified by manufacturer, by wet rags, wet
burlap or polyethylene sheets. All cloths shall
be kept constantly wet for the curing cycle.
r 8. Grout (Normal Shrinkage): Normal shrinkage grout for
general use shall consist of one (1) part of Portland
Cement (Type If for exposure to sewage and Type I for
I~ other applications) and three (3) parts of clean,
first quality sand as approved by the Engineer, All
proportioning shall be on a volumetric basis. This
material shall be used for grouting clarifier,
thickener floors and to grout all areas on Plans which do
not require non-shrink grout,
9. Non:shrink Epoxy Structural Grouts: Shall be furnished in
two components from the factory and mixed on the job site.
Epoxy routs shall conform to ASTM C-579, C-580 and C-827.
Epoxy grouts shall be chemical resistant, water resistant
and have a minimum 7 day compressive strength of 12,000
psi, Epoxy grouts shall be Epogrout: by L & M Construction
Chemicals; Sika Grout Pack by Sika; Five SLar Epoxy Grout;
by U. S. Grout Corp.; or approved equal.
For epoxy grouts, the foundation, baseplate or other
surface should be clean, dry, and sound prior to
installation. For epoxy grouts, dry curing is acceptable.
03300-8
J
1
1
10, Aluminum in Contact with or imbedded in Concrete, Where
aluminum anchors, aluminum shapes, or, aluminum electrical ii
conduits are embedded in concrete, all contact surfaces
shall be painted with zinc chromate primer in accordance
with United States Joint Army-Navy Specification JANP-735.
The paint shall be allowed to thoroughly dry before the
aluminum is placed in contact with the concrete.
Aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with concrete,
wood, or masonry construction, except where the aluminum Is
to be embedded in concrete, shall be given a heavy coat of
an alkali-resistant bituminous paint before installation,
The bituminous paint used shall meet the requirements of
United States Military Specification MIL-P-6883. The paint
shall be applied as it is received from the manufacturer
without the addition of any thinner,
All steel or other ferrous metal to be mounted on or, placed
in contact with dry/cured concrete such as valve operator
1 floor stands, electrical switchgear, etc,, shall be painted
on the mounting surface in accordance with PAINTING
Specification for exterior metal surfaces in non-critical
areas.
2,02 CONCRETE PROPORTIONS
A. GENERAL
ACI 211.1 shall be the basis for selecting the proportions for
concrete made with aggregates of normal and high dp,nsity and of
workability suitable for usual cast-in-place structures.
i B. PROCEDURE IN DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIXES
1, General: The Contractor shall be responsible for the design
of the concrete consistent with the minimum requirements of
strength and proportions stated herein, The proportions of
materials entering into the mix, subject to limitations
already stated, to produce concrete of satisfactory
quality, shall be determined by laboratory tests prior to
beginning of concrete placing. Design shall be in
accordance with ACI Standard 211,1 "Recommended Practice
for Selecting Proportions of Concrete," subject to maximum
water cement ratfo, minimum cement content and minimum
strengths set forth herein,
2. Trial Mixes: A trial mix shall be designed by an indupen-
dent testing laboratory, retained by the Contractor and
approved by the owner. The testing laboratory shall submit
verification that the materials and proportions of the
trial concrete mix design meets the requirements of this
i
03300-4
yyy:
r
specification. The laboratory trial concrete mix design
shall be submitted for the ngineer's approval before the
7-day strength tests are made.
Laboratory samples shall be made in accordance with the
trial mix designs for laboratory testing purposes. The ,
fresh concrete shall be tested for Slump (ASTM-C143) and
Air Content (ASTM-C173/C231), Strength test specimens
shall be made, cured and tested for 7 and 28 day strength I
in accordance with ASTM-C192, ASTM-C39, ASTM-C?.93. 1
Laboratory tests on trial mixes shall show a 28-day
strength 10 percent higher than the stated minimum 28 day
strength. From these preliminary tests, the ratios between
7-day and 28-day strengths shall be established to
determine at 7 days the strengths necessary to satisfy the
required 28-day strengths. The 7-day trial mix strength
test results shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 14
days in advance of the 28-day strength tests.
The final results of the 28 day compressive strength tests
shall he submitted to the Engineer at least 10 days prio
to the scheduled beginning of concrete placement, and :,hall j
be approved by the Engineer prior to placement of any
concrete.
3. Changes in Mixes: If, during the progress of the work, it
is found impossible to secure concrete of regvired
workability and strength with the materials being furnished
by the Contractor, the Engineer may order changes in
proportions or materials or both, necessary to secure the
I desired properties, subject to limitations already stated,
The Contractor may not make changes in materials, either
gradation, source, or brand, or proportions of mixtures
after their having once been approved except by specific
written approval of the Engineer.
C. WORKABILITY
In general the workability of any mix shall be that required for
the specific placing conditions and method of placement. The
concrete shall be of such workability that it can be worked
readily Into all corners and around reinforcing without
segregation of materials or having free water collect on the
surface. Compliance with specified slump limitations shall not
necessarily designate, a satisfactory mix. The Engineer may
require changes in hw J'tlons at any time as necessary to
obtain a rix having s,x sfactory properties. The slump tests
will be made by the En sneer (or a designated representative of
the Owner's laboratory Jq in accordance with ASTM Method of Test
for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete, Designation C-143.
t
` 03300-10
f
f%
'i
In no rase shall the amount of coarse material be such as to
produce harshness in placing or honeycombing in the structure
when forms are removed.
D. CONCRETE CLASSIFICATIONS J
f% Cement Max.Size Max.Water Max.
28 day Bags Agg. Gals/Bag Slump
Class (psi)_ ~~(inche.) (net) (inches) Use
A 3000 5.5 1.5 6.25 4-6 General. All
(ASTM 467) reinforced concrete
this project unless
otherwise specified
E 1500 3.0 1.5 8.25 4 Cradling, Blocking,
(ASTM 467) Foundation Seal
F - 2.0 1.5 - 1-112 - 3 Lean Conc, Backfill
(ASTM 467)
The maximum amount of coarse aggregate (dry loose volume) per
cubic foot of finished concrete shall not exceed 0.82 cubic
feet,
The maximum amount of water as set forth in the table above is
based on the assumption that the aggregates are in a saturated,
surface dry condition.
The maximum water content will be the amount added at the mixer,
plus the free vrater in the aggregate, and minus the absorption
of the aggregate based on a thirty-minute absorption period. No
allowance will be made for evaporation of water after batching.
If additional water is required to obtain the desired slump, a
compensating amount of cement shall also be added. The maximum
water-cement ratio shall not be exceeded. No additional
compensation will be and"I for additional cement which may be
used under this condition.
The concrete afix will be designed with the intention of
producing concrete which will have compressive or flexural
strength equal to or greater than the following when using
current ASTM Designation C-39 and C-293;
Minimum Minimum
Class of Compressive Strength Flexural Strength
Concrete (Pounds per Square Inch) (Pounds per Square Inch)
ay zu 0ay 4 day ay
A. 22000 3,000 400 500
E. 1,000 1$00 150 250
03300-11
f
E, QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
1, Laboratory Service: The control of proportioning, mixing,
and testing of all materials, ready mix, transit mix or
central plant concrete shall be under the supervision of
the Owner's Testing Laboratory. A representative of the
Laboratory will work in cooperation with the Contractor and r
the Engineer and will furnish to the Engineer and
Contractor a summary of all tests which are performed. No
concrete shall be placed without a representative of the
Laboratory being present either at the plant or at the
project site.
a. Small Placements, For concrete placements of ten cubic
yards or less, the Engineer may waive these
requirements, however, in such event, evidence shall
be furnished showing a design mix to meet the
requirements of the specifications.
' b. Cost of Laboratory Service: Unless otherwise
'f specified, all cost for laboratory service except +
those tests in connection with the mix design and
trial batches at the beginning of the project shall be
borne by the Owner, Cost of mix design and tests as
required for initial batch designs, as specified above
in trial mixes, shall be paid for by the Contractor,
F. TESTS OF CONCRETE.
r
1. General: Frequent tests will be required by the Engineer
throughout the work to determine the quality of concrete.
Unless otherwise specified these tests shall be made by an a
independent testing laboratory to be selected and paid for
by the Owner, All samples shall be taken in accordance I
with ASTM C172. 1
2, Slump Test: The slump test as described in ASTM C143 will
be used to indicate workability and consistency of the
concrete mix from batch to batch, Generally, a slump test
will be made at the start of operations each day, at
regular intervals throughout a working day, and at any time
when the appearance of the concrete suggests a change in
un i for'mi ty,
3. Air Content Test: Tests for air content of the concrete
shall be made in accordance with ASTM C231, at the point of
delivery of concrete just prior to placing in forms. The
test shall be made often enough to insure a proper air
content uniform from batch to batch,
4. Compression Test: Compression test specimens shall be 6" x
12" concrete cylinders made and cured according to the
03300-12
~i
c7
latest designation of ASTM C31, The number of specimens
and frequency of sampling shall be determined by the
Engineer, No fewer than two specimens shall be made for
each test to be mane at each age (7 and 28 days), and
samples shall be taken at a minimum of every 150 cubic ,
yards of concrete of each class placed. Further, at least
one set of test specimens per day shall be made of each
class of concrete used that day. All specimens shall be
cured under laboratory conditions specified in ASTM C31.
Additional concrete cylinders may be required to be cured
on the job under the actual job curing conditions; this
shall be the Contractor's responsibility. These samples
could be required when:
a. In the opinion of the Engineer, there is a possibility
of the air temperature surrounding the concrete
falling below 40 degrees F., or rising above 90
degrees F.
b. In the opinion of the Engineer, the curing procedure
may need improving and/or lengthening.
C. Necessary to determine when structure may be put in
service.
Compression strength tests shall be made on the laboratory
cured and job cured concrete cylinders at 7 and 28 days, in
accordance with ASTM C39, latest designation, The value of
each test result shall be the average compressive strength
of two samples taken at the same time from the same batch
of concrete, The tests made at 7 days shall show strengths
of not less than two-thirds (2/3) of the design strength. ,
For the 28 day cylinders, the strength level will be
I+ considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of
three consecutive strength test results exceeds the
required design compressive strength, f'c, and no
{ individual strength test result falls below the required
f'c, by more than 500 psi,
If the test record of the standard-cured specimens fails to
satisfy the strength requirements, the Engineer shall have
the right to order a change in the mix proportions. If the
job-cured cylinders fail the strength criteria, the
Engineer shall have the right to require changes in
temperature, moisture conditions, and time for the curing
process to obtain the required strength. If a strength
deficiency exists as shown by either test record, the
questionable portion of the structure shall be cored,
tested and evaluated according to ACI 301, The cost for
03300-13
I`.
I
t,
1
testing of the hardened concrete structure and possible i
subsequent replacing of a part of it found to be inadequate
shall be at the Contractors expense.
Unless the Owner's laboratory is on the site, the
Contractor shall provide such housing as may be required
for curing and storage of test specimens and testing
equip•nent. The Contractor, if he desires, may at his
expense, have tests made of cylinders as a check on the
tests made for the Owner,
5. Failure to Meet Requirements: Should the 7-day strengths
shown by the test specimens fall below the regljired values,
the Engineer shall have the authority to require additional
curing on those portions of the structures ~~epresented by
the test specimens. The additional curing required by the
Engineer shall be done at the Contractor's expense, and
test cores shall be obtained and tested in accordance with
ASTM Method of Obtaining and Testing Specimens from
Hardened Cores and Beams of Concrete, Designation C42, In
the event that such additional curing does not give the
strength required, the Engineer shall have the right to
require strengthening or replacement, at the Contractor's
expense, of those portions of the structure which failed to
develop the required strength.
Upon receipt of written request by the Contractor,
substandard concrete work may be re-examined in place by
non-destructive testing methods or core samples in
accordance with ACI 301. The Contractor shall retain the
services of an independent testing laboratory approved by
the Engineer and shall bear all expenses without
compensation from the Owner. Laboratory results shall be
evaluated by the Engineer and the Engineer shall make the
final decision on acceptability of the concrete in
question.
The Owner may withhold payment for any section of concrete
that does not meet the requirements of these specifications
for placement, lines, finishing, general workmanship or
strength, Withheld payment shall be based on the unit
J prices bid for additional concrete and reinforcing steel.
payment shall be withheld until the unacceptable concrete
has been refinished, removed and replaced or otherwise
brought into conformance with the specifications.
G. MIXING CONDITIONS
1. General; The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required
for immediate use, and any concrete which is not in place
within the time limits specified in paragraph GA shall not
be used. Retempering of concrete will not be permitted,
03300-14
'i
,t
i
2. Concrete Temperature: No concrete snail be placed when the ~
temperature of the concrete to be placed is greater than 90
degrees F. or less than 50 degrees F. The temperature of
the concrete to be planed will be taken by the Engineer
using a thermometer immediately prior to placement with the
point of measurement being in the chute or bucket.
3. Cold Weather; No concrete shall be mixed without the
appruval of the Engineer when the air temperature is at or
below 40 degrees F, (taken in the shade away from j
artificial heat) and falling. If authorized by the
F Engineer, concrete may be mixed when the air temperature is
at 35 degrees F. and rising. All cold weather concreting
shall be done in accordance with ACI-306.
I
When permission is given for mixing when the air
temperature is below 40 degrees F., all water used for
mixing shall be heated to a temperature sufficient to raise
the temperature of concrete to 70 degrees F., but the
temperature of the mixing water shall not exceed 165
degrees F. at the time of entering the mixer. If heating
the mixing water only will not raise the placing
temperature of tl.e concrete to 70 degrees F., then the
aggregate must also be heated, either by steam or dry neat,
to a temperature sufficient to raise the placing
temperature of the concrete to the required temperature.
In no case shall the aggregate temperature as it enters the
mixer exceed 150 degrees F. The heating apparatus shall be
such as to heat the mass of the aggregate uniformly and
preclude the occurrence of hot spots which will burn the
material. Temperatures of transported concrete shall not
E i be less than 60 degrees F, at the time of placing in the
JI forms.* Salts, chemicals or other foreign materials shall
riot be mixed with the concrete for purpose of preventing
freezing. Calcium chloride is not permitted,
*Adequate means shall be provided to maintain the concrete
and the surrounding air at a minimum temperature of 50
degrees F. for a minimum of 3 days.
4. Hot Weather; Hot weather is defined as any combination of
high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind
velocity that in the judgment of the Engineer would Impair
the quality of the concrete. All hot weather concreting
shall be in accordance with ACI-305, Concrete shall be
placed in the forms without the addition of any more water
than required by the design {slump!, No excess water shall
be added on the concrete surface for finishing, Control of
initial set of the concrete and extending the time for
! finishing operations may be accomplished with the use of an
approved water-reducing and set-retarding admixture as
specified above.
03300-15
I
~ I
{
1
M aaxind/or mum cement met i to terv the al batch, antweend the the addition of mixing water
G the forms shall not exceed the followp i l ng acing of concrete in
Air or Concrete Temperature j
(whichever hi Maximum Time From
Qher_) Addition of Water to Placement
Non-A^ 9Ita'ed Concrete
r up to £10° F, 30 Minutes
Over 80° F,
15 Minutes
A hated Concrete
Up to 75° F.
75° to 890 F, 90 Minutes
Over 90° F. max, 60 Minutes
concrete temperattureissible
) 45 Minutes
The use of an approved set-retarding admixture will permit
1 the extension of the above time maximums by 30 minutes, for
f agitated concrete only.
U
conditions, nder extreme hot temperature, wind, or humidity
set-retarding agent, may may
h
suspend require cothe use ncreting fopthe
erations
if quality of the concrete, being placed is not acceptable,
2,03 BATC10G, MEASURING AND MIXING
A. GENERAL
( If operated on the job site, the hatching plant shall be located
in an area approved by the Engineer.
Separate bins or compartments shall be provided for each size or
classification of aggregate and for bulk portland cement when
used, The compartments shall be of ample size and so
constructed that there is no nixing or mingling of the materials
l being batched during operations, The batching plant shall be
equipped so that the flow of each material Into the
stopped autornatfcaily when the designated weight has bbeener is
J reached, Aggregate may be weighed In separate weigh batchers
with individual scales, or cumulatively in one weigh baicher on
one scale, [sulk portland cement shall be weighed nn a separate
scale in a separate weigh batcher. Water may be measured by
weight or by volume. If measured by weight, It shall not be
weighed cumulatively with another ingredient, nat;hing controls
shall be so interlocked that the charging mechanism cannot be
opened until the scales have returned to zero. These
requirements can be satisfied by a semiautomatic batching system
as defined in the Concrete Plant Standards of the Concrete plant
03300-1b
4f ~
I 1
I 1
Manufacturers Bureau, Sixth Revision
' (Dec. 1977) with
interlocking as described above,
system as defined in the Concrete PlantStandardsic batching
shall be or4 b a
arranged so as to facilitate the inspection of plant
operation, at all for obtaining repretsenimetsa.tSuitable facilities shall be provided
ive samples of aggregate from each of
the bfns
mater ialsofromcompartments
Delivery of
batchingrequipment urposes
following limits of accuracy;
b the
Material
Percent
Cement
Water I
Aggregate I
Admixtures 2
3
When aggregates are weighed cumulatively, the limit for
aggregate applies to the total weight in the batcher after each
aggregate size has been batched.
B. WATER BATCHER AND ADMIXTURE DISPENSER
Equipment for batching water and the air-entraining admixture
shall be provided at the batching plant or included with the
" paving mixers or truck mixers as required for the type of
used. plant
C. WATER BATCHERS
i A suitable water measuring device shall be provided which will
1{ be capable of measuring the mixing water within the specified
requirements for each batch. The mechanism for delivering water
to the mixers shall be such that leakage will not occur when the
valves are closed, The filling and discharge valves for the
water batcher shall be so interlocked that the discharge valve
cannot be opened before the filling valve is fully closed.
D. ADMIXTURE DISPENSER
suitably device for measuring and dispensing the
air-entr:ining admixture shall be provided. The device shall be
capable of ready af1justment to permit varying the quantity of
admixture to be batched. The dispenser for air-entraining
admixtures shall be interlocked with the batching and
discharging operations of the water so that the batching and
discharging of the admixture will be automatic,
E. MOISTURE CONTROL
The plant shall be capable of
read
the varying moisture contents ofttheaaggregate,tandotoechangefor
f -
03300-17
i
i7 I
r
the weights of the materials being batched. An electric
moisture meter shall be provided for measurement of moisture in
the fine aggregate. The sensing element shall be arranged so
that the measurement is made near the batcher charging gate of
the sand bin or in the sand batcher. 1
F. SCALES
Adequate facilities shall be provided for the accurate
measurement and control of each of the materials entering each
batch of concrete. The accuracy of the weighing equipment shall
conform to the applicable requirements of National Bureau of
Standards Handbook AA for such equipment. The Contractor shall
provide standard test weights and any other auxiliary equipment
required for checking the operating performance of each scale or
other measuring device. Periodic tests shall be made in the
presence of the Engineer in such a manner and at such intervals
as may be directed. Upon completion of each check test and
before further use of the indicating recording or control
devices, the Contractor shall make such adjustments, repairs or
replacements as may be required to secure satisfactory
performance. Each weighing unit shall include a visible
springless dial which shall indicate the scale load at all
stages of the weighing operation, or shall include a bean scale
with a beam balance indicator which will show the scale in
balance at zero load and at any beam setting, The indicator
shall have an over and under travel equal to at least 5 percent
of the capacity of the beam. The weighing equipment shall be
arranged so that the plant operator can conveniently observe all
dials or indicators.
G. RECORDERS
An accurate recorder or recorders shall produce a graphical or
digital record of the scale reading after each of the aggregates
and cement has been batched prior to delivery to the mixer and
after the batchers have been discharged (return to zero
reference)The weight or volume of water shall also be
recorded if batched at a central batching plant, Recorders
shall conform to the following detailed requirements.
Each recorder shall be. housed in a cabinet which shall be
r,epable of being locked,
The charts or tapes shall clearly indicate the different types
of mixes used by stamped letters, numerals, colored ink or by
other suitable means. The charts or tapes shall be so mal•ked
that variations in batch weights of each type of mix can be
readily observed.
The charts or tapes shall show time of day (stamped or
preprinted) at intervals of not more than 15 minutes.
I
03300-18
f
rn
The recorded charts or tapes shall become the property of the
Owner.
The recorders shall be placed in a position convenient for /
observation by the plant operator and inspector.
This requirement may be deleted by the Engineer if satisfactory
evidence is presented to demonstrate consistent performance of
the plant.
MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT
Mixers may be stationary mixers, truck mixers, or paving mixers
of approved design. Mixers shall be capable of combining the
materials into a uniform mixture and of discharging this mixture
without segregation. Stationary and paving mixers shall be
provided with an acceptable device to lock the discharge
mechanism until the required mixing time has elapsed, Truck
mixers shall be equipped with accurate revolution counters. The
mixers or mixing plant shall include a device for automatically
counting the total number of batches of concrete mixed, The
mixers shall be operated at the drum or mixing blade speed
designated by the manufacturer on the name plate.
The mixing time for stationary mixers shall be based upon the
ability of the mixer to produce uniform concrete throughout the
batch and from batch to batch. For guidance purposes, the
Manufacturer's recommendations or 1 min, for 1 cu. yd, plus 1/4
min, for each additional cu, yd, may be used. Final mixing time
shall be based on mixer performance. Mixers shall not by
charged in excess of the capacity recommended by the
manufacturer on the specification plate attached to the machine.
When a stationary mixer is used for partial mixing of the
concrete (shrink mixed) the mixing time in the stationary mixer
may be reduced to the minimum necessary to intermingle the
ingredients (about 30 seconds).
When a truck mixer is used either for complete mixing
(transltmixed) or to finish the partial mixing done in a
stationary mixer, in the absence of uniformity test data, each
batch of concrete shall be mixed not less than 70 nor more than
J 100 revolutions of the drum at the rate of rotation designated
by the manufacturer of the equipment as mixing speed, If the
batch Is at least 112 cubic yard less than the rated capacity,
in the absence of uniformity test data, the number of
revolutions at mixing speed may be reduced to not less than 50.
Any additional mixing shall be done at the speed designated by
the manufacturer of the equipment as agitating speed, When
necessary for proper control of the concrete, mixing of transit
mixed concrete will not be permitted until the truck mixer is at
the site of the concrete placement,
{
I
03300-19
I~~
i
Paving mixers may be either single compartment drum or multiple
compartment drun) type, A sled or box of suitable size shall be
attached to the mixer under the bucket so as to catch any
spillage of concrete that may occur when the mixer is
discharging concrete into the bucket. Multiple compartment drum
{raving mixers shall be properly synchronized, and the mixing
time shall be determined by including the time required to
transfer the concrete between compartments of the drum,
Vehicles used in transporting materials from the hatching plant
to the paving mixers shall have bodies or compartments of
adequate capacity to carry the materials and to deliver each
batch, separated and intact, to the mixer, Except as otherwise
approved, loose cement shall be transported from the batching f
plant to the mixers in separate boxes or compartments which
shall be equipped with windproof and rain-proof covers.
1. SAMPLING
Suitable facilities shall be provided for readily obtaining
representative samples of aggregate from each of the weigh
batchers for test purposes. Suitable facilities shall be
provided for obtaining representative samples of concrete for
uniformity tests. All necessary platforms, tools, and equipment
for obtaining samples shall be furnished by the Contractor,
3,00 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A. APPROVAL BY ENGINEER
Before starting work, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer
fully as to the type of forms, falsework, and methods of
construction he proposes to use, and as to the amount and
character of equipment he proposes to use, the adequacy of which
shall be s0ject to the approval of the Engineer. The
Contractor shall submit, for the Engineer's approval, a schedule
showing the sequence of concrete placements, Approval of forms,
falsework, and methods of construction by the Engineer shall not
be considered as relieving the Contractor of the responsibility
for the safety or correctness of his methods and adequacy of his
equipment, or from carrying out the work in full accordance with
the Contract.
B. TIME. SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
Unless otherwise provided, the following requirements shall
govern for the time sequence in which construction operations
shall be carried on, Forms for walls or columns shall not be
erected on concrete footings until the concrete in the footing
has cured at least two curing days, Concrete may be placed in a
wall or column as soon as the forms and reinforcing steel
03300-20
C
t
i
placements are approved, Steel beams or forms and falsework for
superstructures shall riot be erected on concrete substructures
until the concrete in the substructure has cured at least four
curing days. Approved falsework required for superstructures
shall not be erected until the substructure has cured 4 curing
days and shall not be removed until the superstructure has cured '
7 days, the use of completed portions of a structure as the
site for mixing operations or for storage of materials will not
be. permitted without the Engineer's approval, 1
C. EXPANSION JOINTS AND DEVICES
1. General Requirements: Expansion joints and devices to
provide for expansion and contraction shall be constructed
where and as indicated on the Plans. All joints
'
constructed open, which are to be left open or filled with
poured Joint material, shall be constructed using forms
adaptable to loosening or early removal. In order to avoid
jamming such forms by the expansion action of the concrete j
and the consequent likelihood of injury to the adjacent
concrete, these forms shall be removed or loosened as soon
as practicable after the concrete has attained its initial
set. A provision for loosening the forms to permit free
expansion of the concrete without the necessity for full
removal is preferred.
2. Workmanship; Armored joints shall be carefully constructed
in order to avoid defective anchorage of the steel and to
avoid porous or honeycombed concrete adjacent to same,
Premolded materials, wherever used, shall be anchored to
the concrete on one side of the joint by means of an
I~ approved adhesive. Such anchorage shall be sufficient to
preclude the tendency of the material to fall out of the
,joint. Careful workmanship shall be exercised in the
construction of all joints to insure that the concrete
sections are completely separated by an open ,joint, or by
the joint materials, and to insure that the joints will be
true to the outline indicated, Immediately after the
removal of forms, and again where necessary after surface
I finishing, all projecting concrete shall be removed along
the exposed edges of premolded materials in order to secure
------J full effectiveness of the expansion ,joint. llherc roofing
felt or premolded materials are specified for horizontal
,joints, the material shall, if practicable, extend two
inches beyond the form for the top member. The projecting
portion shall be subsequently trimmed to the face of the
member after the forms are removed.
3, Embedded Items; Before concrete placement begins all
embedded items, i.e,, water stops, anchor bolts, mechanical
and electrical inserts shall be checked to determine that
they are firmly and securely fastened at the locations
03300-21
ij
r
shown on the plans. Anchor bolts shall be set to exact
locations r,y the use of suitable anchor bolt templates, or
as otherwise shown on the flans, They must be free of oil,
rust and anything else that would prevent proper bonding to
the concrete. Voids, when required shall be made by use of
some easily removed material. ,
D. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
I
The joint formed by placing plastic concrete in direct contact
with concrete that has attained its initial set shall be deemed
a construction ,joint, When concrete in a structure or a portion
of a structure is specified to be monolithic, the term
monolithic shall be interpreted to mean that the manner and
sequence of concrete placing shall be such that construction i
joints will not occur. Construction joints shall be of the type
and spacing shown on the plans. Additional horizontal and
vertical construction joints will be considered by the Engineer
upon request, but shall not be used without prior written
approval of the Engineer. The locations and elevations of i
additional construction joints shall be subject to the approval
of the Engineer. Construction joints shall be neatly chamfered
three-eighths of an inch (3/8") as directed by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise provided, construction joints shall be square
and normal to the forms. Bulkheads shall be provided in the
forms for all joints except horizontal joints.
Horizontal construction joints shall be prepared for receiving
the succeeding lift by clearing by air-water cutting. The
air-water cutting of a construction joint shall be done at the 01
I
proper time. The surface shall be exposed sound, clean i
aggregate. The air pressure supply to the jet shall be
approximately one hundred (1.00) pounds per square inch, and the
water pressure shall be just sufficient to bring the water into
effective influence of the air pressure. After cutting, the
surface shall be washed until there is no trace of cloudiness of j
the wash water.
In areas where air-water cutting cannot be satisfactorily
accomplished, or in areas where it is considered undesirable by
the Engineer to disturb the surface of the concrete before it
has hardened, the surface shall be prepared for receiving the
next lift by wet sand blasting to remove all laitance and
unsound concrete immediately prior to placing of the next lift.
The surface of the concrete shall be thoroughly washed after
sand blasting to remove all loose material.
Immediately prior to the placing of additional concrete, all
forms shall be drawn tight against the concrete in place, and
03300-22
r
r~
F
the surfaces of the concrete in lace shall be flushed
p with a
coating of grout mixed in the proportions of one part of cement
to two parts of sand. 1
If shown on the plans, construction joints shall be provided
with concrete keyways, reinforcing steel dowels, and waterstops.
The method of forming keys in keyed joints shall be such as to ;
permit the easy removal of forms without chipping, breaking, or
damaging the concrete in any manner.
E. PREPARATION OF EXISTING HARDENED CONCRETE
Where new concrete or any grouting compound except epoxy grout
is to be placed in contact with existing hardened concrete, the
existing surface shall be textured by chipping or other means so
that an irregular surface which has a height variance of not
less than 1/4-inch is created. The existinn concrete shall then
be treated in accordance with paragraph D. above.
3.02 PLACING CONCRETE i
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Preliminary Consideration, The Contractor shall notify the
Engineer upon completion of various portions of the work
1 required for placing concrete so that inspection may be
made as early as is practicable, The Contractor snail also
keep the Engineer informed regarding his anticipated
concrete placing schedule. When all items have been found
to be in order by the Engineer including lines and grades,
' forms, reinforcing, inserts, piping, electrical, plumbing
and the Contractor's concreting materials and equipment,
the Engineer will then authorize the Contractor to proceed,
Unless authorized by the Engineer, no concrete shall be
placed in any unit prior to the completion of all form-work
and the placement of all reinforcement in that unit, 10
concrete shall be placed before the completion of all
adjacent operations which might prove detrimental to the
concrete, Whenever it is necessary to continue the mixing,
placing, and finishing of concrete after the daylight
hours, the site of the work shall be brilliantly lighted so
that all operations are plainly visible. In general,
however, concrete placing shall be so regulated as to
permit finishing operations to be completed in the daylight
hours, The Engineer reserves the right to order i
postponement of the placing operations when, in his
opinion, impending weather conditions may result In
rainfall or low temperatures which will impair the quality
of the finished work. In case rainfall should occur after
placing operations are started, the Contractor shall
provide ample covering to protect the work.
03300-23
1
i
1
I~
r
a
2, Cleaning Forms; At the time of placing COO cc reite, the forms
J r
sa}wdusite andanther extraneousrmatterm aFormsfor slab, beam
and girder construction shall not have tie wire cuttings,
nails, matches or any other matter whatsoever which would
mar the appearance of the finished construction. All forms
shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and
kept free of foreign matter of all kinds during concrete
placing,
U. HANDLING AND TRANSPORTING
Chutes, troughs, or pipes used as aids in placing concrete shall
be arranged and used so that the ingredients of the concrete
w
ill not be segregated. They shall be steel or steel lined.
When steep
w
of movement, Open ith necessary, the sreshall verse b the gdirection
necessary, downs inside the forms h or chutes
holes extend, in the
forms, and the ends of such chutes shall terminate in vertical
downspouts. All chutes, troughs, and pipes shall be kept clean
and free from coatings of hardened concrete by a thorough
flushing with water before and after placement. Water used for
flushing shall be discharged clear of the concrete in place.
Non-agitating trucks shall used only when authorized by the
Engineer with due consideration of the length of haul, roughness
of roads, and design of trucks proposed, Pumping of concrete
will be permitted, subject to approval of the pumping equipment
by the Engineer. The placing of concrete for floor slabs
preferably shall be done by a mixing plant located off the
structure. Carting or wheeling concrete batches on completed
concrete floor slab will :rot be permitted until the slab has
j aged at least four curing days, Unless pneumatic tired carts
are used, the carts shall be wheeled on timber planking so that
the loads and impact will be distributed over the slab. Curing
operations shall not be interrupted for the purpose of wheeling
concrete over finished slabs.
C. DEPOSITING
The method and manner of placing shall be such as to avuld the
possibility of segregation or separation of the aggregate or the
displacement of the reinforcement. In thin walls, drop chutes
of rubber or metal shall be used, fhe spattering of forms or
reinforcement bars shall be prevented if the concrete so
spatter?d will dry or harden before being incorporated in the
mass, Each part of the forms shall be filled by depositing
concrete directly as neer its final position as possible. The
coarse aggregate shall be worked back from the face and the
concrete forced under and around the reinforcement bars without
the forms and running or working It along the forms 011 not be
03300-24
. I
allowed, After the concrete has taken initial set, the forms
shall not be jarred or any strain placed on projecting ~
reinforcement, Where the Contractor's operations involve the
placing of concrete from above, that is, directly into an
excavated area or through the completed forms, parti:ularly in r
the case of walls, piers, columns, and similar structures, all
concrete so placed shall he deposited through vertical drop i
chutes of rubber or metal of satisfactory size. Drop chutes
shall be. made in sections or provided in several lengths so that
the outlet may be adjusted to proper heights during placing
operations. Concrete shall not be dropped free more than five
(5) feet. Concrete shall be placed in continuous horizontal
layers with a depth of from 1 to 3 feet, depending upon the wall
thickness, Each layer shall be soft when a new layer is placed
upon it, and unless otherwise specified herein or by the
Engineer, not more than one hour shall elapse between the
placing of successive layers of concrete in any portion of the
structures included in a continuous placement. The Contractor
should avoid additional construction joints other than those
shown on plans by planing required sections of piers, walls, or
superstructures in one continuous operation, {
If excessive bleeding causes water to form on the surface of the
concrete in tall forms the :nix shall be made drier to reduce the
bleeding, In tall walls the concrete shall be placed to a point
about a foot below the top of the wall, and at least one hour,
or more if specified by the Engineer, shall be allowed for
settling. Concreting should then be resumed and completed
before set occurs,
D. CONSOLIDATING
1, General: Each layer of concrete shall be well compacted and
the mortar flushed to the surface of the forms by
continuous working with mechanical vibrators of an approved
type. Vibrators of the type which operate by attachment to
forms will be permitted only when immersion type vibrators
cannot be ised due to inaccessibility. The vibrators shall
be applied to the concrete immediately after deposit and
shall be moved throughout the layer of concrete just
placed, and several inches into the plastic layer below,
thoroughly working the concrete around the reinforcement,
embedded fixtures, and into the corners and angles of the
forms until the concrete is thoroughly compacted.
Mechanical vibrators shall not be operated so that they
will penetrate or disturb layers placed previously which
have become partially set or hardened, and they shall not
be used to aid the flow of concrete laterally. The
vibration shall be of sufficient duration to accomplish
thorough compaction and complete embedment of reinforcement
and fixtures, but shall not be done to an extent that will
cause segregation. Vibrators shall be kept constantly
03300-25
c~
~j
ii
i
moving in the concrete and shall be applied vertically at
points uniformly spaced, not farther apart than the radius
over which the vibrator is visibly effective. The vibrator
shall not be held in one location longer than is required
to produce a liquified appearance on the surface.
2. Vibrators; Internal vibrators shall maintain a frequency J
when submerged in the concrete of not less than 6,000
Impulses per minute for spuds with diameters greater that) 5
Inches and 10,000 impulses for smaller spuds. The
intensity (amplitude) of vibration shall be sufficient to
produce satisfactory consolidation. A sufficient number of
vibrators (powered pneumatically or electrically) shall be
used to provide one for each ten cubic yards of concrete
per hour being placed. At least one vibrator, which may be
of the gasoline powered type, shall be immediately
available as a standby for each two vibrators in service.
The Engineer may require the Contractor to use a vibrator
of larger size and power if he feels, based on observed
performance, that it is necessary to produce satisfactory
consolidation. All vibrators intended for regular service
or standby service shall be checked and approved by the
Engineer prior to the beginning of the concreting
operations.
E. PLACING CONCRETE IN COLD WEATHER
Concrete placed in cold Heather shall be in accordance with the
recommendations of ACI 306R. No concrete shall be placed when
the atmospheric, temperature is at or below 40 degrees F. (taken
in the shade away from artificial heat) and falling, unless
permission to do so is given in writing by the Engineer. When
such permission is given, or in cases where the temperature
drops below 40 degrees F. after the concreting operations have
been started, the Contractor shall furnish sufficient canvas and ,I
framework or other type of housing to enclose and protect the
structure in such a way that the air around the forms and fresh
concrete can be kept at a temperature not less than 50 degrees
F. for a period of five days after the concrete is placed for
normal concrete, and for three days for high-early-strength
concrete. Sufficient heating apparatus such as stoves, Sala- j
rnanders, or steam equipment and fuel to furnish all required "
heat shall be supplied. It is understood that the Contractor is 1
responsible for the protection of concrete placed under any and
all weather conditions. Permission given by the Engineer to
place concrete during freezing weather will in no way relieie
the Contractor of the responsibility for satisfactory results.
Should concrete placed under such conditions prove rrnsatis-
factory, it shall be removed and replaced.
t
03300-26
r J
I
1
F. PLACING CONCRETE IN HOT WEATHER i
Concrete placed in hot weather shall be in accordance with the
recommendations of ACI 305R. The maximum temperature of any
concrete mix shall not exceed 90°F. at the time the concrete is
placed. The temperatures of the mixing water shall be reduced
by the use of chilled water or ice as required.
G. PLACING CONCRETE IN SLABS
Concrete in columns, walls, and deep beams or girders shall be
allowed to stand for at least one hour, or more if specified by
the Engineer, to permit full settlement due to consolidation
befof,e concrete is placed in the slabs they are to support.
Haunches are considered as part of the slab and shall be placed
integrally with them. When monolithic slabs are placed in
strips, the widths of the strips, unless otherwise specified or
shown, shall be such that the concrete in any one strip will not
be allowed to lie in place for more than one hour before the
adjacent strips are placed. Immediately before placing
concrete, the earth cushion to receive concrete shall be
thoroughly dampened to prevent too rapid absorption of moisture
from the concrete.
3.03 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. FINISHING SLABS
` 1. Screedingt As soon as concrete placing operations have been
r completed for a slab section of sufficient width to permit
finishing operations, the concrete shall be approximately
j leveled and then struck off, tamped, and screeded. The
screed shall be of a design adaptable to the use intended,
shall have provision for vertical adjustment, and shall be
sufficiently rigid to hold true to shape during use.
The initial strike off shall leave the concrete surface at
an elevation slightly above grade ~o that, when
consolidation and finishing operations are completed, the
surface of the slab will be at the grade elevation shown on
the plans. Tamping and screeding operations shall be
continued until the concrete is properly consolidated and
the surface voids are eliminated. The surface shall then
be brought to a smooth true alignment by means of
longitudinal screeding, floating, belting, and/or other
methods approved by the Engineer. When templates are used,
they shall be of such design as to permit early removal in
order to permit satisfactory finishing at and adjacent to
the template.
03300-27
m
ti
ti
it
i+
I
2. Straightness: While the concrete is still plastic, the
surface shall be straightedged by the use of a standard ten
(10) foot metal straightedge. Each pass of the
straightedge shall lap half of the preceding pass. All
high spots shall be removed and all depressions shall be
filled with fresh concrete and refloated. The checking
with straightedge shall continue during the final finishing i
operation until the surface is true to grade and free of
depressions, high spots, voids, or rough spots. The final
surface shall be checked with the straightedge and
ordinates measured from the face of the straightedge to the
surface of the slab shall not exceed one-sixteenth inch per
font froin the nearest point of contact and the maximum
ordinate shall be one-eighth inch per 10 feet,
3. Finishing Schedule: Except as elsewhere permitted in these
sidewalkstshallobeafinishedomonolithically. a The slabs
schedule of finishes shall apply, unless otherwise I
specified or shown on the plans:
TYPE OF FINISH
LOCATION
1 a. Steel Trowel Finish Slabs
b. Brush Finish: Sidewalks
4 4. Types of Finishes:
a. Steel Trowel Finish: After all surface moisture has
disappeared following the initial wood float finish,
surfaces shall be steel trowelled to a smooth, even,
impervious finish of uniform smoothness and color,
free from blemishes including trowel marks.
b. Brush Finish: Following the steel trowel finish,
surface of the concrete shall be brushed lightly with
a soft bristled brush. The brush shall be kept clean
and shall be dipped in water frequently so that it
will be clean and wet at all times. Brushing shall be
limited to that necessary to remove the glaze and
produce a nonslip surface.
5. Surfaces Requiring Drainage: Where indicated on the plans,
slabs shall be sloped to provide drainage with such slabs
to have a minimum thickness of that shown on the plans.
Where floor drains are shown in slabs and slope of floor is
not indicated, floors shall be sloped to drain on a grade
of one-sixteenth inch (1/1611) per foot with a maximum total
slope of one and one quarter inches (1-1/411). Thickness of
slab at floor drain shall be thickness of slab as indicated
on the plans. i
03300-28
6. Sidewalks: Sidewalks shall be given a brush finish,
Sidewalks shall be "flagged" at a spacing equal to the
width of the walk and edged on each side using an approved
tool having a radius of approximately one-quarter (1/4") f
inch.
7. Finishing in fiat, Dry Weather: During periods of high ;
temperature and/or low humidity, extreme care shall be
taken in the finishing of slabs to eliminate initial
shrinkage cracks. Following the initial set of concrete
but while the concrete is still "green", finishing shall
continue as required to remove shrinkage cracks which may
occur in the initial set of concrete. In hot, dry weather,
a cement finisher shall remain on the job following normal
finishing operations for a sufficient length of time to
insure the removal of initial shrinkage cracks.
B. FINISHING OF WALLS AND OTHER SURFACES
1. General: All concrete shall be finished as specified
hereinunder, Forms for w,lls, columns and sides of beams
and girders under normal conditions can be removed in 12-24 j
hours and all patching; repairing, finishing and cleaning
shall follow immediately after form removal and shall be
j completed as soon as practicable but within 7 days of form
removal. Careful attention shall be given to curing as
finishing progresses.
2. Concrete Finish Schedule:
Type of Finish
Location I~
1) Rubbed Finishes 1
a) Plaster Mix Finish Above grade surfaces of
3. Rubbed Finishes: the air unit base
a, Piaster Mix Finish: Areas designated to receive this
finish are to receive a two (2) coat application of
THOROSEAL PLASTER MIX, 1/8" to 1/4" in thickness, in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Form treatments or curing compounds shall not contain
any ingredients which might stain or otherwise prevent
a good bond to the concrete. Do not apply when
temperature is 407 or expected to drop below 40°F
within 24 hours after application. Prepare surface
according to manufacturer's recommendations.
Apply a key coat of THOROSEAL at a rate of 2 lbs. per
yard sq. by brush using 1 part ACRYL 60 to 3 parts of
03300.29
r.~
,I
it
a
~i
clean water. Allow this coat to dry 5 days, Next ~
apply a trowel coat of THOROSEAL PLASTER MIX using a
solution of 1 part of ACRYL 60 and 3 parts clean
water. Apply at the rate of 4 to 6 lbs. of mix per
sq. yard. Apply and cure according to manufacturer's
recommendations,
3,04 CURING CONCRETE
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS jI
Careful attention shall be given to the proper curing of all +
concrete. The curing methods shall be 1) wet curing; 2) sheet
materials conforming to ASTM C171 or 3) membrane curing compound
conforming to ASTM C309. Membrane curing is not permitted on
surfaces to be rubbed or on surfaces on which additional
concrete, mortar or terrazzo is to he applied. Sheet curing I
shall not be permitted when Type K cement is used.
Unless the curing method is otherwise rioted or specified the
curing method shall oe selected by the contractor and submitted
to the Engineer for approval.
6, LENGTH OF CURING PERIOD
All concrete shall be cured,for a period of seven consecutive
days, In cold weather, when curing may be retarded this period
shall be extended until 7 "curing-days" have passed, up to a
limit of 14 consecutive days.
C. CURING-DAY
A "curing-ddr" shall be any day on which the atmospheric
temperature taken in the shade, or the air temperature adjacent
to the concrete, remains above 50 degrees F, for at least 18
! hours.
D. APPLICATION
- 1. Wet Covering: The surface shall be covered by wet burlap,
cotton mats or canvas covering immediately following the
finishing operations and shall be kept thoroughly wet for a
period of four (4) curing-days after the concrete is
f placed, Covering shall be held in direct contact with the
concrete.
Water used for curing shall be free from injurious amounts
of oil, acid, alkali, salt, or other deleterious
C substances,
immediately following the finishing operations, concrete
slabs, includ,ng roof slabs shall be covered with wet
03300-30
i
Fi
~.i
j~
PI
cotton mats or with a temporary covering of canvas or i
burlap. The temporary covering will be required when the f
size of slab, size of mats, or other factors are such that 1
the mats cannot be placed immediately following the
finishing operations without marring the finishing of the
slab.
Canvas or burlap covering material shall avlq` not less
than twelve (12) ounces per square yard, and the sections
shall be placed with a lap at the edges of at least eight
(8) inches. Cover material shall be saturated with water
previous to placing and shall be kept saturated as long as
it remains in place. Care shall be exercised in the
placing of the cover material in order to prevent marring
the concrete surface.
When temporary coverings are used, they shall remain in
place only until the slab has hardened sufficiently that a
cotton mat covering can be substituted without marring or
disturbing the slab finish. Cotton mats shall be
thoroughly saturated before placing and shall be kept on
the slab in a saturated condition for a period of at least
four (4) curing.-days after the concrete is placed,
Curing by flooding or submerging concrete will not be
allowed.
2. Sheet Curing: Sheet materials when used shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM C171, They will be in contact
with the entire concrete surface and shall be applied in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. All
holes shall be patched and whera pedestrian traffic is
unavoidable, suitable walkv,ays shall be provided to protect
the sheet material,
3. Membrane Curing: The surface of the concrete shall be
covered with a continuous, uniform water impermeable
coating, meeting the requirements of ASTM C-309 "Liquid
Membrane Forming Coinoounds for Curing Concrete" and shall 1
be applied in accordance with ACI-308. Immediately after
removal of the side and end forms, the sides and ends of
all concrete shall receive a like coating. The solution
shall be applied under pressure with a spray nozzle in such
a manner as to cover the entire exposed surface thoroughly
and completely with a uniform film. Membrane curing shall
not be used on surfaces which will receive paint, floor
hardener or the like.
The rate of application shall be such as to insure complete
coverage, but the area covered shall not exceed one hundred
fifty (150) square feet per gallon of curing compound,
03300-31
I
~i
s
The coating shall be, sufficiently transparent and free from
permanent color to not result in a pronounced change in /
color from that of the natural concrete at the conclusion
of the curing period. It shall, however, contain a dye of j
color, y vible on
concreterforta perioddof ateleast four1(4)lhourslafter the J
application.
Under rmal conditions to the curing compound, after and
appl 'ion, shall dry
shat ry throughly and completely within f t r (4) flexi hours.
ble a con
uou When thoroughly dry, it shall provide and will not
membrane free from cracks or pinholes
disintegrate, check, peel, or crack during the required
r,uring period. if for any reason the seal is broken during
the curing period, it shall be immediately repaired with
additional sealing solution.
When tested Iii accordance with ASTM Specification,
Designation C-156, the curing compound shall provide a film
which will have retained within the specimen the following
percentages of the moisture present curing compound was applied; at least ninety-sevele(ast)
j percent of the end of twenty-four (24) hours , at
days, and
ninety-five (95) percent at the eat the seven (7)
at least ninety-one (91) percent
days.
i
3,0, FILLING TIE HOLES
After the tie rods are broken back or removed, the holes shall be
filled solid with non-shrink cement-sand cleanedd
remove all grease and loose particles packed intthen tar l as
o the holes in small
as practicable and to
I quantities. After 'the the holes es are completely filled, all excess mortar
°filledshole the surface a If manner these
shall be stru he
as to render
patches appear to ba darker than the other surface of the concrete,
white cement shall be used in the mortar as required.
3,06 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. GENERAL
concrete
ered forms ely.afifrtheesurface hofe the e removed
Any defectiveedkimmediat
shall be repair
is bulged, unevon, or shows excess honeycombing, or form marks,
which defects in the entire of thesEngineer,cannotabe repaired
satisfactorily, t
replaced.
I
03300-32
1
1
51
i
I~
E3. PATCHING /
Slight honeycomb and minor defects in all concrete surfaces
shall be patched with cement mortar mixed in the same
proportions of cement and fine aggregate as the original
concrete. Finished surfaces containing sand streaks or voids
will not be acceptable, and shall be repaired by cutting out the
unsatisfactory material and replacing it with dry pack mortar
which shall be securely keyed and bonded to the old concrete and
finished in such a manner as to render the jointing as
inconspicuous
plthan
thoroughly shall
tamped drier
ace,
Each defective area shall be cut back with pneumatic chipping
tool as deep as the defect extends and in no case less than one
inch. The holes shall then be painted with an approved bonding
agent, such as Darweld C, and then filled to within
three-fourths with her Simortarasdirected by the Engineer and temainderof the hole
filled with regular dry
three-fourths inch deep shallmbetfilledowithlnon-shrink
cement-sand mortar for the full depth. The surface of such !
j patches shall then be finished as specified for tie holes. All
dry pack mortar shall be driven into place with suitable hammer
and wooden blocks.
END OF SECTION
a
I
i
f
t
{
03300-33
It
r
4
d
05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish all labor and material, equipment and incidentals necessary ;
to perform all fabrication of all structural steel shown on the
drawings and specified herein. Furnish all structural steel shapes,
columns, base plates, fabricated components and bolts, washers, nuts,
rivets or other fasteners necessary to complete the work.
Furnish all labor and equipment for the delivery and erection of
structural steel components at the job site, including all temporary
bracing, guying, supports, etc., that may be necessary during
erection. Erection procedure shall be in compliance with
governmental safety standards currently In effect.
1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS
Submit six (6) copies of complete and detailed shop drawings in
accordance with Section 5 of the SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, SHOP
DRAWINGS, to the Engineer for approval. Shop drawings shall include
all items which require manufacture or fabrication and shall show all
sizes and arrangement of members, character of construction, strength
1 of connections and fabrication details.
Drawings indicate the design, sections and weights of members.
Substitutions will NOT be permitted except upon written permission,
for abrication
Dimensions
shall h determines acshall not be tual dimensions used
of the
tractor from
and the Con
structure.
1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS
Applicable provisions of the current editions of the following codes
are hereby incorporated in this specification and shall govern all
work to the same extent as if found herein:
AISC, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"
except Section 4.2.1 is excluded in its entirety.
`-J AISC, "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of
Structural Steel for Buildings"
AWS, D1.1-82 American Welding Society, "Structural Welding Code -
Steel"
AISC, "Specification for ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts"
i
05120-1
I
I
i
q
I i
1.04 SHOP FABRICATION INSPECTION
The Owner through its Engineer reserves the right to inspect all
fabrication procedures, including welding; and at his own expense may
appoint an Independent Testing Laboratory to perform such tests as
desirable. The fabricator shall give access to the Engineer at all
times during fabrication of work under this contract.
The fabricator shall give notice when fabrication is underway, in
addition, he shall furnish the inspector a set of approved shop
drawings during inspection tours,
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. STRUCTURAL STEEL.
Unless otherwise noted on plans, all ::cructural steel shall
conform to the Standard Specification ASTM A6, latest edition,
and shall meet the following,
Yield Strength ASTM Designation
36,000 psi A 36
B. UNFINISHED BOLTS AND NUTS
Unfinished bolts and nuts shall conform to ASTM Standard A307
and shall be the regular hexagon-bolt type.
I f C. TURNED BOLTS AND NUTS
Bolts and nuts not otherwise designated shall conform to ASTM A
307,
D. HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS AND NUTS
Bolts and nuts Shall conform to ASTM Specifications A-325. Bolt
and nut dimensions and threads shall be in accordance with
FUnariran Standard B 18.2 for regular semi-fiiiished hexagon bolts
and heavy semi-finished hexagon nuts.
E. WASHERS I
Round washers shall conform to American Standard B 27,2, Type B.
Washers in contact with high-strength bolt heads and nuts shall
be hardened in accordance with ASTM Standard A-325. Beveled
washers shall be square, smooth, and sloped so that confect
surfaces of bolt head and nut are parallel. 'The diameter of the
hole of square-beveled washers shall be 1/16" greater than the
bolt size for bolts not larger than 111, and 1/8" greater than
the bolt size for bolts larger than 1".
05120-2
I
J
it
i~
~f
F. FILLER METAL FOR WELDING
' (1) Welding electrode for manual schedules metal arc-weloing
f/
shall conform to AWS Specifications. Bare electrodes and
granular flux used in submerged-arc p,r ess shall conform
to Section 1.4.5 of AISC "Specifications for the Design,
Fabrication and Erection of Structural steel for
Buildings."
(2) Only E 70 Series electrodes for manual aic welding and
electrodes conforming to AWS A5.17-80 for submerged arc
process shall be used for welding F36 steel.
G. SHOP PAINT
Shop painting shall be as specified in Section 09905, PLANT
PAINTING.
H. SHOP FINISH (OPTION) i
All structural and miscellaneous steel shall be hot dipped
galvanized after fabrication. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM
A 123 and ASTM A 386.
1. FIELD FINISH
Touch up cut edqes, damaged areas, and welded areas of
galvanizing with two coats of M.I. Spec. MIL-P-21035 or approved
zinc-rich paint.
3.00 EXECUTION
I
3.01 FABRICATION
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified, the
fabrication of structural steel shall be in accordance with the
American Institute of Steel Construction "Specifications for the
Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings,"
latest edition.
J Structural members consisting primarily of a single rolled shape and
shall be straight within appropriate tolerances. Compression members
shall not deviate from straightness by more than 1/100 of the axial ;
length between points which are to be laterally supported, i
A variation of 1/32" is permissible in the overall length of members
with both ends milled. Members without milled ends which are to be
framed to other steel party of the structure may have a variation
frc.n the detailed length not greater than 1/16" for members 3010"or
less in length and not greater than 1/8" for members over 3010"in
length.
05127-3
i
The use of gas cutting preferably by machine is permissible provided 11
the metal cut is riot carrying stresses during the operation. Gas cut
edges which will be subjected to substantial stress or which hav
weld metal deposited on them shall be free from gouges; any g 9es
that remain from cutting shall be removed by grinding. To determine
the effective width of members so cut, 1/8" shall be deducted from
ascllargas ge as Cut edge rbutune~errlesstthant an gas cat fillets shall be
Planing or finishing of sheared or gas cut edges of plates or shapes
will not be required unless specifically called for on the drawings,
except that all edges to be fitted to other members by welding, such
as columns at bearing plate shall be milled. Compression joint
depending upon contact bearing, shall have the bearing faces truly
machined to a common plane. All other joints shall be cut straight.
All columns and stiffeners shall be milled to give full bearing over
the cross section.
columns,aandnconnectiontstiffenersgandagussets whetheornspecificallynd
shown on plans or not.
3,02 BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
than the
Holes for btthehthickness ,of the materialtis nominal diameter of
the he bolt. If the holes may be punched. If
nominal diameter of the bolt plus 1/S",
either nomifromnal
the thickness of thethematerial
holes shalllgreater
the bolt plus 1/8", {
matching sub-punched and reamed.
rebolts jectionshall be reamed. Poor
Holes ~ ing a cf MUCt eshallrbe causeadmit
When assembled, all joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the
washers, shall be free of scale except tight mill scale. They shall
be free of dirt, loose scale, s, Cand other ontact defectswi at would
surfaces thin
prevent solid, seating of the parts,
friction-tYpe joints shall be free of oil, paint, lacquer or
galvanizing.
/ All A-325 bolts shall be tightened to a bolt tension not less than
the proof load given in the app Spifications for the
type of bolt used. Tightening shall be done with propeldcalibrate
wrenches, by the turn-of-nut method, or by use of approve
calibrated washers such as Bethlehem "Load Indicator Washer
3.03 WELDED CONSTRUCTION
Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust,
grease, paint, and any other foreign material exc'Jopt that mill scale
withstanding vigorous wire brushing may remn. 05120-4
I
1
,
be free from fins and tears. Preparation of edges by gas cutting
shall, wherever practicable, be done by mechanically guided torch,
The technique of welding employed, the appearance and quality of r
welds made, and methods used in correcting defective work shall
conform to Section 4, "Technique", of the Current Edition of the
"Structural Welding Code - Steel" by the American Welding Society.
Welds shall be made only by welders and welding operators who have
been previously qualified by tests as prescribed in the American
Welding Society's "Structural Welding Code-Steel", to perform the
type of work required,
3.04 SHOP CLEANING AND PAINTING
After inspection and approval and before leaving the shop, all steel
work shall be thoroughly cleaned by effective means of all loose
scale, rust, splatter, slag, flux, deposit, oil, dirt, and other
foreign matter, in accordance with ASTM A123 and A386.
Except where to be encased in concrete, or edges to be field welded,
all steel shall be given one shop coat of rust-inhibitive primer, as
specified in Section 09905, PLANE PAINTING,
All machine finished surfaces snail be protected against corrosion by
an approved coating,
3.05 ERECTION OF STEEL
i
Steel shall be erected in accordance with the Standard Specifications
of the American Institiote for Steel Construction, All erection shall
be performed by workmen experienced in this form of work.
The framing shall be carried up true and plumb and temporary bracing
shall be introduced wherever necessary to take care of all loads to
which the structure may be subjected, including erection equipment
and its operation. Such bracing shall be left in place as long as
may be required for safety, Ie shall finally be removed by the
Contractor as part of his equipment. As erection progresses, the
work shall be securely connected to take care of all dead load, wind,
\-J and erection stresses,
3,06 BOLTED FIELD CONNECTION
High strength bolts shall be used for field connections, and shall
have a suitable identifying mark on top the head.
Tightening of nuts shall be done with properly calibrated wr,».ches or
by the turn-of-nut method, The minimum bolt tension for the size of
bolt used shall be in accordance with tables listed in the above
r^ferenced standards. When calibrated wrenches are used, each
r•rrnch shall be checked for accuracy at least once daily for actual
05120-5
i
'f
't
i
conditions of applications, Approved load indicator washers
(Bethlehem) may be used. fJ
3,07 WELDED FIELD CONNECTION f
i
Welds shall be made only by operators who have previously qualified
by tests, as prescribed by the Standard Qualifications Procedure" in
he "Structural Welding Code-Steer, by the American Welding Society,
to perform the type of work required, The Contractor shall provide
the certification that welders have passed qualification test within
six months just prior to performance of work. All field welds shall
be of the type indicated on the drawings or specified herein. All
welding must be approved,
3.08 CUTTING HOLES
The use of a gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting
fabrication errors will be permitted on structural framing members
provided that approval of the Engineer is first obtained for each
specific condition.
3.09 SETTING PLATES
Column base plates and leveling plates shall be set level to correct
elevations and temporarily supported on steel wedges or shims until
the supported members have been plumbed and grouted. The entire
bearing area under plates shall be grouted solid with nonshrink
grout.
I
3.10 TEMPLATES
Templates shall be furnished as indicated on drawings, The
Contractor shall furnish instructions for the setting of anchors,
connection details, and bearing plates and shall ascertain that the
items are properly set during the progress of the work.
END OF SECTION
f
05120-b
05710 MISCELLANEOUS METALS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
t~
Furnish and install all miscellaneous and ornamental specialty metal
work shown on the drawings or specified herein. Provide anchors,
hangers, rods, bars, brackets or fasteners required to complete this
work and to connect to work by others, Provide inserts for concrete
where necessary.
Submit six (6) copies of shop drawings for all miscellaneous metals
in accordance with Section 5 of the SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, SHOP
DRAWINGS, for Lngineer's approval prior to beginning any work.
1.02 FABRICATION
When a specific manufacturer's article or apparatus is specified, it
shall be applied, assembled, or otherwise installed in accordance
with the manufacturer's specifications.
Insofar as possible, all itc,ms shall be shop fabricated and assembled
ready for erection. Fabricate articles to proper shape with sharp
lines and smooth surfaces. Connections shall be securely welded,
bolted or riveted and welds shall be dressed smooth on exposed
surface:. Thickness of metal and component parts shall be of size
adequate to withstand strains reasonably anticipated for its usage.
Provide lugs, rabbets or brackets to allow for proper assembly and
close fit, Exposed edges and ends of metal shall be dressed smooth
where expor2d.
Castings shall he of proper design, sound and exposed p •ts shall
have no blemishes, Remove fins, casting lugs, or other unnecessary
parts, grind rough edges and shape for fit with other component
parts.
2.00 MATERIALS
A. STEEL ROLLED SHAPES
ASTM A36, having a minimum yield strength not less than 36,000
psi.
B. MISCELLANEOUS STEEL
i
ASTM A-36. Platos and bars shall conform to ASTM A-284,
C. CAST STEEL, GENERAL PURPOSE
ASTM A-27, Grade 65-35
i
05710-1
i
±1
I
I
D, CAST STEEL, STRUCTURAL
ASTM A148, Grade 80-50. f~
E. STEEL. FORGINGS f
ASTM A668, Class C or F.
F. CAST IRON
Soft, gray iron, ASTM A-48, Class 30, 30,000 psi tensile
strength. Accessories and connections shall be steel unless
noted otherwise.
G. GALVANIZING j
Galvanized r:etals shall conform to ASTM A-123 and ASTM A-386.
rl, WELDING ELECTRODES
Electrodes shall be of the type required for the purpose
intended, Use E70 series for manual arc welding.
1. ALUMINUM
I
Aluminum shall be of an alloy suitable for the function
intended. finish shall be as noted on the drawings, otherwise
shall be of recognized industry standard for the type of
component.
J. FASTENERS
Fasteners shall be of the type required for the purpose intended
and particular application and shall be of a recognized industry
standard for the type of components. Fasteners shall include:
Masonry Sleeve Anchors - Molly "Parasleeve", Ramset 110yna Bolt",
or approved equal.
Concrete Expansion Bolts - Hilti "Kwik Bolt" or approved equal
Hollow Wall Fasteners - Hilti "Kwik Tog" or approved equal
Plaster and Drywall Fasteners - Plastic insert wedges
Adhesive anchors - Hilti "HVA Adhesive Anchor" or approved equal
K. SHOP PAINT
All ferrous metals shall receive one coat of rust-inhibitive
primer as specified in Section 09905, PLANT PAINTING.
05710-2
;I
,r
3.00 EXECUTION ~
3.01 MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURAL FABRICATION {
Steel components shall
shapes, or bent plates be shop fabricated of standard
to the designs structural 1
be shop assembled shown on the drawings
shall Set
Ri
by welding or bolting, frames in place
ven, level and square in all directions and securely brace . Frames
e to
prevent displacement until built into construction.
3.02 MISCEILANEOUS FABRICATION
Fabricate all miscellaneous steel components, rack, stands, supports,
or other items to the design noted on the drawings and utilizing
structural shapes, bent plates, sheet steel or other material as
required to construct the item, Generally, assembly shall be by
welding with all joints ground smooth.
plates and anchor bolts as re uii. Provide brackets fillets,
paint. q d and finish with one coat of shop
3.03 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMES
Fabricate frames as detailed by welding,
best modern practice, Frames shall betrue ltondimensioneandsshallgbe
set pl,mb and securely braced to prevent displacement until built
into construction.
Provide welding frames at each roof penetration for mechanical
equipment, including exhaust fans, flues and ventilators. Frames
shall be field welded across top chords of steel joist and shall be
of sizes required by equipment. Provide holes in outstanding angle
legs for bolting wood curbs.
3.04 WELDED FIELD CONNECTION
Welds shall be made only by operators who have previcusi
y qualified
he " by tests, as plesc rib d by he "Standard Qualifications Procedure" in Wel
din
Code ~ II to perform the type ofgwork re uired, by the American Welding Society
the certification that welders have passe
The Contractor d qualification atestrwithin
six months just prior to performance of work.
be of the type indicated on the drawings or specifiedeherein. shall
welding must be approved, All
3.05 ALUMINUM ACCESS LADDER
Aluminum access ladders shall be located as shown on the Plans and
shall be constructed of Schedule 40 1-112" size aluminum pipe
stringers at 21-0" c/c with standard aluminum non-slip safety rungs
spaced as shown on the Plans, Expansion bolts for mounting ladders
shall be stainless steel, Kwik Bolts or approved equal.
END OF SECTION
05710-3
T
3
09905 PLANT PAINTING
1.00 GENERAL v
1.01 SCOFF.
The work covered by this item of the Specifications includes furn-
ishing all paint, labor, materials and necessary equipment and
performing all operatioris in accordance with this section of the
Specifications and applicable portions of the Plans.
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and
services for cleaning and painting of surfaces as follows:
A. All metal work, equipment and machinery except stainless steel,
aluninum.
B. All structural steel.
C. All exposed new piping, except PVC piping.
Alumin,;n surfaces in contact with or embedded in concrete shall be
treater. in accordance with Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
Buried pipe and valves shall receive shop applied protective coatings
as described in the appropriate section for these items.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor steal] submit six (6) sets of full and complete shop
drawings on the paint in accordance with the Section 5 of the
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, SHOP ORAW..IGS. Data shall completely
describe the paint system being offered and shall include color codes
and all pertinent engineering data required for a complete evaluation
of the submittal, Submittal data shall be presented in such form
that the Engineer may readily review the data.
Materials specified are those that have been evaluated for the speci-
fic service. Products of the Tnemec Co. are listed to establish a
standard of quality. Equ',valent materials of other manufacturers may
be substituted on written approval of the Engineer.
Requests for substitution shall include manufacturer's literature for
each product giving the name, product number, generic type, descrip-
tive information, solids by volume, recommended dry film thickness
and certified test reports showing results to equal the performance
criteria of the products specified herein, In addition, a list of
five projects shall be submitted in which each product has been used
and rendered satisfactory service.
09905-1
i
All -equesLs for product substitution shall be made at least sixty
(60) days prior to paint application. Any material savings resulting
from a product substitution shall be passed to the Owner in the form
of a contract dollar reduction.
Manufacturer's :olor charts shall be submitted to the Engineer at
least thirty (30) days prior to paint application, General Contrac-
tor and Painting Contractor shall coordinate work so as to allow
sufficient time (normally seven to ten days) for paint to be de-
livered to the job site. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility
to verify that the paint used for surfaces in contact with water in
any stage of treatment is suitable for use with potable water.
The Contractor shall also suhmit upon completion of the project, a
complete description of the cleaning procedure for each type of
coating product and a record of colors used on this project, includ-
irig manufacturer and color identification number. If coating is a
special mixture, the mixture is to be described in adequate detail to
allow duplication of the exact color.
1
1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
A. Without limiting the general aspects of other requirements of
these specifications, all surface preparation, coating and pain-
ting of interior and exterior surfaces shall conform to the
applicable requirements of the Steel Structures Painting Council
and the manufacturer's printed instructions.
j B. The Engineer's decision shall be final as to interpretation
and/or conflict between any of the reference specifications and
standards contained herein, "
1.04 CONTRACTOR i
The Contractor shall have five years practical experience and
successful history in the application of specified products. Upon
request, he shall substantiate this requirement by furnishing a list 1
of references and job completions,
2.00 PRODUCTS
_J 2,01 MATERIALS
A. GENERAL
1
The coating material shall not show excessive settling In a
freshly opened full can and shall be easily re-disbursed with a
paddle to a smooth, homogenous state. It shall show no curd-
ling, livering, caking, or color separation and shall be
free from lumps and skins.
09905-2
fl
I
t
Only the highest grade coating of each manufacturer and that
which is suitable for the use intended will be approved, Only
those thinners and solvents specified by the paint manufacturer
for use with the coating will be used, More than the prescribed
amount of thinner may be added only to the extent of maintaining
the minimum spreading rate designated in each individual formu-
lation. The manufacturer's recommendations for the maximum
amount of thinner shall not be exceeded under any circumstances,
8. SCHEDULE OF PRODUCTS
Products used on this project shall be as indicated in this
Schedule of Products, Primers, primary, and finish coats must
be of one manufacturer. Colors shall be factory mixed and all
coatings for this project must be from the same batch.
Products for this project shall be;
TYPE A - Alkyd-phenolic universal primer shall be Tnemec Ser'?s
37-77 Chem-Prime.
i
TYPE 4 - Epoxy-pulyamide primer shall be Tnemec Series 65,
TYPE C - Alkyd enamel coating shall be Tnemec Series 23
Enduratone.
'I TYPE D - Epoxy-polyamide coatings shall he Tnemec Series 66.
TYPE E - Epoxy-polyamide coatings for potable water shall be
Tnemec Series 20, Pota-Pox system,
TYPE F - Epoxy-polyamide coatings for walking surfaces shall be
Tnemec. Series 67, Tneme-bread,
TYPE G - High-build acrylic polyurethane enamel shall be Tnemec
Series 73, Endura-shield 111.
TYPE H - Aliphatic polyurethane enamel shall be Tnemec Series
71, Endura-Shield,
TYPE. 1 - Modified acrylic coatings shall be Tnemec Series 12,
Spra-oaf.
LJ
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 STORAGE {
The Contractor shall use one convenient location at each site for
keeping all materials and performing all mixing, etr„ The floor of
this space shall be properly protected with drop cloths. All coat-
ings and paints shall be stored In enclosed structures to protect
them from weather and excessive heat or cold, At all times coatings
I
04905-3
I
i
i
i
I
1
a
and paints shall be protected from freezing, All containers shall be
~
kept covered at all times and the area shall be maintained in a clear,
condition, Oily rags and waste shall be frequently removed and under /
no circumstances shall waste be. allowed to accumulate, The Contractor f
' shall provide adequate safeguards to prevent fires. Flammable coat-
ings or paints must be stored to conform with City, County, State and
Federal safety codes for flammable coating or paint materials. At
the completion of the work, the Contractor shall clean off all paint
spots, oil dnd stain from all surfaues and leave the entire project
in a satisfactory condition.
Coatings shall be delivered to the job in original containers with
labels intact and seals unbroken and they shall be observed thus by
the field representative before opening. Each container shall be
marked with the name of the manufacturer and the specification
number. They shall not be used until the Engineer has inspected
contents and obtained data from information on containers or label.
Materials exceeding storage life recommended by the manufacturer
` shall be rejected.
f 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. GENERAL
All surfaces sha'tl be throughly cleaned before applying coat-
ings. Where field cleaning of the surface is required, the
r surfaces shall receive one coat of shop primer to protect the
surface until time for final preparation and coating at the
site. When written instructions from the paint manufacturer
allow, coating may be directly applied to the surface after
field preparation without application of the primer indicated in
f the finish schedule, Where application of a primer is required,
and for all shop prepared surfaces, the appropriate primers
shall be applied in accordance with the finish schedule. Shop
coated surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before application
of subsequent coats in the field.
B. SURFACE PREPARATION SCHEDULE
Surface preparation for this project shall be of the fallowing
types:
TYPE A - FIELD PREPARATION 01: METAL SURFACES, NEAR WHITE BLAST
CLEANING
Surfaces shall receive one coat of shop primer to protect the
surfaces until time for final preparation and coating at the
site. Metal surfaces shall be cleaned to near white metal by
sandblasting in accordance with SSPC SP10 "Near-White Blast
Cleaning", using 16 to 35 mesh sand. Due precaution shall be
taken during sandblasting operations to prevent, gouging and
channeling of the metal caused by excessive localized
sandblasting.
09905-4
a
TYPE B - FIELD PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES, COMMERCIAL BLAST I
CLEANING
Metal surfaces shall be throughly cleaned of al'r mill scale,
rust, and other foreign matter by sandblasting to a gray metal
in accordance with SSPC-SP6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning". All
sandblasting shall he done after erection unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer,
l Any surface that is sandblasted shall be throughly cleaned of
sand and dust and the surface coateii the same day it is sand-
blasted. All sand used in the sandblasting operations, rust, and
scale accumulating from the cleaning operations, and all other
materials shall be removed by the Contractor. All sandblasted
surfaces shy be swept clean again after all blasting is com-
pleted, In the event that sandblasted surfaces are not coated
immediately after cleaning and rust reforms on sandblasted
surfaces, such rusty surface shall be re-cleaned by blasting
again immediately before coating,
E TYPE r - FIELD PREPARATION OF CONCRETE SURFACES
All concrete surfaces which require coating shall be dry and
shall be prepared by light sandblasting. Sandblasting shall be
sufficient to remove all dirt, dust, efflorescence, oil, grease,
stains and other foreign substances and shall provide adequate
surface roughening for good adhesion 1)etween the concrete and
t coating,
TYPE D - SHOP PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES
All exterior metal surfaces except those specified for field
preparation may be shop cleaned by blasting as described
I below, Heavy deposits of oil, grease, etc., shall be removed as
required before blasting. Prime and finish coats shall be as
specified. All exterior steel surfaces shall be grit blasted to
remove all mill scale and runt. The metal surfaces shall be
blasted to a gray metal finish in accordance with SSPC-SP6,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning" The blasted surface shall be free
of dust, oil or moisture and shall be primed immediately after
cleaning with primer as indicated in the Finish Schedule.
Slag and weld metal accumulation and spatters not removed by the
Fabricator, ErectoH or Installer shall be removed by chipping
and grinding. All sharp edges shall be peened, ground or
otherwise blunted.
Areas adjacent to welds or other, areas where the shop primer has
been damaged shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with Type
B Preparation as described in this section. In order to prevent
injury surrounding painted areas blast cleaning may require use
of lower air pressure, small nozzle and abrasive particle sizes,
09905-5
1
n
short blast nozzle distance f-om surface shielding and masking, a
if damage is too extensive or uneconomical to touch-up, then the
entire item shall be recleaned and coated or painted in accord-
ance with these specifications. All welds and irregular surface `
shall receive a brush coat of the specified primer prior to
application of the first coat.
3.03 APPLICATION Of COATINGS
A. PROTECTIOLl OF PROPERTY
All adjacent work and materials are to be protected from soiling
or damage. Covers and drop cloths are to be used to cover
floors and installed equipment. When painting is completed, the
Contractor shall clean off all spots, oil, and stains from all
surfaces and leave the ar(~a in finished condition.
B. WORKMANSHIP AND METHODS
In all cases, all surface preparation and application of
coatings shall be in accordance with applicable standards of the
Steel Structures Painting Council and the manufacturer's
recommendations, All paint and finishing materials shall be
applied by skilled workmen and shall be brushed or sprayed in
even, thorough coats, without runs, crazing, sags or other
blemishes,
Material applied prior to approval of the surface by the
Engineer shall be removed and reapplied after receiving
subsequent approval by the Engineer, at the Contractor's
expense.
The first coat is to be applied completely, including all cut-
ting in around edges, before the second coat is applied. The
second coat is not to be applied before notifying the project
field representative that the first coat has been completed and
is ready for testing,
All coats, regardless of material,, shall be thoroughly dry
before applying succeeding coats.
Full drying time as recommended by the manufacturer of the
particular coating involved shall be allowed between coats.
Enamel shall be properly sanded between coats.
No work is to be done under conditions which are unsuitable for
the production of good results. The manufacturer's directions
regarding temperature and humidity are to be followed. Coatings
applied under conditions considered adverse per the manufac-
turers written directions will be removed and reapplied under
the recommended conditions. When artificial heat is used to
09905-6
raise the temperature of the working area to the recommended
temperature, it shall be of the type which does not produce
fumes which could discolor or otherwise harm the coating system. l /
Surfaces of items to be. coated which will be inaccessible after
erection or installation shall he prepared and coated before
installation.
Finish field painting shall not be applied to machinery, equip-
ment or piping until operational tests are complete. Areas dam-
aged by testimq procedures or damaged by subsequent corrections
to equipment shall be properly prepared as specified in Para-
graph 3.02 of this specification and shall receive additional
coatings as necessary to bring the coating to the specified
thickness, free from holiday:.
At least one week shall be allowed for drying time for the
finished system before placing the equipment or structures in
service.
i
Special care shall be taken to protect all name plates and other
identification plates on equipment to be painted. The plates
shall be masked or otherwise protected during painting. The
plates shall be carefully cleaned when coating operations have
been completed,
3.04 TESTING
A. GENERAL
I
Quality assurance procedures and practices shall be utilized to ,
monitor all phases of surface preparation, application and
inspection throughout the duration of the project. Procedures
or practices not specifically defined herein may be utilized
provided they moet recognized and accepted professional stan-
dards and are approved by the Engineer.
S. SURFACE PREPARATION
Surface preparation will be based upon comparison with:
"Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel
Surfaces", SSPC-Vis 1 ASTM Designation D220; "Standards Methods
of Evaluation Degree of Rusting on Painted Steel Surfaces",
SSPC-Vis-2 ASTM Designation 0610; "Visual Standard for surfaces
of New Steel Airblast Cleaned with Sand Abrasive".
C. APPLICATION
No coating or paint shall be applied: when the surrounding air
temperature or the temperature of the surface to be coated or
painted is below 60 degrees F.; to wet or damp surfaces or in
rain, snow, fog or mist; when the temperature is less than 5
09905-7
i
ICI I
{
l
1
degrees F. above the dewpoint; when it is expected the air
temperature will drop below 60 degrees F. within six hours after
application of coating and paint, Dewpoint shall be measured by J'
use of an instrument such as a Sling Psychrometer in conjunction
with U.S. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychrometric
Tables,
If above conditions are prevalent, coating or painting shall be
delayed or postponed until conditions are favorable. The day's
coating or painting small be completed in time to permit the
film sufficient drying time prior to exposure to adverse atmos-
pheric conditions.
D, THICKNESS AND HOLIDAY TESTING
After each coat has been applied, the paint film thickness will
be checked by the Field Representative. Thickness of coatings
will be checked with a non-destructive, magnetic type thickness
gauge. The total dry film thickness of the first coat will not
be less than 75% of the amount specified in the FINISH SCHEDULE.
l If the thickness specified for the first coat is less than 75%
of the thickness specified, additional coats sill be applied
until the specified thickness has been obtained before applying
` the successive coats,
1 If the total thickness specified for the finished system is less
than the thickness specified, additional finish coats shall be
applied until the specified thickness has been obtained.
The entire coated surface will also be checked with a Tinker and
Razor M-1 Holiday Detector, or equal, For thicknesses between
10 and 20 mils (250 microns and 500 microns) a non-sudsing type
wetting agent, such as Kodak Photo-Flo, shall be added to water
prior to wetting the detector sponge. All pinholes shall be
marked, repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
recommendations and retested. No pinholes or other irregulari-
ties will be permitted in the final coating. Areas containing
holidays shall receive additional coats until holiday free,
E. ACCESS FOR INSPECTION
Adequate illumination shall be provided while work is in pro-
gress, including explosion-proof lights and electrical equip-
inent, Whenever required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
provide additional illumination and necessary supports to cover
all areas to be inspected, The level of illumination for inspec-
tion purposes shall be determined ty the Engineer.
All temporary ladders and scaffolding shall conform to applic-
able safety requirements, They shall be erected where requested
by the Engineer to facilitate inspection and be moved by the
Contractor to locations requested by the Engineer.
09905-8
T
F. INSPECTION DEVICES
The Contractor shall furnish, until final acceptance of coating
and painting, inspection devices in good working condition for '
detection of holidays and measurement of dry-film thickness of
coating and paint, The Contractor shall also furnish U.S.
Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards certified
thickness calibration plates to test accuracy of dry-film
thickness gauge and certified instrumentation to test accuracy
of holiday detectors, The Engineer may elect to use his own
elcometer paint thickness gauge and his own Tinker and Razor
holiday detector, at his option.
Dry-film thickness gauges and holiday detectors shall be made
available for the Engineer's use at all times until final
acceptance of application. Holiday detection devices shall be
operated by the paint Contractor in the presence of the
Engineer.
G. INSPECTION REPORTS
The Contractor shall provide an inspection report for each
coating applied. A report shall be required for each coating
type and each surface coated. The inspection report shall be
filed on a form as attached to this section of the specifica-
tions and shall bear the signature of the Contractor and Field
Representative.
H. WARRANTY INSPECTION
Warranty inspection shall be conducted during the eleventh month
following completion of all coating and painting work. All
defective work shall be repaired in accordance with this speci-
fication and to the satisfaction of the Engineer/Owner,
4.00 FINISH SCHEDULE
4.01 COLOR SELECTION
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, a color selection guide
II in accordance with paragraph 1.02 of this section, which will show
1 the various shades, colors, etc., available for the coating system
-J being submitted for approval. Colors will be submitted to the Owner
by the Engineer for final color selection.
A two color system shall be used for coating all surfaces receiving
more than one coating. Each coat shall be easily distinguished from
the final coating color selected and shall be a color that will not
bleed, discolor or be visible through the final coat applied, The
Contractor shall have the option of selecting the color of the
coatings applied beneath the finish coat,
09905-9
4.02 FINISH SCHEDULE ~
Where exposure conditions are listed in this finish schedule the
following guidelines shall apply in determining the correct exposure:
Interior - Surfaces completely enclosed in buildings or strut- J
Lures.
Exterior - Surfaces exposed to direct sunlight, blowing rain,
dust, etc. This shall include surfaces covered by awnings or
other protective structures but open on the sides in such a
manner as to afford exposure to the elements.
Submerged Surfaces - All surfaces which will be under water
constantly or periodically during operation of the facllity.
Where surfaces continue out of the water or other liquids,
painting in accordance with provisions for submerged surfaces
shall be applied to a point one (1) foot above the maximum high
water level. The line of change between application of coats
for submerged surfaces and above water surfaces shall be a
straight level line.
Above Water Surfaces - Any surface located directly above any
process structure or other structure designer] to constantly or
periodically contain water or other liquids.
Coatings shall be applied in accordance with the following schedule,
STRUCTURAL STEEL AND MISCELLANEOUS METALS - INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR
Preparation Required - Type B or D
Coat No. Coat" Type Min. Covera e Mils
f _ ry m _
1 A 2.0
2 C 3.0
3 C 3.0
II Total Dry Film Thickness .0
f STRUCTURAL STEEL AND MISCELLANEOUS METALS - ABOVE WATER SURFACES
Preparation Required - Type B or D
Coat No. Coat Type Min, Covera a Mils
- (Dry i m
1 B 2.0
2 D 5.0
3 G 3.0
Total Dry Film Thickness 'F6-.
09905-10
I
STRUCTURAL STEEL AND MISCELLANEOUS METALS - SUBMERGED
Preparation Required - Type A
Coat No. Coat Type Min. Coverage (Mils) I
~._7-
Dry FTfn~j~
i 1 B 2.0
2 E 5.0
3 E 5.0
Total Dry Film Thickness TT.T
I
gUIPMENT, PUMPS, MOTORS, VALVES AND PIPING - INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR
Preparation Required - Type B or D
Coat No. Coat Type Min. Coverage Mils
ry i m
1 B 2.0
f 2 0 4.0
3 G 3.0
'total Dry Film Thickness IT
EQUIPMENT, PUMPS, VALVES AND PIPING- ABOVE WATER SURFACES
Preparation Required - Type 8 or D
I
Coat No. Coat Type Min. Covera p (Mils)
rY Tm)
1 B 2.0
' 2 D 5.0
3 G 3.0
Total Dry Film Thickness T"
EQUIPMENT, PUMPS, VALVES, GATES AND PIPING - SUBMERGED
i Preparation Required - Type A
f`
Coat No.. Coat Type Min. Covera a Mils
(Dry i m
1 B ?..0
2 E 5.0
3 E 5.0
Total Dry Film Thickness T2.Ui
09905-11
T
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Preparation Required - Type D
Coat No. Coat Type Min. Covera e (Mild
- -'-(dry 1 m
A 2.0
1 C 3,0
2 3.0
3 C
Total Dry Film Thickness $.0
4.03 PIPE MARKING
All pipes shall have stenciled on them, black flow direction arrows
and the name of the fluid being conveyed. These shall be placed at
every 10 feet inside buildings and every 25 feet inside and outside
pipe chases. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting a
paint that will adhere to aluminum insulating jackets and PVC pipe
for arrow and names placed on these pipes.
END OF SECTION
I09905-12
11000 GENERAL EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS a
1.01 SCOPE
These General Equipnent Stipulations apply, in general, to all
equipment. They supplement the detailed equipment specifications but
in case of conflict the detailed equipment specifications shall
govern. ;
1.02 COORDINATION
The Contractor shall assw+e full responsibility for coordination of
the entire project, including verification that all structures,
piping, and equipment components to be furnished and installed by him
are compatible. For equilrnent to be furnished by Owner and installed
under this contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for proper
installation, startup and all necessary adjustments so that the
equipment is placed in proper operation condition. The Contractor
shall also be responsible for coordinating with other separate
contractors as required for complete installation and operation of
equipment.
1.03 ADAPTATION OF EQUIPMENT
Equipment to be furnished and installed under this contract shall be
readily adaptable for installation and operation in the structures
shown on the drawings. No responsibility for alteration of a planned
structure to accommodate other types of equipment will be assumed by
the Owner. Equipment which requires alteration of the structures
j will be considered only if the Contractor assumes all responsibility
for making and coordinating all necessary alterations. All such
alterations shall be made at the Contractor's expense.
+ I
1.04 PATENT ROYALTIES
ii All royalties and fees for patents covering materials, articles,
i apparatus, devices, or equipment (as distinguished from processes)
shall be included in prices quoted by cquipnent suppliers.
1.05 EQUIPMENT GUARANTEE
J The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment furnished and installed
by him under this contract against (a) faulty or inadequate design,
(h) improper assembly or erection, (c) defective workmanship or
materials, and (d) leakage, breakage, or other failure, for
equipment furnished by Owner and installed under this contract, the +
Contractor shall guarantee against leakage, breakage or other failure
I
11000-1
I
I
I
I
J
dua to improper assembly or erection and against improper
installation of the equipment. The guarantee period shall be as
defined in the General Requirements.
1.06 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
For each type of equipment to be furnished and installed under this
contract, the Contractor shall prepare an operation and maintenance
manual covering;
A. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and
limiting conditions.
B. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking
instructions.
C. Operating instructions for startup, routine and normal
operation, regulation and control, shutdown, and emergency
conditions.
D. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.
E. Guide to "troubleshooting".
F. Parts lists, and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
6. Outline, cross-section, wid assembly drawings; engineering data;
and wiring diagrams.
H. Test data and performance curves, where applicable.
The above information, as applicable, shall be required for, but not
necessarily limited to, the following equipment;
i
1. Potassium Permanganate Feed System
2. Air Handling System
3. Pressure Reducing Valves
I I
4. Platform-Lift Hand Truck
The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any
instructions or parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment
when delivered,
Manuals shall be printed an heavy, first quality paper, 8.1/2 x 11
inch size with standard 3-hole punching. Drawings and diagrams shall
be. reduced to 8-112 x 11 inches. Where reduction is not practicable,
larger drawings shall be folded separately, and placed in envelopes
which are bound into the manuals. Each envelope shall bear suitable
identification on the outside.
11000-2
T
Two preliminary copies of each manual, temporarily bound in heavy
paper covers bearing suitable identification, shall be submitted to
the Engineer at the time of submittal of the shop drawings. After
review by the Engineer, four final copies of each operation and
maintenance manual shall be prepared and delivered to the Engineer
not later than 90 days prior to placing the equipment into operation. f
The final manuals shall be bound in stiff artificial black leather, I
metal hinged binders, equivalent to Wilson-Jones "Plymouth" Style
564-44, 2_"-3-1/2" capacity, 3-post style. Operations and maintenance
manua.3 for equipment furnished by the owner will bu provided by the
equipment supplier and will not be part of this contract,
1.07 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS
All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in
accordance with the best modern engineering and shop practice.
i Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and gages so
that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the
field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable.
Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to
i delivery, except as required by tests.
Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. Iron castings i
shall be tough, close-grained gray iron free from blowholes, flaws,
or excessive shrinkage and shall conform to ASTM A48.
Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous
fabricated steel used in items of equipment shall conform to the
Standards of the American Institute of Steel Construction. All
structural members shall be considered as subject to shock or
vibratory loads. Unless otherwise specified, all steel which will be
submerged, all or in part, during normal operation of the equipment
shall be at least 1/4 inch thick. ,
f
j 1.08 LUBRICATION i
i
Equipment shall be adequately lubricated by systems which require
! attention no more frequently than weekly during continuous operation.
Lubrication systems shall not require attention during startup or
shutdown and shall not waste lubricants.
Lubricants of the type recommended by the equipment manufacturer,
cross referenced with major oil company lubricants, shall be provided
J in sufficient quantity to fill all lubricant reservoirs and to
replace all consumption during testing, startup, and operation prior
to acceptance of equipment by the Owner.
1.09 ELECTRIC MOTORS i
I
Unless otherwise required by the detailed equipment specifications,
motors furnished with equipment shall comply with the following:
I
1
11000-3
I
,
f
i
I
A. Motors shall be designed and applied in compliance with NEMA,
ANSI, IEEE, and AFBMA standards and the NEC for the specific,
duty imposed by the driven equipment, ri
B. Where frequent starting occurs, motors shall be designed for J
frequent starting du' -.y equivalent to the duty service required
by the driven equipment. t
C. Unless recognized and defined by the standards and codes for i7
intermittent duty as a standard industry practice, all motors
shall be rated for continuous duly at 40°C. ambient. Motor
temperature rise above 40°C. ambient on continuous operation at
nameplate horsepower shall not exceed the NEMA limit.
D. Motors shall be designed for full voltage starting.
E. Motor bearing life f.hall be based upon the actual operating load
conditions imposed by the driven equipment.
F. Motors shall be sized for the altitude at the location where the
h equipment is to be installed.
G. Motors with a 1.0 service factor shall not he loaded more than
87 percent of the nameplate horsepower. Motors with a 1.15
service factor shall not be loaded more than 100 percent of
nameplate horsepower.
► it. Where the detailed specifications call for encapsulated motor
windings, the motor shall have a sealed insulation system
designed for a more severe environment than usual varnish
treatments can withstand. The insulation system shall be +
General Electric "Polyseal", Allis-Chalmers "POxeal", or U,S,
f Motors "Everseal". Motors in this case may be single voltage i
rated.
1. Motors shall have a clamp-type grounding terminal inside the
motor conduit box,
I
J. Motors with external conduit boxes shall have oversized conduit
boxes.
It is the inte,,t of this general specification to allow the
manufacturer's standard motor on integrally constructed motor
driven equipment such as appliances, hand tools, etc., that is
specified by model number in which a redesign of the complete
unit would be required for a motor with other features as may be
specified herein.
Unless otherwise required by the detailed equipment
specifications, motors within the horsepower ranges indicated
below shall be rated and constructed as follows:
11000-4
•
i
I
(1) Below 112 HP:
A. 115 volt, 60 hz., single phase, '
9. Oripproof, clean and dry locations; TEFC all others.
i
C. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings. ;
0. Built-in manual-reset thermal protector; or furnished '
with integrally mounted stainless steel enclosed
manual motor-overload switch,
(2) 112 to 1 HP:
A. 230/460 volt, 60 hz., 3 phase.
i
B. Dripproof, clean and dry locations; TEFC all otters.
C. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings.
(3) 1-112 HP and Above: {
A. 230/460 volt, 60 hz., 3 phase.
B. Dripproof, clean and dry locations; TEFC all others.
C. Oil or grease lubricated antifriction or oil
lubricated sleeve bearings.
D, Vertical motors shall have 15 year average-life thrust
bearings.
1.10 SAFETY GUARDS
All belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, and other moving or
rotating parts shall be covered on all sides by a safety guard.
Safety guards shall be fabricated from 16 USS gage or heavier
galvanized or aluminum-clad sheet steel or 112 inch mesh galvanized
expanded metal. Each guard shall be designed for easy installation
and removal. All necessary supports and accessories shall be
provided for each guard. Supports and accessories, including bolts,
I\ shall be galvanized. All safety gun-ids in outdoor locations shall be
designed to prevent the entrance of rain and dripping water.
1.11 ANCHOR BOLTS
Equipment suppliers shall furnish suitable anchor bolts for each item
of equipment. Anchor bolts, together with templates or setting
drawings, shall be delivered sufficiently early to permit setting the
anchor bolts when the structural concrete is placed. Two nuts shall
be furnished for each bolt.
f 1
11000-5
i
I
I
i
r
Unless otherwise shown or specified, anchor bolts for items of
equipment mounted on baseplates shall be long enough to permit 1-112
inches of grout beneath the baseplate and to provide adequate
anchorage into structural concrete.
Unless otherwise shown, anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be
hot-dip galvanized in conformity with ASiM A153 and A385, or zinc
plated in conformity with ASTM A165, Type?;.
1.12 SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES' M o
Equipment requiring periodic repair and adjustment shall be furnished
complete with all special tools, instruments, and accessories
required for proper maintenance. Equipment requiring special devices
for lifting or handling shall be furnished complete with those
devices.
1.13 PROTECTION
All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely
enclosed and protected during shipment, handling, and storage. All
equipment shall be protected from expoJure to the elements and shall
be kept thoroughly dry at all times. Pumps, motors, electrical
equipment, and other equipment having antifriction or sleeve bearings
shall be stored in weathertight warehouses which are maintained at a
temperature at least 60° F.
Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion,
discoloration, and other damage, All painted surfaces which are
damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
Electrical equipment, controls, and insulation shall be protected
against moisture or water damage. All space heaters provided in the
f equipment shall he kept connected and operating at all times until
equipment is placed in service.
1.14 INSTALLATION CHECK
An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the
°J manufacturer or supplier of each item of equipment to be furnished
and installed under this contract shall visit the site of the work
and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and epprove the equipment
installation. In each case, the equipment supplier's representative
shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation, The
equipment supplier's representative shall revisit the job site as
often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment
installation and operation are satisfactory in the opinion of the
Engineer.
Each equipment supplier's representative shall furnish to the Owner,
through the Engineer, a written report certifying that the equipment
11000-6
'fl
i#
;f
s
(1) has been properly installed and lubricated, (2) is in accurate
alignment, (3) is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting
piping or anchor bolts, and (i1) has been operated under full load
conditions and that it operated satisfactorily.
All costs for this work shall be included in the prices quoted by
equipment suppliers. /
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with each manu-
facturer concerning dates and times for installation of equipment to
insure proper scheduling of representatives visits. ;
END OF SECTION
r
l I
r
I
I~
I
i
E
I
j
1
j 11000-7
,
I.
I
I
I
T
c ,
11241 POTASSIUM PERMANGANATE FEED SYSTEM
1.00 GENERAL. J~
1.01 SCOPE
i
The Contractor shall furnish and install a potassium permanganate '
feed system at the Raw Water Pump Station completely prewired and
assembled as shown on the Plans and specified herein. The feed ;
system shall include one (1) volumetric dry chemical feeder, solution
tank, scale and loss-of-weight recorder, bucket elevator chemical
delivery system, with hopper storage, fittings, connections, valves,
prewired control station and appurtenances, as shown or required.
All components of the feed system shall be constructed of materials
suitable for use in a potassium permanganate feed system,
1.02 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of full and complete shop I
drawings in accordance with Section 5 of the SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS, SHOP DRAWINGS. All of the drawings and data shall be
complete and shall contain a complete description of all equipment
offered, including catalogues, cuts, test reports, complete installa-
tion procedures, and all pertinent engineering data required for a
complete evaluation of the equipment, The equipment shall not differ
from the basic requirements specified herein. All submittal data
shall be in such form and so presented that the Engineer may readily
review the data.
1 1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Four (4) sets of Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted
to the Owner prior to final acceptance of the equipment in accordance
with Section 11000, GENERAL EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS, 1.06, OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS. 1
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 VOLUMETRIC CHEMICAL FEEDER
J '
~J The volumetric chemical feeder shall be a Wallace and Tiernan, Inc.,
Model 32-055 screw-type feeder with electric variable speed control,
or approved equal, The feeder shall have an automatic 4-20 mA/
manual control arrangement and shall be paced off of a 4-20 mA flow
signal. The feeder shall be capable of feeding 0,3 cubic feet per
hour of potassium permanganate with a 20:1 operating range. Feeder
shall have a low speed gearbox with a 1-1/2" screw size. The feed I
screw, discharge spout, and hopper bottom trough shall be construc-
ted of stainless steel. The hopper wall agitators shall be construc-
ted of Buna-N,
11247-1
i
r
The feeder motor shall be a 1/6 HP, permanent magnet, 90-volt dc,
TENV motor. The SCR control for the motor shall operate on a 115
volt, single phase, 60 hertz power supply.
The feeder shall be mounted on top of a 35-gallon solution tank. The
tank shall be constructed of stainless steel, The solution tank
shall come complete with a mixer and a 1/4 HP TE motor designed for
operation on 115 volt, single phase 60 hertz power supply. The
impeller of the mixer shall he constructed of stainless steel.
Feeder shall have a 1.6 cubic foot hopper. Hopper shall be
constructed of fiberglass.
2.02 BUCKET ELEVATOR
The bucket elevator shall have a single discharge and shall be
Wallace and Tiernan, Catalog Number 371.181, or approved equal. The
bucket elevator motor shall be 1 HP and shall operate on a 230/460
volt, three-phase, 60 hertz power, supply.
The bucket elevator shall come complete with a Sytron V-20 vibrator,
or approved equal. This vibrator shall operate on 110 volt, single
phase, 60 hertz power, supply.
A hopper mounted dust collector shall be supplied as specified in
` paragraph 2.03, DUST COLLECTOR.
A discharge chute shall be supplied with the bucket elevator, com-
plete with bantam high level bin switch and 3/4" conduit connection.
The bin switch shall operate on a 110 volt, single phase 60 hertz
' power supply.
A flexible inlet connection shall connect the discharge chute to the
extension hopper. This flexible inlet connection shall be Catalog ~i
Number 371.105, 9-inch model, as manufactured by Wallace and Tiernan,
or approved equal, '
j
2.03 DUST COLLECTOR 1
4 A dust collector shall be mounted on the inlet hopper to the bucket
J elevator. The dust collector shall come complete with a blower and
totally enclosed 1/2 HP motor and operate on a 230/460 volt, three
phase, 60 hertz power supply. The dust collector shall come complete
with 30 square feet of cloth filters.
The dust collector shall be Catalog Number 371.016, Model 54, as
manufactured by Wallace and Tiernan, or approved equal.
2.04 EXTENSION HOPPER
The Contractor shall supply an extension hopper to be attached to the
dry chemical feeder. The hopper shall be made from N16 gauge steel
11247-2
I
1
I
and shall have a capacity of 4,5 cubic feet, The total capacity of
the extension hopper and the volumetric feeder shall not be less than
6,0 cubic feet. The hopper shall have a cover with a suitable /
opening such that an inlet flexible connection may be 0A ached to the
hopper. The inlet flexible connection shall be as specified in
paragraph 2.03, BUCKET ELEVATOR. 1
The extension hopper shall be Catalog Number 371.075, as manufactured
by Wallace and Tiernan, or approved equal.
2.05 SCALE AND LOSS-OF-WFIGIIT RECORDER
The Contractor shall supply a 30JO-1b, portable beam scale as li
manufactured by Fairbanks-Morse, or approved equal. Scale shall have j
a tare weight adjustment and shall be capable of supporting the i
solution tank, volumetric feeder, and hoppering system.
The system shall come complete with a loss-of-weight recorder,
Wallace and Tiernan series A-639 recorder, or approved equal, The
recorder shall have a calibration accuracy of 0.5% of full scale. ,
Twenty-four hour circular charts shall have a range of 500 pounds,
3,00 EXECUTION
3,01 INSTALLATION
The potassium permanganate feed system shall be carefully handled and
installed in such a manner as to prevent damage to any part of the
system, The volumetric feeder and other equipment shall be carefully
handled and installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
3,02 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
The services of the manufacturer's representative shall be provided
for whatever time period is required to assure proper "start-up" of
the equipment, a minimum of one (1) day of eight (8) hours duration,
exclusive of travel time, This service is for the purpose of
insuring proper installation and adjustment of the equipment and
instructing the Owner's operating personnel in the proper operation,
maintenance, and care of the equipment,
J 3.03 ACCEPTANCE TEST
Upon completion of installation of the potassium permanganate feed
system an acceptance test will be conducted to verify the
satisfactory operation of the system.
The test shall be conducted in a manner approved by and in the
presence of the Engineer. The equipment will be checked for leakage,
general operation, etc, The equipment must perform in a manner
acceptable to the Engineer before final acceptance will be made by
the Owner.
END OF SECTION
11247-3
~i
i
13125 FIBERGLASS BUILDING
1.00 GLNERAL
1 i
The Contractor shall furnish one (1) fiberglass building IO'x16'x 11'
tall (side wall height) as shown on the Plans. The building shall be
an all weather shelter for enclosing the potassium permanganate feed
system. The building shall be built for protection of the equipment
from heat, cold, rain, snow, wind, and dust. The building shall be
furnished with weather stripped doors and other options as specified
below.
The building shall have a floor flange for bolting to a concrete
floor slab.
The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of full and complete shop
drawings in accordance with Section 5 of the SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS, SHOP DRAWINGS. All of the drawings and data shall be
complete and shall contain a complete description of the building
offered, including catalogues, cuts, complete installation
procedures, and all pertinent engineering data required for a
complete evaluation of the equipment. All submittal data shall be in
such form and so presented that the Engineer may readily review the
data.
2.00 PRODUCTS
The fiberglass reinforced plastic building shall be molded from high
qualit, commercial grade materials which meet or exceed ASTM
specifications as described herein.
The exterior surface shall have a satin gel-coated finish with color
molded in. Surface shall be free of pits, porosity, cracks or
crazes.
The exterior laminate which follows the gel-coat shall be a minimum
of 1/8" thick. The laminate consisting of polyester resin and
fiberglass shall have a minimum glass content of 25%.
The inner core material shall be 2 pound density, rigid closed cell,
self-extinguishing foam a minimum of 1" thick. Insulation shall have
a minimum R rating of 6.7.
The interior laminate shall encapsulate the foam in place and form a
sandwich construction.
The composite laminate shall consist of gel-coat, 1/8" thick exterior
laminate, 1" polyurethane foam and 1/8" thick interior laminate. The
molding shall be continuous, forming a one piece molded unit. Panels
13125-1
i
s
formed by bonding core material to flat sheets will not be
acceptable, Shelters and doors shall be one piece molded. Aluminum
extrusions at corners, joints and doors will not be acceptable. t
Buildings shall withstand 125 MPH wind load and 30 pounds per square r
foot snow load.
The fiberglass laminate shall exhibit the following minimum physical
properties using the applicable ASTM standards:
Tensile strength 140000 PSI ASTM D638
Flexural strength 25,000 PSI ASTM D790
Flexural modulus 1.0 x 106 ASTM D790
Impact, Notched, Izod,
Foot Pounds per Inch 15 ASTM D256
Barcol Hardness 40 Min. Aver. ASTM D2583
Water absorption,
% 24 Hours .1% ASTM D570
Average coefficient
of thermal expansion
inch per inch per' F 10.5 x 10-6 ASTM D696
The procedure used in determining the above properties shall be in
accordance with the ASTM standards, Section 8 Volume 8.01 and
8.02,using the method designated above. Hardness tests shall be made
on the resin rich surfaces of the test samples. Test coupons shall
be prepared in accordance with the ASTM D618 test method.
Manufacturer shall maintain a continuous quality program and upon
request, shall furnish to the Engineer certified results of the
physical tests listed above.
Buildings shall have a 4" wide internal flange around the perimeter,
pre-drilled for bolting to a concrete pad, The building manufacturer
shall supply stainless steel anchor bolts for bolting the building to
a concrete pad.
Dcors shall be fiberglass with stainless steel piano hinge and two
point locking latch.
Lifting eyes in the roof shall be cadmium plated, and removable after
installation.
Two 6" diameter adjustable vents with screening shall be provided for
circulation of air. Vents shall be fiberglass for enhanced corrosion
resistance.
13125-2
f
Neoprene gasket. for, the door is factory installed to insure tight
weatherproof seal, Base flange gasket shall be provided for
installation in field by Contractor,
Additional equipment to be supplied by the manufacturer as follows: f y
l ,
a) One (1) double door assembly and one (1) single door as
shown on the Plans,
4 b) One (1) exhaust fan - 10" with gravity shutter - 500 CFM
Dayton 2C819 including fiberglass canopy with insect 1
r screen, or approved equal,
i
c) One (1) intake vent, 12" square, fiberglass, with gravity
shutter and insect screen,
(1) One (1) heater, 120U, 1300-1500 watt, Titan T170, with r
thermostat and tip-over switch, or approved equal.
a
e) One (1) heater mounting, including mounting channel,
outlet, and brackets,
f) Additional wall height as specified above,
The fiberglass building shall be modular type as manufactured by
Warminster Fiberglass Company, Southampton, Pennsylvania, or
approved equal,
3.00 EXECUTION
i The building shall he installed on a 101-2" x 261-1" concrete foun-
dation as shown on the Plans. The Contractor shall secure the
building to the foundation using the anchor bolts and sponge gasket
provided with the fiberglass building. The Contractor shall then
f caulk around the base of the building,
END OF SECTION
I
13125-3
13527 FILTER P1LUlA REPLACEMENT (Dual Media)
1.00 GENERAL
Under this item the Contractor shall remove the existing filter media ,
in Filters I through 8 and shall furnish and install filter media and
supporting gravel for Filters 1 through 8 completely as shown on the
Plans and specified herein. The Contractor shall inspect the filter
bottoms on Filters 1 through 8 and inform the Owner of any damaged
bottom pieces. Repair of damaged bottoms will be perforrned by the
Contractor as described below.
i
Filters I through 4 have Wheeler bottoms and filters 5 through 8 have
Leopold bottoms.
The Contractor shall submit six (G) sets of full and complete shop
drawings in accordance with Section 5 of the SUPPLEMENTARY CONDI-
TIONS. All of the drawings and data shall be complete and shall
contain a complete description of all material offered, including
catalogues, test reports, sieve analysis, complete installation
procedures, and all pertinent engineering data required for a
complete evaluation of the submittal. The material shall not differ
from the basic requirements specified herein. All submittal data
shall be in such forvn and so presented that the Engineer may readily
review the data.
All grovel, sand, and anthracite should be obtained from sources
M regularly engaged in producing and furnishing filter media for
potable water treatment plant applications. Filter media shall be
supplied by Northern Gravel Company of Muscatine, Iowa, Unifilt
Corporation of Zelienople, Pennsylvania, Turbitrol Media, or Roberts
Media.
All items are to be shipped via flat bed trailer truck in suitable
bags containing one cubic foot quantities of filter material. Bags
j should be placed on pallets and secured by either straps, stretch
wrap or approved equal method to prevent damage during transport and
handling. Stacking pallets on top of each other will not be permit-
ted, All pallets should be loaded on the trailer in such a manner to
permit fork truck unloading from ground level at the Job site.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
Filter media shall conform to "Standard Specifications for Filtering
Material, Designation 8100-80 of the American Water Works Associa-
tion except as modified herein, Testing procedures given in the above
Specification shall govern for the testing required on the filtering
materials. Test reports on the materials to be furnished shall be
submitted to the Engineer.
13522-1
i
i
1
i
2,02 IRIDf_RDRAIN GRAVEL.
The underdrain support gravel shall be furnished to provide a total
depth of twelve (12) inches as shown on the Plans (15-1/2" for
Wheeler bottom filters 1 through 4). The gravel shall be screened to /
proper sizes and placed in the filters in layers, as specified in i
paragraph 3.02 below, and the gravel within each layer shall be
uniformly graded. Gravel over 1/4 inch in diameter may be screened
through wire screens with square openings or plates with round open-
ings. Wire screens shall be used for sizes smaller than 1/4 inch.
Not more than eight (8%) percent of the weight of any layer shall be
finer or coarser than the limits specified for that layer. The media
gradation from top to bottom shall consist of;
a) 5" of 1/8" x No, 16 mesh silicia gravel
b) 2" of 1/4" x 1/8" silicia gravel
c) 2" of 1/2" x 1/4" silicia gravel
d) 3" of 3/4" x 1/2" silicia gravel (6-1/2" for Wheeler bottom
filters 1 through 4)
A layer of 1" diameter gravel shall be placed in the pyramidal
depressions, above the porcelain balls, in the four filters with
Wheeler filter bottoms (filters 1 through 4).
Filter gravel shall consist of coarse aggregate in which a high
proportion of the particles are rounded and tend toward a generally
spherical or equidimensional shape. It shall possess sufficient
strength and hardness to resist degradation during handling and use,
be substantially free of deleterious materials, and exceed the
minimum density requirements,
Gravel shall be obtained from an approved source and shall consist of
hard, rounded stones with an average saturated-surface-dry specific
gravity of not less than 2.5, Not more than one (1%) percent by
weight of the material shall have specific gravity of 2.25 or less,
The gravel shall contain not more than two (2%) percent by weight of
thin flat, elongated pieces (pieces in which the largest dimension
I~ exceeds five times the smallest dimension) determined by hand
picking; and shall be free of shale, mica, clay, sand, loam and
organic impurities of any kind.
The following acid solubility limits shall apply;
Size Limits Acid Solubility Limits
3/4" to 1/2" 11.5%
112" to 1/4" 15%
1/4" to 1/8" 10%
1/8" to N16 mesh 5%
13522-2
r
The porosity of the gravel in each layer shall be not less than q
thirty-five (35%) percent nor more than forty-five (45%) percent,
2.03 FILTER SAND
~i
Filter sand shall be furnished to provide a total depth of ten (10) 1
inches as shown on the Plans. For these specifications, filter sand
shall be classified as material less than 2.0 mm in diameter, No
particles shall exceed 2.0 mm in diameter. The sand shall have an
effective size of 0.45 mm to 0.55 mm, a uniformity coefficient of
1.35 to 1.6+0, and a specific gravity of not less than 2.55.
The filter sand shall be composed of hard, durable, dense grains of
predominantly silceous material that will resist degradation during
handling and use, free of clay, loam, dirt, and organic matter. Not
more than one (1%) percent by weight shall be flat or micaceous J
particles. The solubility of the sand in hydrochloric acid shall not
exceed five (5%) percent,
Filter sand shall be well graded and material showing abnormal I
grading may be rejected, The allowable particle size range is
specified below: i
Percent Size Range - Min, to Max.
1 0.34 mm - 0.40 mm
10 0.45 mm - 0.55 mm
60 0.68 mm - 0.88 mm
90 0.90 mm - 1.20 mm
99 1.19 mm - 1.62 mm
2.04 ANTHRACITE COAL
Anthracite coal shall be furnished to provide a total depth of
twenty (20) inches as shown on the Plans. Anthracite coal shall be
worked, screened, and hydraulically graded No, 1-112 coal media with
an effective size of 0,90 mm to 1.00 mm, a uniformity coefficient of
1.50 or less, and a specific gravity of 1.50 to 1.65. Not more than
ten percent (10%) by weight shall be less than 0.90 mm nor greater
than 2.00 mm. No particles shall be greater than 2,80 mm in size.
Coal media shall be composed of hard, durable grains and shall be
free as commercially possible of iron sulfides, clay, shale, or
extraneous dirt. The hardness shall not be less than 3.0 on the Moh
scale. Solubility in 40% HCL shall be less than one percent (3),
Solubility in one (1%) percent hot (190°F) sodium hydroxide solution
shall be less than two (2%) percent by weight.
At least eight (8%) percent excess material of the total bid volume
shall be furnished to replace possible losses due to on site
processing during installation and removal of fines during initial
backwashing,
13522-3
i
i
i
3.00 E %ECI1'f ION
3.01 TESTING
A sample of each gradation of the filter media, taken from cars as
they are received at the project site, shall be submitted to the 1
Engineer for approval. Each sample shall weight at least Fi pounds, r
shall be packed in a suitable container, and shall be labeled with
the project name, supplier's name, Contractor's name and graduation.
1'he material will be tested by a local testing laboratory for con-
formity with the requirements of these specifications.
On-site testing of filter media will be performed at the Owner's
expense. Any other testing at any other site shall be performed at
the Supplier's expense. Testing at any other site by other than
Owner's laboratory will not be grounds for acceptance.
No materials shall be placed in filter beds until written approval by
the Engineer.
3.02 FILTER MEDIA REMOVAL AND FILTER REPAIR
The Contractor shall carefully remove the media from the existing
filters so as to cause no damage to the existing bottoms. Any damage
to the bottoms due to the work by the Contractor shall be repaired at
no cost to the Owner. In addition, the Contractor shall be cautious
in removing the media from the Wheeler bottom filters so that none of
the porcelain balls are lost or, damaged. The Contractor shall
replace all lost or damaged balls at no additional cost to the Owner.
After the media has been removed, the filter bottoms will be
inspected for damage, The Contractor shall saw cut and replace any
deteriorated grout between the filter blocks cs determined during the
inspection as part of the lump sum bid for this item. The Contractor
shall also clean the filter bottoms and re-open any drain holes which
are plugged. The Contractor shall also remove the 90° elbow on the
filter backwash line to enter the plenum area under the filter blocks
and clean out any sand which as accumulated, The cost for all the
above items shall be included in the lump sum price bid for the
filter work.
In the event a filter bottom is found damaged and must be replaced,
the Contractor shall replace each designated bottom at the unit price
bid in the proposal for Wheeler bottoms or Leopold bottoms. The unit
price bid for each bottom block shall consist of breaking out and
removing the damaged block, and furnishing and installing the new
block to include grouting in place, The bottom block shall be instal-
led such that it will withstand all thrust exerted during backwashing
of the filter. It shall also include new porcelain balls for the
Wheeler bottoms if the existing balls cannot be re-used due to damage
or deterioration.
13522-h
' I
~ ? 1
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. GENERAL
structure filter media shall be placed in the filters until the filter
structure and underdrain system have been thoroughly cleaned by
the Contractor, examined by the Engineer, and all repairs have
been made.
B. PLACING UNDERDRAIN GRAVEL
The filter box and underdrain shall be thoroughly cleaned before
any gravel is placed and shall be kept clean throughout the
operation, The materials shall be handled to keep them clean
during placement and any materials becoming dirty shall be
removed and replaced.
The bottom layer shall be placed carefully by hand to avoid
disturbance or damage to the underdrain system. For materials
less than 112" in diameter, the workmen shall not stand or walk
► directly upon the gravel but upon boards WOO will sustain the
weight of the workmen without displacement of the gravel. Any
gravel becoming mixed shall be removed and replaced in layers as
herein spec; ed. The correct thickness of each layer shall be
obtained as follows: Before the gravel is placed, the top of
each layer shall be marked on the side of the filter. The top
of each layer shall then be leveled against a water surface held
at the appropriate mark. None of the particles shall be less
than half submerged, and there shall be no places where addi-
tional gravel can be placed without the particles extending more
than one-half (112) of their volume above the water surface.
C. PLACING FILTER SAND
Sand shall be transported and placed carefully to prevent
contamination of any sort, and sand made dirty before or after
placing shall be replaced with clean sand. Sand shall be placed
in the filter, preferably through water, so as not to disturb
the top layer of gravel, and shall be finished off smooth to the
proper elevation. After sand has been placed to the depth shown
on the Plans, the filters shall be backwashed three times, at. a
rate to give thirty (30%) percent expansion of the sand, and
then allowed to compact by closing the backwash valve slowly.
Final closure of the valve from the opening that gives ten (10%)
percent expansion shall extend over not less than thirty (30)
seconds. The fine sand on top shall be removed and, if sand
depth after this washing operation is not as shown on the Plans,
sufficient sand shall be added to the required depth.
D. PLACING ANTHRACITE COAL
Anthracite coal shall be placed in filters in accordance with
recommendations of the supplier and as follows:
13522-5
T
i'
e.
II
1. Place anV racite coal in filter as level as possible and
let it stand overnight in water.
2. Backwash at about 10 inches rise per minute (2246 gpm)
until all black dust is washed out.
3. Drain filter and measure from edge of trough or from some
other fixed point to top of bed.
4. Wash at a velocity of 24 inches rise per minute (5390 gpm)
during which time more fines and some rather large flat
pieces will be carried away. This may require several
washes.
5. Drain filter and measure to top of bed to see how much
reduction has taken place,
6. Cut into bed and, if 112 inch to 3/4 inch of fines is on
top, increase wash rate or scrape off and discard if
washing fails to remove them,
7. The final thickness of the anthracite coal layer after
washing shall be as shown on the Plans, and all fine
material removed shall be replaced with additional material
to bring the top of the anthracite coal layer to the proper
elevation.
3.04 DISINFECTION
After installation of the filter media, prior to placing each filter
back in service, the Contractor shall disinfect each filter basin in
accordance with Section 15079, DISINFECTION.
l ENO OF SECTION
I I '
F
i
13522-6
I
;i
i
13550 WEIR PANS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
Furnish and install fiberglass serpentine weir pans in the eight (8)
settling basins as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
Weir pans shall be as manufactured by Leopold, or approved equal.
The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of full and complete shop
drawings in accordance with Section 5 of the SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS, SHOP DRAWINGS. All of the drawings and data shall hr,
complete and shall contain a complete description of the equipment
offered, including catalogues, cuts, complete installation
procedures, and all pertinent engineering data required for a
complete evaluation of the equipment. All submittal data shall be in
such form and so presented that the Engineer inay readily review the
data.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. WEIR PANS i
The weir pans shall be molded in a rigid one piece form which is
designed both functionally and hydraulically to facilitate
controlled approach flow patterns, uniform collection,
concentrated discharge flow, and ease of cleaning and
maintenance. The weir pans shall be provided with necessary
reinforcing pads and mounting hardware. The weir pan support
struts shall be arranged to provide a total vertical leveling
' adjustment of at least two (2) inches. Lateral adjustment of at
least one (1) inch shall be provided by means of a lap joint
between pans which is to be field drilled after pan adjustment
is complete.
The color of the pans shall be aqua and shall be uniform
throughout the laminate. All anchor bolts, support struts, and
attachment hardware shall be 316 stainless steel.
Weir pans shall be fiberglass reinforced polyester plastic
molded by the matched die method to produce uniform, smooth
surfaces. All surfaces shall be smooth resin rich, free of
voids and porosity, without dry spots, crazes, or unreinforced
areas and shall provide for increased corrosion resistance and
weathering.
13550-1
Laminate shall contain a glass content of 3 } 2 percent using
Type "E" glass with chrome or silane finish.-Powdered reinforce-
ments shall consist of 47.5 1 percent of resin mixture. Final
laminate thickness shall be within ± 10 percent of the nominal
specified thickness.
Weir pans shall b: F'-0" in depth and 41-0" width, and shall
have a minimum V-nitch depth of 2.5" and notches shall be 90 ,
degree type. Each weir pan shall be capable of passing
1,000,000 gallons per day rate without overflowing the top of
the notches.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
The weir pans shall be installed in accordance with the plans and
specifications, and the recommendations of the manufacturer. Extreme
care shall be exercised in locating and placing the weir pan anchors.
The pans shall be leveled, aligned and secured individually so that
in all tanks the weir pan edge shall be in the same plane, as indica-
ted on the plans. The final elevations of the weir plans shall be
checked under full operating water conditions. Any unlevel or uneven
flow conditions shall be corrected prior to final acceptance.
{
END OF SECTION
i
i
r
t\
I
I
13550-2
1
I
I
. l~
5544:!vU.:j
L~
14375 PLATFORM-LIFT HAND TRUCK
1.00 GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish one (1) platform-lift hand truck for use
in transporting drums of potassium permanganate at the Raw Water Pump
Station.
The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of full and complete shop
j drawings of the platform-lift hand truck in accordance with Section 5
J of the SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, SHOP DRAWINGS. All of the drawings
and data shall be complete and shall include a complete description
of the equipment offered, including catalogues, cuts, and all perti-
nent engineering data required for a complete evaluation of the sub-
mittal. Submittal data shall be in such form and so presented that
the Engineer may readily review the data.
Four (it) sets of Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted
to the Owner prior to final acceptance of the equipment in accordance
with Section 11000, GENERAL EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS, 1.06, OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS,
2.00 PRODUCT
The platform-lift hand truck shall be a steel hand truck with a
winch-operated hydraulic system, a lifting capacity of 750 lbs., and
capable of achieving a minimum lift height of 54". The platform
dimensions shall be 22" x 30".
The platform-lift hand truck shall be C and H Distributions, Inc.
Stock Number 71-738/9D, as manufactured by Wesco Manufacturing
Company, or approved equal.
3.00 EXECUTION
The hand truck shall be carefully unloaded, uncrated, and stored to
prevent damage to the hand truck. The truck shall not be stored in a
location where it may be exposed to the weather,
Lj END OF SECTION
14375-1
tj
T
!.j
15064 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE
1.00 GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish and install ail polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
pressure piping, fl;tings, and appurtenances completely as shown on
the Plans and spQr.ified herein.
The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of full and complete shop
drawings on the PVC pipe and fittings in accordance with Section 5 of
the SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, SHOP DRAWINGS, All of the drawings
and data shall be complete and shall include a complete description
of the pipe offered, including catalogues, cuts, and all pertinent
engineering data required for a complete evaluation of the submittal,
Submittal data shall be In such form and so presented that the
II Engineer may readily review the data,
2,00 PRODUCTS
I PVC pipe for the potassium permanganate feed syste!s and the supply
water system for the air handling unit shall be ASTN D 1785, Type 1,
Grade 1, Schedule 80, rigid, unplasticized PVC, na"e;a'. irnpar,t,
bearing NSF seal. Fittings shall be molded, be%:ring nif seal, Tube
Turn Plastics, or equal. Pipe threads shall confn ;a to AS.z. B2,1,
NPT, and shall be full and cleanly cut with sharp dies. Valves shall
be as specified in Section 15136, MISCELLANEOUS VALVES.
Cast Iron transition sleeve joining cast iron and PVC pipe shall be
E Class 250 gray iron for pipe 12" and smaller, conforming to ANSI
Standard A21.10 (AWWA C-110),
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Where required PVC piping shall be installed in the locations
indicated with hangers, brackets, supports, etc., at spacings as
recommended by the pipe manufacturer, Flexible connections shall be
required at locations where pipe passes through a concrete wall.
Where required, trenches shall be excavated to the alignment and
depth shown on the Plans or as required for proper installation of
the pipe. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to
protect the pipe during backfilling operations. Care shall be taken
to prevent damage to the pipe and any damaged pipe shall be replaced
before being "covered up",
For threaded joints not more than three threads at each pipe
connection shall remain exposed after Installation. Ends of pipe
shall be reamed, after threading and before assembly, to remove all
15064-1
L%
I ,
t'
burrs. Threaded joints shall be made up with a suitable joint ~
compound, Joint compound shall be applied to male threads only.
For solvent weld joints the ends of plastic pipe shall be cut square j
and smooth and shall be wiped clean. Solvent cement shall be applied
to the outside of the pipe and the inside of the fitting socket with j
a small paint brush. The coated surfaces shall be immediately pushed
snugly together and the pipe rotated approximately 1/2 turn to insure
uniform distribution of the cement. Excess cement shall be removed
by wiping.
3.02 HYDROSTATIC TESTS
All tests shall be made as directed by, in the presence of, and to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. A1 PVC piping shall be tested,
before backfilling, at 100 psi for one (1) hour and all leaks
properly repaired.
END OF SECTION
I I .
I
i
1
' I
I
15064-2
I
II
II
I
J
f3
.S
15078 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING AND FITTINGS
1,00 YGENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish and install all miscellaneous piping,
fitting, and appurtenances as located on the plans and specified
herein. Six (G) sets of full and complete shop drawings shall be
submitted all miscellaneous piping in accordance with Section 5 of
the SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, SHOP DRAWINGS, All of the drawings and
data shall be complete and shall include a complete description of
all the miscellaneous piping equipment including all pertinent
engineering data required for a complete evaluation of the submittal,
Submittal data shall be in such form and so presented that the
Engineer may readily review the data.
Four (4) sets of Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted
to the Owner prior to final acceptance of the equipment in accordance
with Section 11000, GENERAL EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS, 1.06, OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2,01 FLOOR DRAINS
Floor drains shall be cast iron of sizes indicated and located as
shown on the Plans. Floor drains shall have a float type backwater
valve with cast iron housing, plastic ball valve, renewable rubber
seat, brass seat ring, and brass wire valve cage for installation in
the floor drain threaded outlet. Floor drains shall be Series 300-A
and backwater valve shall be Series 1000 as manufactured by JOSAM
Manufacturing Co., Michigan City, Indiana, or approved equal.
2.02 PIPE SUPPORTS
Pipe support system shall be as manufactured by Unistrut Corporation,
or approved equal. Pipe channels shall be Unistrut Series P1000, or
approved equal. Pipe clamps shall be Unistrut Series P1100, or
approved equal. The Contractor shall furnish and install
Uni-Cushion, as manufactured by the Unistrut Corporation, or approved
equal, at each pipe clamp to allow for expansion and contraction in
the piping,
2.03 FLOW METER
The Contractor shall furnish and install one (1) magnetic drive
sealed register water meter for the water supply line for the
potassium permanganate feed system. The flow meter shall be capable
of measuring flow rates of 0 to 10 gallons per minute, Accuracy
shall be 99% or greater at a flow of 1 gallon per minute and above.
15078-1 -
it
t~
~J
1
Water meter shaII be as manufactured by the Rockwell Manufacturing
Company, or approved equal.
The Contractor shall supply all fittings necessary to install the
flow meter in a 112" water line, as shown on the Plans,
2.04 PIPE INSULATION
All exposed piping shall be insulated with Pittsburg-Corning
"Foarnglas", or approved equal, Insulation shall be 3 inches (39
thick, with vapor barrier ,jacket, sealed with mastic and fastened
with the factory made aluminum bands per section of insulation. An
outside protective jacket made of sheet aluminum not less than 0.016"
in thickness shall be installed over the insulation.
All pipe fittings, valves, and accessories except moving parts shall
be insulated with white hydraulic setting insulating cement to the
thickness of the adjacent pipe insulation. The insulation shall be
sealed and covered with an aluminum jacket,
Freeze protection shall be provided from a point six (6) inches below
the finished ground.
Freeze protection shall be provided for temperatures down to minus
10° Farenheit,
I 3.00 EXECUTION
All piping, fittings, and insulation shall be carefully handled and
installed to prevent damage to the piping,
END OF SECTION
15078-2
{
ri„F
i
E
,P
~i
i
15079 DISINFECTION
1,00 GENERAL
The Contractor shall disinfect the new 36° finished water dine and
each filter basin undergoing media replacement prior to placing the
line and basins into service. The Contractor shall furnish all
labor, equipment and material necessary to complete the disinfection
of the pipe and filter basins as herein provided and to the a
satisfaction of the Engineer. 1
MO PRODUCTS
Chlorinating agent used for disinfection shall be a calcium
hypochlorite dry powder such as HTH or other chlorinating agent
approved by the Engineer.
3.00 EXECUTION
Pipe shall be disinfected by the application of a chlorinating agent
into the water used for the initial filling, The chlorinating agent
shall be applied at or near the beginning point from which the line
is being filled. The water being used to fill the line shall be
controlled by flow into the section to be disinfected very slowly and
the application of the chlorinating agent shall be in such proportion
to tha rate of flow entering the pipe that the chlorine dose applied
to the water shall be a't; least 50 parts per million. The
chlorine-treated water shall be retained in the main at least
twenty-four (24) hours. After the chlorine-treated water has been
retained for the required time, the chlorine residual at the pipe d
extremities and at other representative points shall be at least 25
parts per million.
After installation of filter media is completed, each filter shall be
disinfected by the application of a chlorinating agent into the water
used for the initial filling. A chlorine dose of 50 parts per mil-
lion shall be applied, and the water shall be retained in the basin
for a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours. Disinfection shall be
considered complete if there is a chlorine residual of 25 parts per
million, or greater, after twenty-four (24) hours.
I
Following chlorination, all treated water shall be flushed from the
system until the remaining water shall have a chlorine content not in
excess of 1.0 parts per million,
ENO OF SECTION
15079-1
S
15136 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES
1.00 GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish and install miscellaneous valves
completely as shown on the Plans and specified herein. Six (6) sets
of full and complete shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance
with Section 5 of the SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, SHOP DRAWINGS. The
drawings and data shall include complete descriptions of the valves 1117
offered, including catalogues, cuts, and all pertinent engineering
data required for a complete evaluation of the submittal. Submittal
data shall be in such form and so presented that the Engineer can
readily review the data.
Four (4) sets of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for each piece of
equipment listed herein shall be submitted to the Owner prior to
final acceptance of the equipment in accordance with Section 11000,
GENERAL. EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS, 1.06, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUALS.
2.00 PRODUCTS i
A. PVC BALL VALVES
PVC Ball Valves shall be furnished for the potassium permanga-
nate feed system as shown on the Plans. Valves shall be Cabot,
Chemtrol TU Series Ball Valves, or approved equal, 112" through
2", of Type 1 PVC, with Viton 110" rings and with end connections
as indicated or required. Valves larger than 2" shall be Cabot
Chemtrol Ball Valves, or approved equal, (End Entry) of Type 1
PVC and teflon seat rings.
a
8. GLOBE VALVES 11
I 1
Globe Valves, where indicated on the drawings, shall be Crane
No. 351 with American Standard Class 125 flanges. Globe valves
i for screwed piping shall be equal to Crane No. 1.
C. PRESSURE. REDUCING VALVE
The Contractor shall furnish and install one (1) 2" pressure j
! reducing valve as shown on the Plans and specified herein. The
pressure reducing valve shall be a diaphragm operated, spring
loaded, globe pattern valve. The valve body shall be bronze.
The pilot valve, piston, liner, seat, and crown shall be stain-
less steel.
The pressure reducing valve shall be suitable for a 130 psi
working pressure, 180 psi surge pressure, and shall be capable I
of reducing a 130 psi inlet pressure to a Discharge pressure of
40 psi. The valve shall be easily adjustable providing a
discharge pressure range of 30 psi.
15136-1
z,
Valve shall come complete with two glycerin filled pressure
gauges with snubber fittings, one to monitor upstream pressure J
in psi, and one to monitor downstream pressure in psi.
Fr
Pressure reducing valve shall be a G-A Industries Figure 43.9,
or approved equal.
3.00 EXECUTION
Valves shall be carefully handled and i!istalled in such a manner as
to prevent damage to any part of the valves.
END OF SECTION
i
15136-2
I
j5
1
15834 AIR HANDLING UNIT
1.00 GENERAL
/A
1.01 SCOPE
1
The Contractor shall furnish and install one (1) air handling unit at
the Raw Water Pump Station, including ductwork, as shown on the
Plans. All ductwork shown shall be rigidly attached to, and
entirely supported by, the wall framing of the structure.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of full and complete shop
drawings in accordance with Section 5 of the SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS, SHOP DRAWINGS. All of the drawings and data shall be j
complete and shall contain a complete description of all equipment
offered, including catalogues, cuts, test reports, complete
installation procedures, and all pertinent engineering data required
for a complete evaluation of the equipment. The equipment shall not
differ from the basic requirements specified herein. All submittal
data shall be in such form and so presented that the Engineer may
readily review the data.
1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Four (4) sets of Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted
to the Owner prior to final acceptance of the equipment in accordance
with Section 11000, GENERAL EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS, 1.06, OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS.
1.04 STANDARDS
i
Air handling equipment shall be fabricated in accordance with
nationally recognized standards as follows:
j U.L. - Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association Standard 210
ARI - Standard 270 and 210
NEC - National Electrical Code, latest edition
NEMA - Manufacturing Standards
1.05 WARRANTY
The manufacturer shall include a written manufacturer's warranty for
each item furnished under this contract. Warranty shall be separate
and independent of Contractor's one-year grart,ntee and shall cover
all equipment for defects in material or work.iianship for a period of
one year from the date of substantial complef.ion.
15&34-1
`I
I
1
~i
In addition to the above warranty, the Contractor shall guarantee
equipment in writing against defects in material and labor for a
period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 AIR HANDLING UNIT I
fhe air handling unit shall be of the vertical draw-through
configuration and shall be Trane No. 31 Climate Changer, or approved
equal. Air discharge shall be horizontal, on the inlet side of the
unit.
i
Casing shall be constructed of the best quality steel, properly
reinforced and braced with steel angle framework as required for
maximum rigidity and minimum vibration, Additionally, all exterior
surfaces of the casing shall be finished with two coats
(approximately 2.5 mils) of zinc-rich paint, Zincilate 810C by
Industrial Metal Protectives, Inc., or approved equal. paint shall
be applied to bare steel in the mariner of application recommended by
the manufacturer.
The fan shall have forward curved blades, and shall he statically and
dynamically balanced and tested after being installed in factory
mbled fan section. Fan shaft shall not pass through its first
tical speed as unit comes to rated rpm. Grease lubricated ball
ings shall have an average life of 200,000 hours. Extended I
g..dse lines shall be furnished for all bearings located internally,
so that all bearing lubrication can be accomplished externally. The
f fan capacity shall be 15,150 cfm at 3.83 Inches of water gauge, total
external static pressure minimum, at a maximum fan rotational speed
of 802 rpm, The fan shall be sized such that its operation point is
located a sufficiently safe distance from the region of instability
on its performance cure.
High capacity filter box shall be furnished so that the air velocity
across the gross filter face area shall not exceed 315 fpm. Filters
shall be American Air Filter "Renu" filters, or approved equal, of
the unit viscous type, consisting of a permanent metal holding frame
with renewable media. The front grid shall be designed such that the
media may be easily replaced. Frames shall be nominal 2" deep. The
renewable media shall be constructed of continuous glass fiber bonded
material, having a nominal thickness of not less than 2".
Coils shall be a product of the unit manufacturer. Tubes shall be of
heavy duty construction, with walls not less than 0.049" thick.
coils shall be mounted in the coil casing to be accessible for
service. Coils shall be removable frcrn the unit without dismantling
the entire unit. These coils shall be pitched in the unit coil
casing for proper drainage, and shall have removable gasketed headers
for complete access to the tubes for mechanical cleaning. These
removable headers shall be accessible after coil section side panel
15034-2
r N
)f
is removed, These coils shall be tested at 250
psiy air pressure
under water, and be suitable for continuous operation at 200 psi
pressure and 220 F. temperature. The coil shall be 8 row, Series 140
fins by Trane, or approved equal, having the minimum capacity to cool f
19,150 cfm of air from an entering condition of 105 F. dry bulb, 82.2
F. wet bull) temperature,, to a leaving condition 84 F. dry bulb, 77.1 '
F. wet bulb temperature, when the coil is supplied with 65 gpm of
water at 80 F. entering temperature, Air velocity across coil shall
be less than that at which moisture carry-over occurs, Water
pressure drop through coil shall be not more than 10 feet of water.
All capacities, pressure drops and selection procedure shall be
certified in accordance with ARI Standards 430 and 410.
Motor shall be mounted on an adjustable mount by the manufacturer.
Motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFL), single speed (1800
rpm), single winding, 25 HP minimum, 1.15 service factor, mounted in
the position shown on the Plans. Motor shall be for operation on 230
volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz. Unit manufacturer shall provide unit belt
guard, and tachometer heading holes at the shaft centers.
The air handling unit and filter box shall be supplied with spring
vibration isolaters as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.02 DUCTWORK
i
All supply and return ducts, risers, branches, elbows, etc.,
necessary to make the complete system shall be furnished and
installed in accordance with recommendations of the latest
A,S.H.R.A.E. Guide as to transverse joint connections and bracing,
I and as indicated on the drawings. All ductwork shall be constructed
of mill-bonderized galvanized steel sheets. Such duct work specified
to be painted, shall be constructed of steel sheets of Zincgrip -
Paintgrip, or approved equal.
I All supply ductwork (3511/36") shall be U.S, Standard Gauge 22
I j minimum. The return duct (118"/4811) shall be U.S. Standard Gauge 16
minimum, All ductwork dimensions shown on the Plans are sheet metal
areas. Additionally, all ductwork shall be lined with 2" insulation
if on all sides. Insulation shall be fastened securely in all ducts,
such that it shall withstand an air velocity of 3000 fpm in
continuous operation,
~I
All ducts shall be supported with angles weted i•o the duct, fastened
to the wall framing on not more than 61-0" centers. All ductwork
shall be left clean inside, Ductwork penetrations through the wall j
shall be sealed between the duct and the penetration after the
installation of the ductwork, such that the penetrations are
completely waterproof.
Turning vanes shall be double-wall Aero-Dyne HEP, or approved equal.
{
15834-3
I
.i. I=A
is
r~
2.03 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS
Flexible connections shall be Veil tfab, or approved equal,
Connections shall consist of a clean 12" break between metal ducts,
,jointed by a waterproof and fire-resistant canvas fabric, weighing
not less than 20 ounces per square yard, The fabric shall be
fastened to the ductwork with 1" by 1/8" band iron, and sheet metal
screws. Fabric shall be installed with sufficient slack to allow 6"
minimum displacement in any direction of air handling unit with
respect to its originally specified location.
2.04 PIPING
All water piping for the air handling unit shall be as specified in
Section 15064, POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE.
2,05 VALVES AND ACCESSORIES
Valves and accessories for the air handling unit shall be furnished
as listed below;
Gate valve shall be Crane No. 437, or approved equal, threaded ends,
suitable for 300 psig working pressure, minimum.
Globe valve shall be Crane No, 7, or approved equal, threaded ends,
suitable for 300 pslg working pressure, minimum.
One-half (11211) inch drain valve shall be Mueller H-8260 sediment
faucet, or approved equal,
Air vent valve on the iequal, shall be 300epsigH Air
Eliminatur, or approved
working pressure, minimum,
1
Strainers shal be Crane No, l threaded ends, 200 / psig Y-Pattern
working s pressure, minimum. or
approved equal
All unions shall be capable of operation at 300 psig working
pressure, minimum.
2,06 VOLUMETRIC FLOW METER
Water flow meter shown on the Plans at the air handling unit shall be
Ellison Annubar, or approved equal, Metering system shall consist of
Annubar annular primary flow element, "Type 736-316SS-2" Schedule No.
40, Standard Insert, or approved equal, to be welded to the piping.
Element shall be capable of operation at 300 psig working pressure,
minimum. Additionally, there shall be a permanent 6" dial element,
Dial shall be calibrated in gpm units, sized correctly for 2" pipe,
such that direct reed-out of flow rate is possible. Element shall
also showling floww rratepermanent at which the coileoflthee1airfhandlingtag
on ehai
15834 -4
I
unit has been specified, Dial gauge shall have a range of 0-100 gpm.
Final selection procedure of exact unit shall be conducted by, or
under the approval of the manufacturer.
3.00 EXECUTION 1.
3.01 INSTALLATION
T
All components shall be delivered to the site inside protective
cartons. Remove crates, cartons, or packaging and assemble any
components shipped separately. The air handling unit shall be
carefully handled and installed in such a manner as to prevent damage
to any part of the system. The air handling unit shall be installed
in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.02 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
The services of the manufacturer's representative shall be provided
for whatever time period is required to assure proper "start-up" of
the equipment, a minimum of one (1) day of eight (8) hours duration
exclusive of travel time. This service is for the purpose of
insuring proper installation and adjustment of the equipment and
instructing the Owner's operating personnel in the proper operation,
maintenance, and care of the equipment.
3.03 ACCEPTANCE TEST
Upon completion of the installation of the air handling unit an
acceptance test shall be conducted to verify the satisfactory
operation of the system,
The test shall be conducted in a manner approved by and in the
j presence of the Engineer. The unit shall be operated for a period
not less than two weeks prior to final acceptance in order to
ascertain that the unit is working properly and to allow testing of
ductwork, fans, filters, and the motor. The equipment shall be
tested for leakage, general operation, etc, The equipment must
i perform in a maTiner acceptable to the Engineer before final
acceptance shall be made by the Owner.
I
This trail usage shall in no way affect the warranty period, which
shall begin only on the date that the Certificate of Substantial
Completion is issued.
3.04 CLEAN-UP
Remove all packing crates, trash and debris from the site as it
accumulates.
END OF SECTION
15834-5
16000 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
The electrical work shall consist of providing complete and operative
electrical installations as shown on the Plans and provided for in
these Specifications, as well as that necessary to interface with and
operate all plant equipment. The work includes the furnishing of all
labor, materials, and equipment except that specifically stated to be
furnished by the Owner to provide a complete and workable electrical
System.
1.02 DRAWINGS
The drawings are not intended to and do not show all equipment such
as junction boxes, outlet boxes, conduit fittings, and similar. Even
though such items of equipment may not be specifically mentioned in
these specifications, nor shown on the drawings, nor noted on shop
drawings, if they are necessary to make a complete installation, they
shall be included in the work required under these specifications.
1.03 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT
The drawings show the approximate location of cabinets, panel boards,
switches, lights, receptacles, and other equipment. The most suit-
able location shall be determined by actual measurement during con-
struction, Final location shall be as proposed by the Contractor and
I f approved by the ingineer.
1.04 AS - CONSTRUCTED DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall maintain a set of Drawings and Shop Drawings in
"As - Constructed" condition, Changes, modifications, or corrections
shall be marked as they occur. The location and burial depth of
underground conduits shall be shown by dimension and scale. The
Contractor shall date and sign markings and shall furnish a complete
J, set to the Engineer upon completion.
- ✓ 1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS
All electrical material, workmanship and tests shall be in conformity
with the applicable current standard rules, regulations, and specifi-
cations of the following authorities;
A. National Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU) and National Electric
Code (NEC).
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA),
16000-1
i
i
_r
i
4
1
C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
0. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCE,4).
E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
F. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA).
G. Association Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC).
H. National Bureau of Standards (NBS) (National Electrical Safety
Code). {
1. Rural Electrification Administratiov (REA). {
1
J. City of Denton, Texas.
All electrical work shall be performed under the direct supervision
of a Master Electrician holding a valid license in the State of
Texas.
1.06 STORAGE AND CLEANUP
All equipment stored on the job prior to installation shall be
suitably housed and protected from weather or other damage in full
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. All equipment
equipped with space heaters shall have the space heaters energized
and operational as soon as possible following installation. Space
heaters shall be kept in operation to protect equipment from mois-
ture. All equipment shall have been properly oiled and lubricated
during storage and before any operation and shall be checked by a
manufacturer's representative prior to startup. At the completion of
the work, the Contractor shall leave the storage area in a satis-
factory condition.
1.07 SERVICE
The existing service is 120/240 Volt, 3 phase, 4 wire.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall furnish to the
owner, for his approval, shop drawings showing all equipment he
contemplates incorporating in the work. Samples of materials shall
be submitted for approval when so directed. Equipment, materials,
and articles installed or used without such approval shall be at the
risk of subsequent rejection. The shop drawings shall include cata-
logue numbers and complete dejcriptions. Approval of such drawings,
equipment and specifications shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for the satisfactory performance of the equipment as
furnished and installed.
16000-2
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MAIERIALS
A. GENERAL !i
All material shall be new unless otherwise specified. All 11
materials of a type for which the Underwriter Laboratories have
established a standard shall be lister,' by the Underwriter's
Laboratories, Inc., and shall bear their label.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
All work shall be performed by competent workmen, skilled in this
type of work. Work shall be neat throughout, and structurally sound.
3,02 TESTING
All circuits shall be rung out and on completion of the work all of
the installations shall be entirely free of grounds and short cir-
cuits.
3.03 GUARANTEE
The Contractor shall guarantee against mechanical defects in any or
all materials and workmanship covered by these specifications and
shall make good, repair and replace, at his own expense, any defec-
tive work, material, or part which may show itself within a period of
one year after final acceptance of the work.
r
END OF SECTION
i
i
16000•.3
II
1
I I
i
1.6100 WIRE AND CONDUIT SYSTEM
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE.
The work covered by this item of the Specification includes '
furnishing all labor and material and performing the necessary ;
operations to provide a complete wire and conduit system, I
2,00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. LOW VOLTAGE. WIRE (6OOV)
All conductors shall be 600 volt thermoplastic insulated single
conductor copper, 75°C, Type THHN/THWN for sizes #8 AWG and
smaller, Type 'fHW for sizes #6 AWG and larger, wet or dry. The
wire shall br; water tank tested and approved as machine tool
wire in accordance with the National Machine Tool Builders
Association. The wire shall be Collyer Specification No. P-400
for Type THHN/THWN and No. P-142 for Type THW, Anaconda, or
approved equal.
B. PAIRED SHIELDED CABLE
All paired shielded cables shall be 7/28 stranded copper
conductors with .013" extruded PVC insulation, twisted into
pairs, stranded into a core and enclosed in a non-hydroscopic
core tape, 100% coverage helically wound aluminum foil shield,
drain wire, and .035" minimun extruded PVC jacket. Pairs shall
be black/white with each conductor printed with a pair number at '
one inch intervals. Cables shall be rated at 300 volts to meet
NEC-725 and IEEE 383, and shall be Alpha No. 5610/2000, or
approved equal.
C. PLASTIC CONDUIT
All plastic conduit shall be schedule 40, rigid, high impact I
polyvinylchlorlde, conforming to Federal Specification W-C-1094
and Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., Standard UL-651. Plastic
conduit shall be Cer•tainteed, or approved equal.
I
D. RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
i
All rigid steel galvanized conduit shall be hot-dipped galvan-
ized inside and out and shall conform in all respects to Federal
i Specification WW-C-581d, ASA C80.1 and Underwriters' Labora-
tories specifications, The conduit shall be protected by a
chromic acid rinse. Conduit shall be Triangle PWC, or approved
equal .
r
16100-1
k~
i
E. FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
All flexible concluit shall be American Metal Hose with a neo-
prene jacket and Appleton Sealtite fittings, or other approved
equal, i
3.00 INSTALLATION
3.01 WIRE
A. GENERAL
All electrical wiring systems shall be color coded in accordance
with the National Electrical Code. In conduits or runs contain-
P ing from two to seven conductors, no two conductors shall be of
the same color. In conduits or runs containing from eight to
fourteen conductors, the same color shall not appear more than
twice. For rrjns of more than fourteen conductors, the same
color shall not appear more than three times Unless necessary
for pulling purposes, conductors shall be continuous from I
terminal block to terminal block without splice. Under no
condition shall conductors of a different color be sp ce
toce rer, All c1cults shall he`tagged
mi
ter finals. nder no
cond'iMn shall different circuits be combined in the same
conduit unless shown otherwise on the Plans or approved by the
Engineer.
M All wire and cable #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. The
k minimum size conductors permitted is N12 AWG, except as speci-
fically indicated on the Plans. All wire shall bear the approval
of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. "
B. LOW VOLTAGE
All conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no
splices shall be made except at outlets. Sufficient wire shall
be left at all outlets to make connections to equipment without
straining.
All splices and taps shall be made with mechanical typo, com-
pression type or spring connectors. Splices and taps shall then
be reinsulated with Scotch Tape No. 33, half lapped, to a thick-
ness of 1-112 times the conductor and insulations thickness.
C. PAIRED SHIELDED CABLE
Paired shielded cables shall be grounded at the Instrument Panel
end only and shall be insulated from ground elsewhere. The
shield snall be made continuous for the entire run. The 300
volt cable shall not be laced with or placed in the same conduit
with cable rated at 600 volts or greater.
16100-2
1
1l. GROUNDING
All conduits, motors, cabinets, outlets, and other equipment
shall be properly grounded in accordance with National Electric i
Code requirements, The ground wire shall be bare stranded
copper, sized as shown on the Plans. Where ground wire is
exposed to mechanical damage, it shall be installed in thick
wail conduit, Connections shall be made to equipment with
solderless connections, Wire connections to the ground
' conductor shall be of the fused type equal to the Cadweld
process.
The metal surface under the grounding lug shall be cleaned to l
bright metal. Connections to motors shall be to the grounding i
stud which shall be threaded into the stationary frame and not
an end bell, and the ground wire shall not be lugged to a moun-
tang bolt, Equipment not specifically shown connected to a
grounding conductor shall be grounded by means of a conduit
supplying the equipment. Where direct metallic connections
` cannot be made, bonding jumpers shall be used.
Grounding mats shall be constructed and installed as indicated
on the Plans.
3.02 CONDUIT
M A. GENERAL
All conduit buried in earth or in concrete shall be rigid PVC.
Unless otherwise indicated, all other conduit shall be rigid
steel. At the transition from underground or from concrete, PVC
conduit shall be protected from mechanical damage by extending
rigid steel conduit a maximum of twelve inches and a minimum of
four inches into earth or concrete at t transition. Conduit
sizes shall be as shown on the Plans, except that in no case
shall a conduit size be less than that required by the National
Electric Code. The minimum size permitted shall be 3/4 inch.
B. UNDERGROUND
All underground conduits shall be buried a minimum of 18 inches
J deep and as shown on the Plans. Buried conduit bank shall be
backfilled with material free from large rock, paving material,
or large angular substance which may damage the conduits.
C. ROUTING AND SUPPORT
Conduits in buildings shall be exposed on unfinished ceilings
and basement areas as shown on the plans. Conduits shall be
rigidly supported to the building structure by means of straps
or clamps, bolted or screwed to the structure. The straps shall
be of the two-hole pipe strap type and clamps shall be of the
one-hole pipe strap type.
16100-3
r
rl
i
D. TERMINATIONS
Double locknut construction shall be used on all conduit termi-
hating in stamped metal motor terminal, motor starter, safety
switch, outlet, junction or pull box, etc,, with approved typa
of bushing over end of conduit. Length of conduit threads shall
be increased at outlets, junction and pull boxes where necessary
to accommodate double locknuts and bushings. All bushings shall
be fully seated against end of conduit,
E. BUSHINGS
Bushings shall be composed of an outer threaded metal ring with
an inner insulated compound ring molded into the metal ring, or
shall be of the threaded type, composed entirely of an approved
insulating material,
F, NIPPLES
Conduit nipples shall have two independent sets of threads.
Running threads shall not be used. Where conditions require
joining two fixed conduits into a continuous run, a conduit
union shall be used.
G. PULL BOXES AND JU14CTION BOXES
"Condulet" type fittings shall not be used on conduits contain-
ing wire #4 AWG or longer, Pull boxes shall be provided and
installed where necessary to facilitate the installation of
cable and wires. The pull boxes shall be N.E.C. size. Junction
or pull boxes installed In concrete slabs shall be cast iron.
Ali other boxes and outlets shall be 304 stainless steel or cast
iron with watertight covers. All pull boxes and junction box;:
shall be accessible and not buried,
H. EXPANSION JOINTS
Expansion joints shall be installed in all conduits crossing
concrete expansion joints. Provisions shall be made to prevent
shear strain at crossings.
E '
1. MOTOR CONNECTIONS
Connections to motors shall be flexible metal conduit for a
distance net to exceed thirty (30) inches.
END Of SECTION
i
16100-4
f
i
~II
1
i
r
.
I
i
r
16150 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
1.00 GENERAL '
1.01 SCOPE
The Contractor shall make all electrical connections to equipment
furnished by the Owner and other contracts, and furnish wiring,
conduit, outlet boxes, etc., as required, He shall check the Plans
and Specifications and inform himself as to the amount and type of
such wiring that may be required and include same in his bid,
1.02 ENCLOSURES 1
Unless otherwise indicated, enclosures shall be NEMA 1 fc indoor
installations and NEMA 4% stainless steel for outdoor installations,
2.00 PRODUCTS J
2.01 MATERIALS
LIGHTING PANELS
Lighting Panel shall be General Electric Type NLAB, Square D NQO, or
equal with plug-on circuit breakers. All multipole breakers shall
have an internal common trip. All panels shall be of NEMA 1 construc-
tion unless otherwise specified. Panel shall have a complete detailed
directory. Panel shall be for operation on 120/240 volts, 3-phase,
4W, 60 Hertz,
CONTROL RELAYS
I
Control relays shall be industrial type, 600 volt, with contacts
rated 10 amps at 120 VAC, General Electric CR 120 Line, Square 0
Class 8501, or approved equal.
INDICATING LIGHTS, SWITCHES AND PUSHBUTTONS
Selector switches, pushbuttons, and indicating lights shall be heavy
duty, oil tight General Electric Series CR2940, Westinghouse, or
I approved equal,
! MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS
Manual motor starters sh,*.ll be single pole (120 VAC) or double pole
(240 VAC), toggle operated, complete with overload heater sized for
the quipment served. Manual motor starters shall be General
Electric CR101, Square D equal model, or approved equal.
16150-1
MOTOR STAR'iERS (460V)
Motor starters shall be combination circuit breuHztypStartersishall
motor starters for operation on 240V, 3 phase, bO
be for full voltage starting unless otherwise indicated, Tne starter
shall have three external manual-reset overload relays selected to c
trip at 1.15% of the motor rameplate full-load current rating. Where
control circuit transformers are indicated, each starter shall con- ;
tain a 240 to 120 volt fused control trans.ormer with sufficient
capacity for all the devices shown in the schematic. Where a device
is shown in the schematic and is not specifically designated as being
elsewhere, the device shall be installed in the corresponding star-
ter. Where eo',1trol switches, pushbuttons, or indicating lights are
not specifically designated as being elsewhere, the device shall be
installed on the door of the starter. Wiring diagrams shall be
provided on each cubicle door and shall be protected such that they
shall remain attached and legible for the service life of the equip-
ment, Control accessories shall be as further specified in this
section of the specifications. The starters shall be General
Electric 200-Line, or approved equal.
PHASE. FAILURE RELAY (PFR)
Phase failure relay shall be a phase failure and high low voltage
motor protector with field adjustable range of trip settins and five
second trip delay, Turner Controls Model TC-3313, or app equal,
for operation on 480 volts, 3-phase, 60 Hertz. Relays are to be
installed in existing combination starters as shown on the Plans.
THERMOSTAT
Thermostats shall be line voltage type suitable for operating on 120
volts, 60 hertz with heavy duty snap switches. The thermostat shall
operate over a range of 35-100°F. with contacts to close on rising
temperature. Thermostats shall be Honeywell No. T631A11.13 or
approved equal.
3.00 INSTALLATION
1 3.01 GENERAL
The Contractor shall make all electrical connections to equipment as
specified. Installation shall be made in compliance with manufac-
turer's recommendations and the Contract Drawings. If none are avail-
able
own an from the manufcturer of installationhshallcbeiaccordingntoothehbest elec-
Contract Drawings, ,
trical industry and trade practice.
16150-2
r .y„
li.
it
3.02 TEST
Upon Completion of the installation, the ContrauGor shall perform r~
continuity tests and functional checkout to assure proper operation j
of all equipment.
ENO OF SECTION
I
1
j
3
i
3
II
E : 1
1
I
r
16150-3
i
16181 LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTER CENTERS
1.00 REVISIONS TO EXISTING LOW VOLTAGE STARTER CENTER
A. SCOPE i
The work to be performed under this section of the specifica-
tions requires that the Contractor furnish and install controls ~
in Square D Model QMB existing motor starter center in addition
to making modifications in existing wiring and add new wiring.
The installation of equipment in existing center cubicles neces-
sarily requires that additions be of the same construction as
the original equipment, All wiring shall be NEMA Class 11 B,
1.01 REVISIONS TO EXISTING MOTOR STARTER CENTER
The existing motor starter center is of Square D Model QMB construc-
tion, The Contractor shat, add a new 100 Amp circuit breaker, starter
as specified in Section 16150 of this specification and revise wiring
as shown on the Plans, f
i
END OF SECTION
Lj
16181-1
i
fl I
i
i
f ~
` I
16500 LIGHTING SYSTEM
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish and install all lighting fixtures,
switches, receptacles, contactors, controls, and other accessories as
required to provide the system as shown on the Plans and described in
these specifications.
1.02 LOCATION OF OUTLETS
The approximate locations of cabinets, panelboards, switches, power
outlets, etc., are indicated on the Plans. Unless otherwise indi-
cated, convenience outlets shall be located 11-6" above floor, wall
switches shall be located 41-6" above floor, and thermostats shall be
located 51-0" above floor.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES
The Contractor shall furnish and install all lighting fixtures
throughout, complete with lamps, sockets, wiring, hangers, etc., as
l required. Types of fixtures shall be as follows:
I Type A, Ceiling mounted flourescent fixture with 2-40 watt rapid
start lamps, CUM thermally protected rapid start ballasts for 120 VAC
operation. Fixture shall be furnished with one-piece flanged lens
enclosure molded from clear virgin acrylic, Lens shall be retained
by lock-tight cam-action latches and fully gasketed with closed-cell
foamed neoprene permanently attached to fixture housing. Fixture
shall be Cleanlite/WL SWC240, or approved eaual.
2.02 LIGHTING CONTROL/DISTRIBUTION HARDWARE
A. WALL SWITCHES
`~JJI Wall switches for general use shall be of the totally enclosed
industrial type, specification grade, Arrow Hart, Hubbell, or
equal, as shown below.
Type Arrow-Hart No. Hubbell No.
Single Pole, 20 a. 1991 - 1991-1 1221 - 1221-1
Install wall switches to accomplish the control as shown on the
Plans, using single pole as required. Use gang mounting where
two or more switches occur at the same location.
i4
16500-1
~a
E1
i
r+
CONVENIENCE: OUTLETS
Convenience outlets for general use shall be Uriderwriter's
approved heavy duty duplex grounding type, 15 ampere, 125 volts,
Leviton Spec-Master No. 5262-8G, General Electric hospital grade
equal, or equal. Outlet shall have heavy phosphor bronze
contacts,
C. SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE PLATES
Switch and receptacle plates shall be Leviton Spec-Master,
General Electric hospital grade or equal, and shall be specifi-
cation grade, high abuse ny,on throughout and shall meet Federal
Specification W-P-455a and UL 514.
3.00 EXECUTION
Installation of equipment shall be performed by the Contractor, who
will be required to assemble the equipment where required and install
it in accordance with Installation, Operation and Maintenance, in-
structions which shall be furnished by the Vendor or Manufacturer.
All installations shall be complete, including electrical continuity
and operational tests.
END OF SECTION
f
1
f
,
I
1
1
16500-2
I
i
i
T1
'11
i
I
16980 _INSTRUMENTATION AND SUPERVISORY CONTROL
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE j
The work covered by this item of the specifications includes fur-
1
nishing and installing all instrumentation and equipment for a
complete supervisory control system as indicated on the Plans and in
the specifications. The Contractor shall insure that the electrical
interface between the Supervisory Control System and other equipment
is complete and fully operational.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The work covered by this section of the specifications shall comprise
of summing two existing 0-60 PPM raw water flow signals, converting
the sum to an analog 4-20 MA signal and transmitting the sum to the
Raw Water Pump Station through a scanning transmitter over an exis-
ting buried cable to a scanning receiver which will reproduce the
4-20 MA signal to pace a chemical feed system. The Instrumentation
and Supervisory Control system shall comprise all of the instrument
and tone equipment along with all accessory hardware and associated
enclosures and/or equipment mounting frames at the existing Raw Water
Pump Station and Water Treatment Plant.
1.03 DESIGN
A. GENERAL
All of the equipment shall be the manufacturer's latest and
` proven design. Specifications and drawings call attention to
certain features, but do not purport to cover all details enter-
ing into the design of the Instrumentation and Supervisory
Control System. The completed system shall be compatible with
the functions required and with all equipment interfaced.
8. OPERATING VOLTAGE
The equipment shall operate either directly or through suitable
power supplies from 12 volts DC. The equipment shall tolerate
variations of plus and minus 10 percent of the supply voltage.
The drawings and specifications indicate energy sources pro-
vided. Any other devices or power supplies necessary to obtain
proper operation of the Supervisory Control system from these
energy sources shall be furnished with the supervisory controls.
C. FREQUENCY CONTROL
The frequency determining elements (the receiver filter, dis-
criminator, and oscillator tank) shall be of the LC type and
16980••1
i
shall be sealed in a temperature-cumpensatIng plug-in can. The
elements shall be fixed in frequency and shall require no ad-
justment. The frequency shall be clearly marked on each frequen- LJ
cy determining element.
frequency-determining elements shall be available to permit c
operation at channel spacing of 100, 1?0, 170, 240, or 480 ;
` Hertz, '
I D, FREQUENCY STABILITY
Tone Frequency shall not vary more than plus or minus 0.6
percent with a temperature variation of minus 30 to plus 60
degrees centigrade and power source variation of +10%.
i
E. TEMPERATURE RANGE
The equipment shall opErate over a temperature range of minus 30
to plus 60 degrees centigrade and at relative humidity levels to
F. IMPEDANCE
Transmitters and receivers shall present to the Communications
{ Circuit a standard impedance of 600 ohms at center frequency
with rising characteristics each side of center frequency.
G. ACCURACY
Overall system accuracy (input to output) shall be within 0.5% ~
for analog signals.
H. PACKAGING
All equipment shall be of modular plug-in construction and shall
be physically interchangeable, Modules shall have floating type
gold-plated connectors to insure good connection,
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
i Submissions for approval shall include (1) component manufacturing
data sheet indicating pertinent data and identifying each component
by item number and nomenclature as indicated on the drawings and in
the specifications, (2) component drawing showing dimensions, moun-
ting and external connection details, (3) a system piping schematic
and wiring schematic each on a single drawing with full description
of operation, (4) complete schematic diagram of each piece of elec-
trical and electronic equipment including electrical values and
tolerances for each component, Component identification on the sche-
matic shall be as described above.
16980-2
I
r ~
ii
Following approval, the manufacturer shall be responsible for prapa- ,
ration of the required sets of these drawings for distribution as
indicated in the Supplemental Conditions, /rf
All material submitted for approval shall be contained in one sub- r
mission, partial submittals will not be reviewed.
' Sales bulletins and other general publications are not acceptable as
submittals for approval,
Operating and maintenance instructions and parts lists shall be
furnished as set forth in the Supplemental Conditions. Operating
instructions shall also incorporate a functional description of the
entire system including the system schematics which reflect
"as-built" modifications.
Special maintenance requirements particular to the system shall be
clearly defined along with special calibration and test procedures,
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 SCANNER TRANSMITTER
Transmitter shall be equipped to accept 4 anal-1a inputs and 8 digital
(status) inputs.
Transmitter shall be strappable for transmission of analog data in
either binary or BCD format,
Analog inputs shall be fully isolated from one another and from
internal circuitry by using a "flying capacitor" or equivalent
technique. Digital inputs shall be isolated by photo-couplers,
fy buffer relays, or equivalent devices.
Transmitter shall include parity checking, and be equipped for
optional double scan, for message security,
Transmitter shall be equipped with front panel switches to enable
user to transmit 0, 50, and 100% signals for calibration and checking
of equipment.
Transmitter shall have front panel control to enable user to
repeatedly transmit any one of the multiple analog inputs, bypassing
the others, to aid in the calibration of the channel,
Transmitter shall have an input impedance of at least 10 megohms,
The transmitter shall be configured to handle digital inputs that are
dry contact or positive or negative voltage.
The transmitter shall be a solid state unit with a built in FSK tone
transmitter.
16980-3
i
The transmitter shall have output data rate adjustable to 50 bps,
The transmitters shall be QEI, Inc. QDTT20.
2.02 SCANNER RECEIVER f i
Receiver shall be equipped to provide 4 analog outputs and 8 digital '
(statL+s) outputs. Receiver shall be a solid state unit with a
built-in FSK tone transmitter,
The last valid reading of all analog and status values shall be
retained in memory indefinitely, and all outputs maintained, so that
last current recorder, meter, and status readings will be maintained
in the event of a failure of the communication circuit. User shall
be able to restrap unit in the field to cause reset of all data to
zero upon line failure, if desirable.
Receiver analog and status outputs shall be fully isolated from
system ground.
1
Receiver status outputs shall be relay buffered, with output contacts
rated at 5 amperes,
I The receiver shall be capable of operating at speeds up to 50 bits
per second.
The receivers shall be QEI, Inc. QDTR20.
2.03 POWER SUPPLIES
uwer supplies shall be 1700 ma, regulated 12 DC, of modular con-
f struction arranged to plug into a standard relay mounting rack for i
f tone transmitters and receivers. Ripple voltage shall not exceed 20 i
MV. maximum, Output voltage variation shall not exceed 1,0 VOC from ,
0 to full load, or 1.0 VOC for a variation in input from 95 to 135
VAC. The unit shall be all transistorized with fused power trans-
former and test socket for measuring the output voltage. Power
supplies shall be DAQ, Inc. Type OP-115, Quindar QP-19, or approved
equal.
2.04 MOUNTING FRAMES
Li '
Tone units shall plug into a mounting frame suitable for mounting
on a standard 19-inch wide rack, The mounting frame shall accommodate '
at least one transmitter and/or receiver including their power supply
in not over eight inches of rack height, The mounting frame shall
have adjustable mounting flanges to permit mounting at various depths
on the rack. The mounting frame shall provide a separate barrier-
type terminal block with screw-type terminals for each tone unit.
Mounting frames shall be QEI, Inc,, Model QXM-3.
I
16980-4
.
i
2,05 INTERPOSING RELAYS
Control relays shall be Potter and Brumfield Series KUMP, or approved
equal, with 3 Form C contacts rated at 15 amps @ 28V DC/240 VAC,
Relays shall be for 24 VDC, or 120 VAC operation as shown on the
01 Plans and in the spec IFications, Control relays shall be totally
enclosed in a clear heat and shock resistant polycarbonate dust cover
i and shall be suitable for plug-in mounting on screw terminal sockets.
Hold down clips shall be provided to prevent accidental dislocation i
of relays from their sockets,
j 2,06 PULSE SUMMING MODULE
The Contractor shall furnish and install in the existing instrument
panel at the Water Treatment Plant an adder as shown on the Plans.
The circuit boards shall be suitable for mounting in the rear of a
panel housing and shall be capable of receiving two 24VOC positive
going pulses and have an output signal of 24VDC positive going
' pulses, Adder shall be for operation on 120 VAC, shall have an
accuracy of + 0,1%, and shall be Moore Industries Model I
OHz = 4 mA, 7 Hz = 20 mA.
2,07 FREQUENCY TO DC 'TRANSMITTER
The Con tr, t shall furnish and install in the instrument panel
pulse to current converter as shown on the Plans, Converter shall be
suitable for mounting in the rear of the instrument panel and shall
be capable of receiving a 24VDC positive going pulses proportional to
flow and have an output signal of 4-20 MA, The unit shall be for
operation on 120VAC, shall have an accuracy of +0.1X, and shall be
j suitable for operation between temperature limi" s of -18°C TO +74°C.
Pulse to current converters shall be Moore Industries Model FDT/LFA/
+ 4-2OMA/I17AC/AT/FC/STD, OHZ = 4MA, 2HZ = 20MA,
3.00 INSTALLATION
3.01 GENERAL
All supervision, labor, tools, and materials necessary for instal-
lation of the supervisory control equipment and their interconnection
shall be provided by the Contractor.
The installation of the. Supervisory control system shall include the
following;
a. Installation of equipment furnished under this Contract,
b, Interconnections between equipment furnished under this
Contract.
C. Interconnection between equipment furnished under this Contract
and the existing equipment or that furnished and installed under
other Contracts,
16980-5
I ~
r
The Contractor shall coordinate the work of the manufacturer's
service personnel during construction, testing, calibration, and
acceptance of the supervisory control system. a
3.02 FACTORY SUPPORT
The supervisory service of a factory-trained service engineer who is
specifically trained on the type of equipment herein specified shall
be provided during construction to assist the Contractor during in-
stallation. Upon completion of the installation, the services of the
above service engineer shall be provided for calibration and start up
of the equipment and for instructing the operating personnel. The
manufacturer Full provide sufficient services to place the system in
satisfactory operation.
3.03 SYSTEM TEST AND CALIBRATION {
The Contractor shall assure that the system is completely checked out
and calibrated upon completion of the installation.
i
Prior to the Owner turning on any form of energy to the system, the
Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a certified statement of
approval of the installation, including his supplier's authorization
for turning on energy to the system,
END OF SECTION
'I
i
i
i
I
16980-6
i
Now